Introduction Michael Schwab Transformations Rosi Braidotti Abandoning Art in the Name of Art: Transpositional Logic in Artistic Research Esa Kirkkopelto Calling the Dragon, Holding Hands with Junipers: Transpositions in Practice Annette Arlander Aberrant Likenesses: The Transposition of Resemblances in the Performance of Written Music Lucia D’Errico Work of Art as Analyst as Work of Art Laura González Annlee; or, Transposition as Artistic Device Leif Dahlberg Transposing the Unseen: The Metaphors of Modern Physics Tor-Finn Malum Fitje Staging Collisions: On Behaviour David Pirrò Algorithms under Reconfiguration Hanns Holger Rutz
Speculations on Transpositional Photography Birk Weiberg
Transpositionality and Artistic Research Michael Schwab Transpositions: From Traces through Data to Models and Simulations Hans-Jörg Rheinberger
Transposition Cecile Malaspina
Transduction and Ensembles of Transducers: Relaying Flows of Intensities Paulo de Assis
Alchemistic Transpositions: On Artistic Practices of Transmutation and Transition Dieter Mersch
Ineffable Dispositions Mika Elo
Without Remainder or Residue: Example, Making Use, Transposition Yve Lomax
New modes of epistemic relationships in artistic researchResearch leads to new insights rupturing the existent fabric of knowledge. Situated in the still evolving field of artistic research, this book investigates a fundamental quality of this process. Building on the lessons of deconstruction, artistic research invents new modes of epistemic relationships that include aesthetic dimensions.
Under the heading transposition, seventeen artists, musicians, and theorists explain how one thing may turn into another in a spatio-temporal play of identity and difference that has the power to expand into the unknown. By connecting materially concrete positions in a way familiar to artists, this book shows how moves can be made between established positions and completely new ground. In doing so, research changes from a process that expands knowledge to one that creatively reinvents it.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors: Annette Arlander (University of the Arts Helsinki), Paulo de Assis (Orpheus Institute, Ghent), Rosi Braidotti (Utrecht University), Leif Dahlberg (Royal Institute of Technology Stockholm), Lucia D’Errico (Orpheus Institute, Ghent), Mika Elo (University of the Arts Helsinki), Laura González (Royal Conservatoire of Scotland), Esa Kirkkopelto (University of the Arts Helsinki), Yve Lomax (Royal College of Art, London), Cecile Malaspina (CNRS-Université Paris 1/Université Paris 7), Tor-Finn Malum Fitje (independent artist, Oslo), Dieter Mersch (Zurich University of the Arts), David Pirrò (University of Music and Performing Arts Graz), Hans-Jörg Rheinberger (Max Planck Institute for the History of Science, Berlin), Hanns Holger Rutz (University of Music and Performing Arts Graz), Michael Schwab (Orpheus Institute, Ghent/University of Applied Arts Vienna), Birk Weiberg (Zurich University of the Arts)
=536 \\$aEuropean Research Council =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$aSchwab, Michael,$eeditor. =700 1\$aArlander, Annette,$econtributions by. =700 1\$ade Assis, Paulo,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aBraidotti, Rosi,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aDahlberg, Leif,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aD'Errico, Lucia,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aElo, Mika,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aGonzalez, Laura,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aKirkkopelto, Esa,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aLomax, Yve,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aMalaspina, Cecile,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aMalum Fitje, Tor-Fin,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aMersch, Dieter,$econtributions by.$0(orcid)000000016623043X$1https://orcid.org/0000-0001-6623-043X =700 1\$aPirró, David,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aRheinberger, Hans-Jörg,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aRutz, Hanns Holger,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aWeiberg, Birk,$econtributions by. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aOrpheus Institute Series ;$vvol. 6. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461662538$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/265806//_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04743nam 22008532 4500 =001 5bc7929a-de8f-44c2-af4f-4d4f8e6fea98 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20202020\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702387$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663429$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663412$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663412$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHRH$2bicssc =072 7$aHRHP$2bicssc =072 7$aWH$2bicssc =072 7$aJFFN$2bicssc =072 7$aAPF$2bicssc =072 7$aASZB$2bicssc =072 7$aD$2bicssc =072 7$a1DFG$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC048000$2bisacsh =072 7$aHUM021000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPER015000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPER004090$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT020000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015030$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT004170$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC008060$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$a1.3.2.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aQRP$2thema =072 7$aQRPP$2thema =072 7$aWH$2thema =072 7$aJBFH$2thema =072 7$aATMC$2thema =072 7$aATXD$2thema =072 7$aD$2thema =072 7$a1DFG$2thema =100 1\$aNickl, Benjamin,$eauthor. =245 10$aTurkish German Muslims and Comedy Entertainment :$bSettling into Mainstream Culture in the 21st Century /$cBenjamin Nickl. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2020. =264 \4$c©2020 =300 \\$a1 online resource (217 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aCurrent Issues in Islam ;$vvol. 4. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aPreface
INTRODUCTION Finding a Voice of Their Own
CHAPTER I Germanness, Othering and Ethnic Comedy
CHAPTER II
Clash Films
CHAPTER II
Television Narratives of Ottoman Invasion and Cohabitation
CHAPTER IV Bridget Jones’s Halal Diary
CHAPTER V Funny Online Kanakism
CHAPTER VI
Settling into “Post-Migrant” Mainstream Culture
CONCLUSION European Muslims’ Issues: Turkish German Comedy in a Global Entertainment and Identity Politics Framework
Notes References
Turkish German comedy culture and the lived realities of Turkish Muslims in Germany
Comedy entertainment is a powerful arena for serious public engagement with questions of German national identity and Turkish German migration. The German majority society and its largest labour migrant community have been asking for decades what it means to be German and what it means for Turkish Germans, Muslims of the second and third generations, to call Germany their home. Benjamin Nickl examines through the social pragmatics of humour the dynamics that underpin these questions in the still-evolving popular culture space of German mainstream humour in the 21st century. The first book-length study on the topic to combine close readings of film, television, literary and online comedy, and transnational culture studies, Turkish German Muslims and Comedy Entertainment presents the argument that Turkish German humour has moved from margin to mainstream by intervening in cultural incompatibility and Islamophobia discourse.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction. Ubiquity Has a History
Jacob W. Lewis and Kyle Parry
Chapter 1. Early Photography’s Presence Jacob W. Lewis
Chapter 2. Photographic Privilege at the World’s Columbian Exposition Annie Rudd
Chapter 3. Material Ecologies in the Géniaux Brothers’ Picture Archive of Brittany, ca. 1900 Maura Coughlin
Chapter 4. “Our Best Machines Are Made of Sunlight”: Photography and Technologies of Light Niharika Dinkar
Chapter 5. Managing Time: Nonhuman Animal Labor in Photographic Images Joseph Moore
Chapter 6. In 1973: Family Photography as Material, Affective History Mette Sandbye
Chapter 7. Where Is My Photo? A Study of the Representation of Tehran in the Work of Contemporary Iranian Photographers Mohammadreza Mirzaei
Chapter 8. Evidence of Feeling: Race, Police Violence, and the Limits of Documentation Catherine Zuromskis
Chapter 9. On Photographic Ubiquity in the Age of Online Self-Imaging Derek Conrad Murray
Chapter 10. Parafiction and the New Latent Image Kate Palmer Albers Chapter 11. Dispersal and Denial: Photographic Ubiquity and the Microbial Analogy Kyle Parry
Chapter 12. That Liking Feeling: Mood, Emotion, and Social Media Photography Michelle Henning
Chapter 13. “The Compass of Repair”: An Interview with Ariella Aïsha Azoulay Jacob W. Lewis & Kyle Parry
Plates
A critical anthology on the widespread use and influence of photography
From its invention to the internet age, photography has been considered universal, pervasive, and omnipresent. This anthology of essays posits how the question of when photography came to be everywhere shapes our understanding of all manner of photographic media. Whether looking at a portrait image on the polished silver surface of the daguerreotype, or a viral image on the reflective glass of the smartphone, the experience of looking at photographs and thinking with photography is inseparable from the idea of ubiquity—that is, the apparent ability to be everywhere at once. While photography’s distribution across cultures today is undeniable, the insidious logics and pervasive myths that have governed its spread demand our critical attention, now more than ever.
Contributors: Kate Palmer Albers (Whittier College), Ariella Aïsha Azoulay (Brown University), Maura Coughlin (Bryant University), Niharika Dinkar (Boise State University), Michelle Henning (University of Liverpool), Jacob W. Lewis (University of Rochester), Mohammadreza Mirzaei (University of California, Santa Barbara), Joseph Moore (independent artist), Derek Conrad Murray (University of California, Santa Cruz), Kyle Parry (University of California, Santa Cruz), Annie Rudd (University of Calgary), Mette Sandbye (University of Copenhagen), Catherine Zuromskis (Rochester Institute of Technology)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
Thinking, Performing, and Overcoming Belgium’s ‘Colonial Power Matrix’? An Introduction Pierre-Philippe Fraiture
Part 1 — Regimes of Knowledge and Decolonisation
Must Leopold Fall? The Renovation of the AfricaMuseum and Belgium’s Place in International Debates on the Decolonisation of Public Heritage Dónal Hassett
Imperial Fictions: Belgian Novels about Rwanda Nicki Hitchcott
Confronting the Colonial Past? Genocide Education in Francophone Belgian Schools Catherine Gilbert
Part 2 — International Resonances
Imperial Entanglements of the Congo/African Institute, Colwyn Bay, Wales (1889–1911) Robert Burroughs
Performative Challenges to Belgium’s Colonial Amnesia: Mobilising Archives and Resonant Spaces Yvette Hutchison
Writing in Ciluba: From Colonial Extirpation to the Challenge of Globalisation Albert Kasanda
Part 3 — Imperial Practices and Their Afterlives
Media Representations of Burundi’s 2020 Elections in Belgium and Burundi Caroline Williamson Sinalo
Living with Ruination: Rural Neglect and the Persistence of ‘Grey’ Colonial Architecture in Kongolo, Tanganyika, DRC Reuben A. Loffman
Cash Crops and Clichés: Agriculture, Contact Zones, and Afterlives of Belgian Colonialism Sarah Arens
The Legacy of Alexis Kagame: Responses to Conceptions of Colonisation and Evangelisation in Rwanda Chantal Gishoma
Part 4 — Trans-African Entanglements
‘Depuis la Flamandchourie’: Legacies of Belgian Colonialism in Sony Labou Tansi’s Kinshasa Sky Herington
Landscaping and Escaping the Colony in Mudimbe’s, Ruti’s, and Nayigiziki’s Works’ Maëline Le Lay
Récit d’enfance, récit de distance: Gaby as implicated subject in Gaël Faye’s Petit Pays Hannah Grayson
Part 5 —The Emergence of Diasporic Agents
‘Without Art Congo Is Just a Mine’: Art as the Restoration of Shattered Bodies Bambi Ceuppens
From Leopold III’s Masters of the Congo Jungle to Contemporary Congolese Eco-Cinema: Postcolonial Resonance Matthias De Groof
Tracking the Potholes of Colonial History: Sinzo Aanza’s Généalogie d’une banalité and Fiston Mwanza Mujila’s Tram 83 Pierre-Philippe Fraiture
Bibliography About the authors Index
Colonial memory and interdisciplinary memorialization across Congo, Rwanda, Burundi and Belgium
Belgian colonialism was short-lived but left significant traces that are still felt in the twenty-first century. This book explores how the imperial past has lived on in Belgium, but also in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Rwanda and Burundi. The contributing authors approach colonial legacies from an interdisciplinary perspective and examine how literature, politics, the arts, the press, cinema, museal practices, architecture, and language policies – but also justice and ethics – have been used to critically revisit this period of African and European history. Whilst engaging with significant figures such as Sammy Baloji, Chokri Ben Chikha, Gaël Faye, François Kabasele, Alexis Kagame, Edmond Leplae, VY Mudimbe, Fiston Mwanza Mujila, Joseph Ndwaniye, and Sony Labou Tansi, this book also analyses the role of places such as the AfricaMuseum, Bujumbura, Colwyn Bay, Kongolo, and the Virunga Park to appraise the links between memory and the development of a postcolonial present.
Contributors: Sarah Arens (University of Liverpool), Robert Burroughs (Leeds Beckett), Bambi Ceuppens (AfricaMuseum), Matthias De Groof (University of Antwerp), Catherine Gilbert (University of Newcastle), Chantal Gishoma (University of Bayreuth), Hannah Grayson (University of Stirling), Dónal Hassett (University of Cork), Sky Herington (University of Warwick), Nicki Hitchcott (University of St Andrews), Yvette Hutchison (University of Warwick), Albert Kasanda (Charles University, Prague), Maëline Le Lay (CNRS/ THALIM, Sorbonne nouvelle), Reuben Loffman (Queen Mary University of London), Caroline Williamson Sinalo (University of Cork)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction Paulo de Assis
Virtual Works—Actual Things Paulo de Assis
Locating the Performable Musical Work in Practice: A Non-Platonist Interpretation of the “Classical Paradigm” David Davies
Towards a General Theory of Musical Works and Musical Listening Gunnar Hindrichs
The Work of the Performer John Rink
Music as Play: A Dialogue Andreas Dorschel
What Anyway Is a “Music Discomposed”? Reading Cavell through the Dark Glasses of Adorno Lydia Goehr
Three Responses to Lydia Goehr’s Essay “What Anyway Is a ‘Music Discomposed’?” Lydia Goehr Response 1 What Is a Music Dis-discomposed? Kathy Kiloh Response 2 Krenek, Cage, and Stockhausen in Cavell’s “Music Discomposed” Jake McNulty Response 3 Stanley Cavell’s “Music Discomposed” at 52 Paulo de Assis
Appendix The International Orpheus Academy for Music and Theory 2016: Concerts and Installations
Notes on Contributors
Index
Beyond musical works: new perspectives on music ontology and performance
What are musical works? How are they constructed in our minds? Which material things allow us to speak about them in the first place? Does a specific way of conceiving musical works limit their performative potentials? Which alternative, more productive images of musical work can be devised?
Virtual Works – Actual Things addresses contemporary music ontological discourses, challenging dominant musicological accounts, questioning their authoritative foundation and moving towards dynamic perspectives devised by music practitioners and artist researchers. Specific attention is given to the relationship between the virtual multiplicities that enable the construction of an image of a musical work and the actual, concrete materials that make such a construction possible. With contributions by prominent scholars, this book is a wide-ranging and fascinating collection of essays, which will be of great interest for artistic research, contemporary musicology, music philosophy, performance studies and music pedagogy alike.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors: David Davies (McGill University, Montreal), Andreas Dorschel (University of the Arts Graz), Lydia Goehr (Columbia University, New York), Kathy Kiloh (OCAD University, Toronto), Jake McNulty (Columbia University, New York), Gunnar Hindrichs (University of Basel), John Rink (University of Cambridge)
=536 \\$aEuropean Research Council =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$ade Assis, Paulo,$eeditor. =700 1\$aDavies, David,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aDorschel, Andreas,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aGoehr, Lydia,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aKiloh, Kathy,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aMcNulty, Jake,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aHindrichs, Gunnar,$econtributions by. =700 1\$aRink, John,$econtributions by. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aOrpheus Institute Series ;$vvol. 4. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461662521$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/265267//_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05185nam 22004212 4500 =001 24b81c59-de1d-419a-b3f6-7725b8f41eb8 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20112011\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789058678584$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461661180$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/VP_PLU$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aDS$2bicssc =072 7$aLIT000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aDS$2thema =245 00$aVirtues for the People :$bAspects of Plutarchan Ethics /$cedited by Geert Roskam, Luc Van der Stockt. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2011. =264 \4$c©2011 =300 \\$a1 online resource (320 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aPlutarchea Hypomnemata ;$vvol. 5. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aEfficiency and Effectiveness of Plutarch's Broadcasting Ethics
G. Roskam - L. Van der Stockt
1. Virtues for the people
Semper duo, numquam tres? Plutarch's Popularphilosophie
on Friendship and Virtue in On having many friends
L. Van der Stockt
What is Popular about Plutarch's 'Popular Philosophy'?
Chr. Pelling
Plutarch's Lives and the Critical Reader
T.E. Duff
Greek Poleis and the Roman Empire: Nature and Features of Political Virtues in an Autocratic System
P. Desideri
Del Satiro che voleva baciare il fuoco (o Come trarre vantaggio dai nemici)
J.C. Capriglione
Plutarch's 'Diet-Ethics'. Precepts of Healthcare Between Diet and Ethics
L. Van Hoof
2. Some theoretical questions on ethical praxis
Plutarchan Morality: Arete, Tyche, and Non-Consequentialism
H.M. Martin
Virtue, Fortune, and Happiness in Theory and Practice
J. Opsomer
Plutarch Against Epicurus on Affection for Offspring. A Reading of De amore prolis
G. Roskam
3. Virtues and vices
Plutarch's 'Minor' Ethics: Some Remarks on De garrulitate, De curiositate, and De vitioso pudore
A.G. Nikolaidis
Plutarchs Schrift gegen das Borgen (ΠεÏὶ τοῦ μὴ δεῖν δανείζεσθαι): Adressaten, Lehrziele und Genos
H.G. Ingenkamp
Competition and its Costs: Φιλονικία in Plutarch's Society and Heroes
Ph.A. Stadter
4. 'Popular philosophy' in context
Astrometeorología y creencias sobre los astros en Plutarco
A. Pérez Jiménez
Bitch is Not a Four-Letter Word. Animal Reason and Human Passion in Plutarch
J. Mossman - F. Titchener
Autour du miroir. Les miroitements d'une image dans l'oeuvre de Plutarque
F. Frazier
Bibliography
Index Locorum
Abstracts
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aPlutarch of Chaeronea, Platonist, polymath, and prolific writer, was by no means an armchair philosopher. He believed in the necessity for a philosopher to affect the lives of his fellow citizens. That urge inspired many of his writings to meet what he considered people's true needs. Although these writings on practical ethics illustrate in various ways Plutarch's authorial talents and raise many challenging questions (regarding their overall structure, content, purpose, and underlying philosophical and social presuppositions), they have attracted only limited scholarly attention. Virtues for the People contains a collection of essays that deal with these questions from different perspectives and as such throw a new light upon this multifaceted domain of Plutarch's thinking and writing. Special points of interest are the concept of ‘popular philosophy' itself and its implications, its dependence on a more theoretical philosophical background, and the importance of moral progress, the therapy of wickedness, and the common experiences of everyday life.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
Introduction: Watching, Waiting
Sandra Križić Roban and Ana Šverko
The Politics of Emptiness
Chapter 1. Separation Anxiety: Filming the Nicosia Buffer Zone
Stuart Moore and Kayla Parker
Chapter 2. The Empty Plinth and the Politics of Emptiness
Bec Rengel
Chapter 3. Occupying Empty Places : Political Protest and Solidarity Among Strangers in Times of Social Distancing
Anna Schober
Revisiting Emptiness
Chapter 4. Staging Isolation: Images of Seclusion and Separation
Catlin Langford
Chapter 5. Milovan Gavazzi and Ethnographic Photography : Practices and Policies of Croatian Field Research and Archiving in the First Half of the Twentieth Century
Tihana Rubić
Chapter 6. Emptiness as a Tool in the Representation of Public Health Monuments in Croatia
Stella Fatović-Ferenčić and Martin Kuhar
Rethinking Emptiness
Chapter 7. Silent Ruins: Traditions, Photographs, and the Perception of the Void
Elke Katharina Wittich
Chapter 8. A Land of Collective Solitude
Isabelle Catucci
The Performance of Emptiness
Chapter 9. The Power of Emptiness : Arne Jacobsen’s National Bank, Copenhagen, 1961–1978
Ruth Baumeister
Chapter 10. Ornament as a Regulatory System : Photographic Representations of Field Hospitals During the Covid-19 Pandemic
Klaudija Sabo
Chapter 11. Deconstructing Understandings of Emptiness : An Examination of Representations of Transitory Space and ‘Non-place’ in Photography
Jessie Martin
A Visual Essay: Documenting Emptiness
Chapter 12. Distance, Proximity
Luca Nostri
About the Contributors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aFirst study on empty places in photography and the Covid-19 pandemic.
In the aftermath of Covid-19, the subject of ‘empty places’ has gained renewed topicality and resonance. Watching, Waiting presents a collection of essays that brings emptiness into interdisciplinary focus as an object of study that extends beyond the present. The contributors approach the specific interrelationships of photography and place through emptiness by considering historical and contemporary material in equal measure. Drawing on architecture, anthropology, sociology, and public health, among other fields, they provide insights into geographically and temporally diverse production models of empty places and their corresponding complex and sensitive global and local relations, while also tackling the ethics of behaviour and protests that unfold within them. The book's chapters, both photographic and scholarly essays, cover areas that range widely both thematically and geographically, spanning static film footage of Nicosia's Buffer Zone, protest photographs in the wake of the Black Lives Matter movement in Bristol, staged images from the University of Zagreb's ethnological archives, historic landscape and architectural photography, aerial shots of Covid-19 mass graves in Brazil, photos of artificially built field hospitals and quarantine rooms during the pandemic, and images of empty airports at night. Through still and moving images, Watching, Waiting examines the photographic aestheticisation of emptiness, existing stereotypes of ‘empty places’, and transformations of human experiences.
Contributors: Ruth Baumeister (Aarhus School of Architecture), Isabelle Catucci da Silva (Federal University of Paraná), Stella Fatović-Ferenčić (Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts), Martin Kuhar (Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts), Catlin Langford (Centre for Contemporary Photography), Jessie Martin (University of West London), Stuart Moore (University of the West of England), Luca Nostri (Independent Artist Photographer), Kayla Parker (University of Plymouth), Bec Rengel (University of the West of England), Tihana Rubić (University of Zagreb), Klaudija Sabo (University of Klagenfurt), Anna Schober (University of Klagenfurt), Elke Katharina Wittich (Leibniz University Hannover)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
A visual introduction Acknowledgements Foreword
Introduction
Chapter One Learning about German colonialism: On memory, activism, and the Humboldt Forum
Chapter Two Being affected: A methodological approach to working through colonial collections
Chapter Three Expanding collection histories: The museum as peopled organisation
Chapter Four Troubling epistemologies: On the endurance of colonial discrimination
Chapter Five Managing plethora:Caring for colonial collections
Chapter Six Researching provenance: The politics of writing history
Chapter Seven Probing materiality: Collections as amalgams of their histories
Chapter Eight Repairing representations: Curatorial cultures and change in the Ethnological Museum
Conclusion
Timeline References cited
Reckoning with colonial legacies in Western museum collections
What are the possibilities and limits of engaging with colonialism in ethnological museums? This book addresses this question from within the Africa department of the Ethnological Museum in Berlin. It captures the Museum at a moment of substantial transformation, as it prepared the move of its exhibition to the Humboldt Forum, a newly built and contested cultural centre on Berlin’s Museum Island. The book discusses almost a decade of debate in which German colonialism was negotiated, and further recognised, through conflicts over colonial museum collections.
Based on two years of ethnographic fieldwork examining the Museum’s various work practices, this book highlights the Museum’s embeddedness in colonial logics and shows how these unfold in the Museum’s everyday activity. It addresses the diverse areas of expertise in the Ethnological Museum – the preservation, storage, curation, and research of collections – and also draws on archival research and oral history interviews with current and former employees. Working through Colonial Collections unravels the ongoing and laborious processes of reckoning with colonialism in the Ethnological Museum’s present – processes from which other ethnological museums, as well as Western museums more generally, can learn.
With a preface by Sharon Macdonald.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgments Abbreviations Use of Names
1 Introduction 2 THE ETHNOGRAPHIC … 3 Failed Listening 4 … THE ARCHIVAL … 5 Close Listening 6 Collective Listening 7 … THE ACOUSTIC 8 Coda
Appendix Notes Bibliography Index
The colonial past through objects of sound
The Berlin Sound Archive (Lautarchiv) consists of an extensive collection of sound recordings, compiled for scientific purposes in the first half of the 20th century. Recorded on shellac are stories and songs, personal testimonies and poems, glossaries and numbers. This book engages with the archive by consistently focusing on recordings produced under colonial conditions.
With a firm commitment to postcolonial scholarship, Absent Presences in the Colonial Archive is a historical ethnography of a metropolitan institution that participated in the production and preservation of colonial structures of power and knowledge. The book examines sound objects and listening practices that render the coloniality of knowledge fragile and inconsistent, revealing the absent presences of colonial subjects who are given little or no place in established national narratives and collective memories.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Dealing with the colonial archive entails acknowledging the inability to know everything, accounting for the archive’s limited and incomplete condition. Dealing with the colonial archive is not merely about stories of the past but also about the history of the present, and how it is interrupted by the past. — Irene Hilden, in conversation with New Books Network
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aHumboldt-Universität zu Berlin =536 \\$aCARMAH =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aColonial Legacies =653 \\$aSound Archives =653 \\$aEthnography =653 \\$aHistorical Anthropology =653 \\$aColonial Collections =653 \\$aColonialism =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664693$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/319360/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05186nam 22004452 4500 =001 7c0107b0-7fe4-4c44-b23a-12834d3c3f80 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789058679901$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664297$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664297$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBLH$2bicssc =072 7$aHIS037030$2bisacsh =072 7$aN$2thema =072 7$a3M$2thema =245 02$aA Constellation of Courts :$bThe Courts and Households of Habsburg Europe, 1555–1665 /$cedited by René Vermeir, Dries Raeymaekers, José Eloy Hortal Muñoz. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (394 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aAvisos de Flandes ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aCourts and households of the Habsburg dynasty: history and historiography
The political configuration of the Spanish Monarchy: the court and royal households José Martínez Millán
The court of Madrid and the courts of the viceroys Manuel Rivero
The economic foundations of the royal household of the Spanish Habsburgs, 1556-;1621 Carlos Javier de Carlos Morales
The household of archduke Albert of Austria from his arrival in Madrid until his election as governor of the Low Countries: 1570-;1595 José Eloy Hortal Muñoz
Flemish elites under Philip III's patronage (1598-1621): household, court and territory in the Spanish Habsburg Monarchy
Alicia Esteban Estríngana
The 'Spanish Faction' at the court of the archdukes Albert and Isabella Werner Thomas
“Vous estez les premiers vassaux que j'aye et que j'aime le plus.” Burgundians in the Brussels courts of the widowed Isabella and of the Cardinal-Infant don Ferdinand (1621-1641)* Birgit Houben
Anne of Austria, founder of the Val-de-Grâce in Paris Olivier Chaline
Some reflections on the ceremonial and image of the kings and queens of the House of Habsburg in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries Alejandro López àlvarez
From Graz to Vienna: structures and careers in the Frauenzimmer between 1570 and 1657 Katrin Keller
The Innsbruck court in the 17th century: identity and ceremonial of a court in flux Astrid von Schlachta
Quo vadis: present and potential approaches to the relations between the courts and households of the Habsburg dynasty in the Early Modern period
Appendix: Principal offices of the court of the Spanish Habsburg kings 371
Index
This volume focuses on the various Habsburg courts and households of the two branches of the dynasty that arose following the division of the territories originally held by Charles V. The authors trace the connections between these courtly communities regardless of their standing or composition, exposing the underlying network they formed. By cutting across the traditional division in the historiography between the Spanish and Austrian Habsburgs and also examining the roles played by the courts and households of lesser known members of the dynasty, this volume determines to what degree the organization followed a particular model and to what extent individuals were able to move between courts in pursuit of career opportunities and advancement.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors Alejandro López Álvarez (Universidad Autónoma de Madrid), Carlos Javier Carlos Morales (Universidad Autónoma de Madrid), Olivier Chaline (Université Paris IV - Sorbonne), Alicia Esteban Estríngana (Universidad de Alcalá), José Eloy Hortal Muñoz (Universidad Rey Juan Carlos), Birgit Houben (University of Antwerp), Katrin Keller (Universität Wien), José Martínez Millán (Universidad Autónoma de Madrid), Manuel Rivero (Universidad Autónoma de Madrid), Astrid von Schlachta (Universität Regensburg), Werner Thomas (KU Leuven)
List of images
Acknowledgements
Introduction: Across Anthropology
Margareta von Oswald and Jonas Tinius
Museums and the Savage Sublime
Arjun Appadurai
Transforming the Ethnographic : Anthropological Articulations in Museum and Heritage Research
Sharon Macdonald
“Museums are Investments in Critical Discomfort”
A conversation with Wayne Modest
Frontiers of the (Non)Humanly (Un)Imaginable : Anthropological Estrangement and the Making of Persona at the Musée du Quai Branly
Emmanuel Grimaud
“On Decolonising Anthropological Museums : Curators Need to Take ‘Indigenous’ Forms of Knowledge More Seriously”
A conversation with Anne-Christine Taylor
Troubling Colonial Epistemologies in Berlin’s Ethnologisches Museum : Provenance Research and the Humboldt Forum
Margareta von Oswald
“Against the Mono-Disciplinarity of Ethnographic Museums”
A conversation with Clementine Deliss
Resisting Extraction Politics : Afro-Belgian Claims, Women’s Activism, and the Royal Museum for Central Africa
Sarah Demart
“Finding Means to Cannibalise the Anthropological Museum”
A conversation with Toma Muteba Luntumbue
Animating Collapse: Reframing Colonial Film Archives
Alexander Schellow and Anna Seiderer
“Translating the Silence”
A conversation with le peuple qui manque
Art-Anthropology Interventions in the Italian Post-Colony : The Scattered Colonial Body Project
Arnd Schneider
“Dissonant Agents and Productive Refusals”
A conversation with Natasha Ginwala
Porous Membranes : Hospitality, Alterity, and Anthropology in a Berlin District Gallery
Jonas Tinius
“What happens in that space in-between and beyond this relation”
A conversation with Bonaventure Soh Bejeng Ndikung
Material Kin : “Communities of Implication” in Post-Colonial, Post-Holocaust Polish Ethnographic Collections
Erica Lehrer
“Suggestions for a Post-Museum”
A conversation with Nanette Snoep
Representation of Culture(s) : Articulations of the De/Post-Colonial at the Haus der Kulturen der Welt in Berlin
Annette Bhagwati
“How Do We Come Together in a World that Isolates Us?”
A conversation with Nora Sternfeld
The Trans-Anthropological, Anachronism, and the Contemporary
Roger Sansi
List of contributors
Visual constellations across the fields
Some lists to inspire the reader
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aReframing anthropology: contemporary art, curatorial practice, postcolonial activism, and museumsHow can we rethink anthropology beyond itself? In this book, twenty-one artists, anthropologists, and curators grapple with how anthropology has been formulated, thought, and practised ‘elsewhere’ and ‘otherwise’. They do so by unfolding ethnographic case studies from Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, the Netherlands, and Poland – and through conversations that expand these geographies and genealogies of contemporary exhibition-making. This collection considers where and how anthropology is troubled, mobilised, and rendered meaningful.
Across Anthropology charts new ground by analysing the convergences of museums, curatorial practice, and Europe’s reckoning with its colonial legacies. Situated amid resurgent debates on nationalism and identity politics, this book addresses scholars and practitioners in fields spanning the arts, social sciences, humanities, and curatorial studies.
Preface by Arjun Appadurai. Afterword by Roger Sansi
Contributors: Arjun Appadurai (New York University), Annette Bhagwati (Museum Rietberg, Zurich), Clémentine Deliss (Berlin), Sarah Demart (Saint-Louis University, Brussels), Natasha Ginwala (Gropius Bau, Berlin), Emmanuel Grimaud (CNRS, Paris), Aliocha Imhoff and Kantuta Quirós (Paris), Erica Lehrer (Concordia University, Montreal), Toma Muteba Luntumbue (Ecole de Recherche Graphique, Brussels), Sharon Macdonald (Humboldt-Universität zu Berlin), Wayne Modest (Research Center for Material Culture, Leiden), Bonaventure Soh Bejeng Ndikung (SAVVY Contemporary, Berlin), Margareta von Oswald (Humboldt-Universität zu Berlin), Roger Sansi (Barcelona University), Alexander Schellow (Ecole de Recherche Graphique, Brussels), Arnd Schneider (University of Oslo), Anna Seiderer (University Paris 8), Nanette Snoep (Rautenstrauch-Joest-Museum, Cologne), Nora Sternfeld (Kunsthochschule Kassel), Anne-Christine Taylor (Paris), Jonas Tinius (Humboldt-Universität zu Berlin)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Listen to an interview with editors Margareta von Oswald and Jonas Tinius at New Books Network: https://newbooksnetwork.com/across-anthropology
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aHumboldt-Universität zu Berlin =536 \\$aCARMAH =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aAnthropology =653 \\$aEthnography =653 \\$aMuseums =653 \\$aCollections =653 \\$aDifficult Heritage =653 \\$aColonialism =653 \\$aPostcolonial theory =653 \\$aCuratorial Practices =653 \\$aContemporary Art =653 \\$aEurope =700 1\$aOswald, Margareta,$eeditor. =700 1\$aTinius, Jonas,$eeditor. =700 1\$aAppadurai, Arjun,$epreface by. =700 1\$aSansi, Roger,$econtributions by. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663184$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/275772/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 06379nam 22004092 4500 =001 23668fa0-fde2-4b04-98ef-cc9c4a24ea74 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789058677549$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461664174$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664174$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aMMJT$2bicssc =072 7$aPSY028000$2bisacsh =072 7$aMKMT$2thema =100 1\$aWesterink, Herman,$eauthor. =245 12$aA Dark Trace :$bSigmund Freud on the Sense of Guilt /$cHerman Westerink. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (320 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aFigures of the Unconscious ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aContents
Introduction IX
Chapter 1. Carmen and other representations 1
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 “Our bugles sounding the Retreat” 2
1.3 Moral treatment 7
1.4 A morally disturbing case 9
1.5 Moral character 11
1.6 A defensive ego 14
1.7 Self-reproach 19
1.8 Moral judgements 22
1.9 Seduction and self-reproach 25
1.10 Stories 30
1.11 Assessment 34
Chapter 2. Dark traces 37
2.1 Introduction 37
2.2 Your guilt isn't the same as mine 38
2.3 The dead kill 43
2.4 “Thus conscience doth make cowards of us all” 46
2.5 The dark trace of an old guilt 47
2.6 “My 'ought' set before me” 52
2.7 Primary and secondary processes 55
Chapter 3. Repressed desires 57
3.1 Introduction 57
3.2 Formation and utilization of sexuality 58
3.3 Weaknesses in the system 64
3.4 Attack and defence 67
3.5 Dominated by guilt 70
3.6 Cultural morality 74
3.7 Hostility toward the father 77
Chapter 4. Applied psychoanalysis 87
4.1 Introduction 87
4.2 The choices of Freud's followers 90
4.3 A single principle 98
4.4 The prohibition behind the imperative 102
4.5 Ambivalent feelings 105
4.6 Projection 112
4.7 Conscience 115
4.8 Systems of thought 117
4.9 An ancient guilt 122
Chapter 5. In the depths 139
5.1 Introduction 139
5.2 The depth surfaces 142
5.3 The downfall of self-reproach 147
5.4 “The youth sees himself as an idol” 150
5.5 Self-regard 153
5.6 Feelings of hate 156
5.7 When erotism and sense of guilt go hand in hand 157
5.8 The sense of guilt must be set at rest 162
5.9 “Becoming is impossible without destruction” 167
Chapter 6. Analyses of the ego 175
6.1 Introduction 175
6.2 “The Sphinx of ancient legend” 176
6.3 “A psychological crowd” 177
6.4 Emotional bonds 180
6.5 Identification: from Oedipus complex to sense of guilt
6.6 “The only pre-psychoanalytic thinker” 187
6.7 Towards an unconscious sense of guilt 195
6.8 The Oedipus complex and the superego 197
6.9 Unconscious sense of guilt 201
6.10 The problem of masochism 203
6.11 Conclusion 206
Chapter 7. Anxiety and helplessness 207
7.1 Introduction 207
7.2 Birth and the feeling of guilt 208
7.3 Castration anxiety and the sense of guilt 212
7.4 Helpless and dissatisfied 217
7.5 Illusion and science 219
7.6 Dogma and compulsion 221
7.7 Critique 222
7.8 The apologetics of a godless Jew 224
7.9 Considerations 227
Chapter 8. Synthesis and a new debate 229
8.1 Introduction 229
8.2 “The man of fate” 230
8.3 An instinctual character 231
8.4 La sensation religieuse 233
8.5 Impossible happiness 236
8.6 Hostility to civilization 242
8.7 Loving thy neighbour 245
8.8 Schiller and Goethe: The Philosophers 246
8.9 Struggle 251
8.10 Anxiety and the sense of guilt once again 254
8.11 Drive renunciation 256
8.12 Discontents 258
8.13 A new debate 261
8.14 Considerations 274
Chapter 9. Great men 275
9.1 Introduction 275
9.2 Moses the Egyptian 276
9.3 Akhenaton and monotheism 279
9.4 The Kadesh compromise 282
9.5 What is a great man? 284
9.6 St Paul 289
9.7 The sense of guilt and the return of the repressed
9.8 Assessments 295
Concluding considerations 297
Literature 303
Index 315
Voorwoord bij de tweede editie – Lieven D’hulst & Chris Van de Poel
Woord vooraf bij de eerste editie – Lieven D’hulst & Chris Van de Poel
Deel I – Het werk in goede banen
1.1. Literair vertaler word je, woord na woord … – Carlo Van Baelen
1.2. Zichtbaarheid van literair vertalers – Gys-Walt van Egdom en Christophe Declercq
1.3. Basiskennis en -vaardigheden – Chris Van de Poel
1.4. Naslag – Chris Van de Poel
1.5. Hoe bronteksten lezen? – Philippe Noble
1.6. Relatie tussen auteur en vertaler – Nicolette Hoekmeijer
1.7. Vertolking 2.0 – Over het opnieuw vertalen van klassiekers – Barber van de Pol
1.8. Duovertalen – Niek Miedema & Harm Damsma
Deel II – Belangrijke begrippen
2.1. Equivalentie in de vertaalpraktijk en de vertaalstudie – Henri Bloemen
2.2. Verre culturen en het vertalen van realia – Luk Van Haute
2.3. Vertaalprocedés – Stella Linn
2.4. Vertaling en stijl – Cees Koster
2.5. Creatief vertalen – Harm Damsma
2.6. De vertaling van meerstemmigheid en meertaligheid – Désirée Schyns
2.7. Humor – Jeroen Vandaele
2.8. Vertalen als intertekstuele praktijk – Paul Claes
2.9. Technologie voor literair vertalers – Gys-Walt van Egdom
Deel III – Een focus op genres
3.1. Het vertalen van narratief proza – Franco Paris
3.2. De regels voorbij: het vertalen van poëzie – Onno Kosters
3.3. Enige hardop uitgesproken gedachten over het vertalen van theater – Erik Bindervoet
3.4. Denken in veelvoud: het vertalen van filosofische teksten – Jeanne Holierhoek
3.5. Non-fictie vertalen – Jelle Noorman
3.6. Vertalen van kinder- en jeugdliteratuur – Goedele De Sterck
Deel IV – Na het vertalen
4.1. (Zelf)revisie – Laura van Campenhout & Ine Willems
4.2. Omgaan met promotie, prijzen en recensies – Janny Middelbeek- Oortgiesen
4.3. De beoordeling van de vertaling – Fedde van Santen
Bijlage I – Lijst van geciteerde vertalingen
Bijlage II – Bioschetsen van de auteurs
Namenregister
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aOnmisbaar handboek voor de literair vertaler – Herziene editie.
Alles verandert altijd is een onmisbaar instrument voor de literair vertaler in opleiding en de beginnende en gevorderde professional bij het vertalen in en uit het Nederlands. Het behandelt helder en bevattelijk de belangrijkste aspecten van het literair vertalen: de zakelijke en financiële aspecten, de basiskennis en vaardigheden die deze activiteit veronderstelt, de algemene kernbegrippen en uitdagingen, het vertalen van de traditionele literaire genres, maar ook van kinder- en jeugdliteratuur, literaire non-fictie en filosofie, en de ‘nazorg’ in de vorm van revisie, marketing en promotie. Deze herziene editie werd uitgebreid met bijdragen over vertalen en stijl, over (digitale) professionele zichtbaarheid en over digitale technologie voor literair vertalers.
Het boek is een initiatief van het Expertisecentrum Literair Vertalen (ELV), en bevat bijdragen van 26 vertaalexperts (wetenschappers, opleiders en vertalers), onder eindredactie van Lieven D’hulst en Chris Van de Poel. Het ELV is een partnerschap van de Taalunie, de KU Leuven en de Universiteit Utrecht, in samenwerking met het Nederlands Letterenfonds en Literatuur Vlaanderen.
Met bijdragen van Erik Bindervoet, Henri Bloemen, Paul Claes, Harm Damsma, Christophe Declercq, Goedele De Sterck, Nicolette Hoekmeijer, Jeanne Holierhoek, Cees Koster, Onno Kosters, Stella Linn, Niek Miedema, Janny Middelbeek-Oortgiesen, Philippe Noble, Jelle Noorman, Franco Paris, Désirée Schyns, Carlo Van Baelen, Laura van Campenhout, Jeroen Vandaele, Chris Van de Poel, Barber van de Pol, Gys-Walt van Egdom, Luk Van Haute, Fedde van Santen, Ine Willems.
i.s.m. Expertisecentrum Literair Vertalen
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
Acknowledgements
Text Editions, Translations, and Abbreviations
Introduction
Part I. Preliminaries
1 Authenticity
1.1 The Dedicatory Letter
1.1.1 Writing Style and Content
1.1.2 Plutarch and Trajan
1.1.3 Conclusion
1.2 The Collection
1.2.1 Hiatus
1.2.2 The Origins of the Apophthegms
1.3 Conclusion
2 Dating
2.1 Absolute Dating
2.2 Relative Dating: The Collection and the Parallel Lives
2.2.1 The Connection Between the Works
2.2.2 Romans Absent From the Collection
2.2.3 The Relative Chronology
2.3 Conclusion
3 Early Imperial Anecdote Collections
3.1 Plutarch’s View on Collections of Sayings and Anecdotes
3.1.1 Gnome, apophthegma, apomnemoneuma, and chreia
3.1.2 Anecdote Collections
3.2 Plutarch and Valerius Maximus
3.2.1 The Prefaces
3.2.2 The Structure of the Collections
3.3 Conclusion
Part II. A Literary Analysis
Introduction
1 The Dedicatory Letter (172B–E)
1.1 The Dedication (172BC)
1.2 The Apologetic Part (172C–E)
1.3 A Clash between the Two Parts
1.4 Conclusion
2 The Letter and the Structure of the Collection
2.1 Apophthegms
2.2 Sections on Historical Figures
2.3 Sections on Peoples and Types of Government
2.4 A World History
2.5 Overview
3 The Monarchical Sections (172E–184F)
3.1 Persian Despotism (172E–174B)
3.1.1 Cyrus (172EF)
3.1.2 Darius (172F–173B)
3.1.3 Xerxes (173BC)
3.1.4 Four Sections on Artaxerxes Mnemon (173D–174B)
3.1.5 Memnon (174B)
3.2 The Egyptian Kings (174C)
3.3 Barbarian Disarray (174C–F)
3.4 Sicilian Tyranny (175A–177A)
3.4.1 Gelon and Hiero (175A–C)
3.4.2 The Dionysii (175C–176E)
3.4.3 Dion and Agathocles (176E–177A)
3.5 Macedonian Monarchy (177A–184F)
3.5.1 Archelaus (177AB)
3.5.2 Philippus (177C–179C)
3.5.3 Alexander (179D–181F)
3.5.4 The Diadochi (181F–184F)
4 The Greeks of the Core Mainland (184F–194E)
4.1 The Athenians (184F–189D)
4.1.1 Love of Honour and Justice (184F–186F)
4.1.2 Four Generals, Two Orators (186F–187E)
4.1.3 Phocion (187E–189B)
4.1.4 Peisistratus and Demetrius of Phalerum (189B–D)
4.2 The Spartans (189D–192C)
4.2.1 Early Sparta (189D–190A)
4.2.2 A Period of Wars (190A–D)
4.2.3 Lysander (190D–F)
4.2.4 Agesilaus (190F–191D)
4.2.5 Nine Short Sections (191D–192C)
4.3 The Thebans (192C–194E)
4.3.1 Epameinondas (192C–194C)
4.3.2 Pelopidas (194C–E)
5 The Roman Sections (194E–208A)
5.1 The Conquerors of the Roman Republic (194E–202E)
5.1.1 Manius Curius and Gaius Fabricius (194E–195C)
5.1.2 Fabius Maximus and Scipio Maior (195C–197A)
5.1.3 Titus Quintius Flamininus (197A–D)
5.1.4 A General’s Experience: Three Sections (197D–198D)
5.1.5 Cato Maior (198D–199E)
5.1.6 Scipio Minor (199F–201F)
5.1.7 Caecilius Metellus (201F–202A)
5.1.8 Marius, Sulla, and the Civil War (202A–E)
5.2 Gaius Popillius (202E–203A)
5.3 The End of the Roman Republic (203A–206F)
5.3.1 Lucullus and Pompeius (203A–204E)
5.3.2 Cicero (204E–205E)
5.3.3 Caesar (205E–206F)
5.4 The Roman Principate: Augustus (206F–208A)
Concluding Remarks
Part III. A Guide for the Emperor
Introduction
1 The Individual Characters
1.1 Moralism and Characterization
1.1.1 Moralism
1.1.2 Characterization
1.1.3 Conclusion: A Collection of Problematic Heroes?
1.2 Negative Exempla
1.2.1 The Prologue to Demetrius–Antonius
1.2.2 Negative Exempla in Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata
1.3 ‘Perfect’ Exempla
1.3.1 The Comparison of Aristeides and Cato Maior
1.3.2 Perfect Exempla in Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata
1.4 Positive Exempla
1.4.1 The Prologue to Pericles–Fabius Maximus
1.4.2 The Prologue to Aemilius–Timoleon
1.4.3 De profectibus in virtute 84B–85C
1.4.4 Positive Exempla in Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata
1.5 Conclusion
2 Peoples and Their Rulers
2.1 Three Types of Barbarians
2.2 Sicilian Tyranny
2.3 True Monarchy
2.4 Other Types of Government
2.5 Conclusion
3 A World History
3.1 Plutarch’s ‘End of History’
3.2 World History in Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata
3.2.1 Two Paralleled Chronologies
3.2.2 The Driving Force Behind History: φιλοτιμία
3.3 Conclusion: A Warning for the Emperor
Concluding Remarks
General Conclusion
Appendices
Appendix I: A Restructuring of the Collection
Appendix II: The Collection and the Plutarchan Oeuvre
1 List of Parallel Passages
2 Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata and the Parallel Lives
3 Apophthegms Occurring in Two Other Plutarchan Works
Appendix III: The Relative Chronology of the Parallel Lives
1 Methodology
2 The Cross-References: Jones (1966) Revisited
3 Content-Related Criteria
4 Conclusion
Bibliography
Primary Literature
Secondary Literature
Index locorum
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aThe first full in-depth analysis and interpretation of Plutarch’s Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata in its entirety as a literary piece of art.
Plutarch’s Regum et imperatorum apophthegmata (Sayings of Kings and Commanders) holds a peculiar position in his oeuvre. This collection of almost 500 anecdotes of barbarian, Greek, and Roman rulers and generals is introduced by a dedicatory letter to Trajan as a summary of the author’s well-known and widely read Parallel Lives. The work is therefore Plutarch’s only text that explicitly addresses a Roman emperor and is likely to shed light on his biographical technique. Yet the collection has been understudied, because its authenticity has been generally rejected since the nineteenth century. Recent scholarship defends Plutarch's authorship of the text, but some remain sceptical. This book restores its reputation and provides a first full literary analysis of the letter and collection as a genuine work of Plutarch, wherein he attempts to educate his ruler by means of great role models of the past. Plutarch’s thinking about the function of role models (exempla) is not only relevant for Plutarchan research, but also for our knowledge of exemplarity, a key feature both in Greek and Latin literature in the early imperial period in general. Therefore An Opaque Mirror for Trajan is also of interest for literary and historical scholars who study the broader context of ancient literature of the first centuries CE.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Spatial borders as sites of meaningful adjacencies and exchange.
Borders between countries, neighbourhoods, people, beliefs, and policies are proliferating and expanding despite what self-proclaimed progressive societies wish or choose to believe. For a wide variety of reasons, the early 21st century is caught struggling between breaking down barriers and raising them. Architecture is complicit in both. It is central to the perpetuation of borders, and key to their dismantling. Architectures of Resistance: Negotiating Borders Through Spatial Practices approaches borders as sites of meaningful encounter between others (other cultures, other nations, other perspectives), guided not by fear or hatred but by respect and tolerance. The contributors to this volume - including architects, urban planners, artists, human geographers, and political scientists - address spatial boundaries as places where social and political conditions are intensified and where new spatial practices of architectural resistance arise. Moving across contemporary, historical, and speculative conditions of borders, Architectures of Resistance discusses new and innovative forms of architectural, artistic, and political practice that facilitate constructive human interaction.
Contributors: Nishat Awan (UCL Urban Laboratory), Teddy Cruz (University of California San Diego), Sofia Dona (independent artist), Ursula Emery McClure (Kansas State University), Fonna Forman (University of California San Diego), Marisa Gomez (University of Texas at Arlington), Mohamad Hafeda (Leeds Beckett University), Paul Holmquist (Louisiana State University), Panos Leventis (Drury University), Eugene McCann (Simon Fraser University), Aya Musmar (University of Petra), Kristopher Palagi (Louisiana State University), Marc Schoonderbeek (TU Delft), Nicholas Serrano (University of Florida), Angeliki Sioli (TU Delft), Aleksandar Staničić (TU Delft).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aUniversity College London =536 \\$aDelft University of Technology =536 \\$aLouisiana State University =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aspatial borders =653 \\$aspatial resistance =653 \\$aarchitectural strategies =653 \\$apolicy making =653 \\$acritical spatial practices =700 1\$aSioli, Angeliki,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000256557444$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-5655-7444 =700 1\$aAwan, Nishat,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000253065057$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-5306-5057 =700 1\$aPalagi, Kristopher,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665522$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/340030/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04568nam 22005772 4500 =001 58da32ec-72d1-42d7-845d-c668d9b23af3 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20232023\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462703568$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461664884$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664907$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664884$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHPCB$2bicssc =072 7$aHPCA$2bicssc =072 7$aPHI012000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHI002000$2bisacsh =072 7$aQDHF$2thema =072 7$aQDHA$2thema =100 1\$avan Buren, Franziska,$eauthor. =245 10$aAristotle and the Ontology of St. Bonaventure /$cFranziska van Buren. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2023. =264 \4$c©2023 =300 \\$a1 online resource. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aAncient and Medieval Philosophy - Series 1 ;$vvol. 2. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgements
Abbreviations for Editions and Translations of Primary Texts
Introduction Chapter 1. Historical Background 1. The Neoplatonic via Proclus: The One and the Many 2. The Problem of Neoplatonism in the Christian Tradition 3. Aristotle via Avicenna and the Early Franciscan Tradition, or What Exactly Is Aristotelianism?
Chapter 2. The Theory of Forms in Thomas Aquinas 1. The Structure of Creation 2. Participation 3. Participation in the Fourth Way? 4. Participation in Exemplar Causes? 5. Conclusion
Chapter 3. The Controversy: Bonaventure and Aristotle 1. History of Scholarship on Bonaventure 2. The “Anti-Aristotelianism” of the Collationes
Chapter 4. An Aristotelian Account of Universals 1. Form, Esse, Actuality, Goodness 2. Universal Forms and Seminal Reasons 3. Universals 4. Conclusion
Chapter 5. Forms as Caused by God 1. God Beyond Being 2. Exemplar Causation 3. A Multiplicity of Ideas? 4. Conclusion
Chapter 6. Forms in the Natural World 1. Individuation 2. Light and the Question of a Plurality of Substantial Forms 3. Causation 4. Evil 5. Conclusion
Conclusion
Bibliography Primary Sources Secondary Sources
Index
Bonaventure’s metaphysical thought and
his interpretation of Aristotle
Contemporary scholarship on Bonaventure has characterized him as the Neo-platonic foil to the Aristotelianism of his day. The present book, however, shows a Bonaventure who is highly enthusiastic about utilizing the philosophy of Aristotle and who centers much of his philosophical project around interpreting and understanding the texts of Aristotle. Two goals are central to this book. The first is to shed light on Bonaventure’s greatly understudied ontology and theory of forms, demonstrating how his philosophical system is an important and unique alternative to other medieval Aristotelian systems. The second is to establish, more broadly, how Bonaventure’s interpretation of Aristotle is a resource which should be mined for contemporary efforts in thinking about and reading Aristotle himself.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Arrival Cities: Migrating Artists and New Metropolitan Topographies in the 20th Century – An Introduction
Burcu Dogramaci, Mareike Hetschold, Laura Karp Lugo, Rachel Lee, Helene Roth
Groups and Networks
Alone Together: Exile Sociability and Artistic Networks in Buenos Aires at the Beginning of the 20th Century
Laura Karp Lugo
A Great Anti-Hero of Modern Art History: Juan Aebi in Buenos Aires
Laura Bohnenblust
From Dinner Parties to Galleries: The Langhammer-Leyden-Schlesinger Circle in Bombay – 1940s through the 1950s
Margit Franz
Austro-Hungarian Architect Networks in Tianjin and Shanghai (1918–1952)
Eduard Kogel
Art and Exile in Rio de Janeiro: Artistic Networking during World War II
Cristiana Tejo and Daniela Kern
Kiesler’s Imaging Exile in Guggenheim’s Art of this Century Gallery and the New York Avant-garde Scene in the early 1940s
Elana Shapira
Mobility, Transfer and Circulation
Rabindranath Tagore and Okakura Tenshin in Calcutta: The Creation of a Regional Asian Avant-garde Art
Partha Mitter
Parisian Echoes: Iba N’Diaye and African Modernisms
Joseph L. Underwood
The Margin as a Space of Connection: The Artists Mira Schendel, Salette Tavares and Amelia Toledo in Lisbon
Margarida Brito Alves and Giulia Lamoni
Exile and the Reinvention of Modernism in Rio de Janeiro and Sao Paulo, 1937–1964
Rafael Cardoso
Arrival City Istanbul: Flight, Modernity and Metropolis at the Bosporus. With an Excursus on the Island Exile of Leon Trotsky
Burcu Dogramaci
Sites, Spaces and Urban Representations
Mapping Finchleystrasse: Mitteleuropa in North West London
Rachel Dickson and Sarah MacDougall
Hospitable Environments: The Taj Mahal Palace Hotel and Green’s Hotel as Sites of Cultural Production in Bombay
Rachel Lee
Tales of a City: Urban Encounters in the Travel Book Shanghai by Ellen Thorbecke and Friedrich Schiff
Mareike Hetschold
The Bar Sammy’s Bowery Follies as Microcosm and Photographic Milieu Study for Emigrated European Photographers in 1930s and 1940s New York
Helene Roth
Changing Practices: Interventions in Artistic Landscapes
Temporary Exile: The White Stag Group in Dublin, 1939–1946
Kathryn Milligan
Inner City Solidarity: Black Protest in the Eyes of the Jewish New York Photo League 335
Ya’ara Gil–Glazer
Bohemians, Anarchists, and Arrabales: How Spanish Graphic Artists Reinvented the Visual Landscape of Buenos Aires, 1880–1920
Brian Bockelman
The City of Plovdiv as a New Latin American Metropolis: The Artistic Activity of Latin American Exiles in Communist Bulgaria
Katarzyna Cytlak
Hedda Sterne and the Lure of New York
Frauke V. Josenhans
Arrival Cities: A Roundtable
Arrival Cities: A Conversation with Rafael Cardoso, Partha Mitter, Elana Shapira and Elvan Zabunyan
Laura Karp Lugo and Rachel Lee
Biographies of the Authors
Index
The impact of migrating artists on modern art
Exile and migration played a critical role in the diffusion and development of modernism around the globe, yet have remained largely understudied phenomena within art historiography. Focusing on the intersections of exile, artistic practice, and urban space, this volume brings together contributions by international researchers committed to revising the historiography of modern art. It pays particular attention to metropolitan areas that were settled by migrant artists in the first half of the 20th century. These arrival cities became hubs of artistic activities and transcultural contact zones where ideas circulated, collaborations emerged, and concepts developed. Taking six major cities as a starting point — Bombay (now Mumbai), Buenos Aires, Istanbul, London, New York, and Shanghai — the authors explore how urban topographies and landscapes were modified by exiled artists re-establishing their practices in these and other metropolises across the world. Questioning the established canon of Western modernism, Arrival Cities investigates how the migration of artists to different urban spaces impacted their work and the historiography of art. In doing so, it aims to encourage the discussion between scholars from different research fields, such as exile studies, art history, architectural history, design history, urban studies, and history.
Contributors: Brian Bockelman (Ripon College), Laura Bohnenblust (Universität Bern), Margarida Brito Alves (IHA-FCSH / Universidade Nova de Lisboa), Rafael Cardoso (Universidade do Estado do Rio de Janeiro), Katarzyna Cytlak (Centro de Estudios de los Mundos Eslavos y Chinos-Universidad Nacional de San Martín), Rachel Dickson (Ben Uri Gallery and Museum), Burcu Dogramaci (Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität), Margit Franz (Karl-Franzens-Universität Graz), Ya'ara Gil-Glazer (Tel-Hai Academic College), Mareike Hetschold (Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität), Frauke Josenhans (Yale University Art Gallery), Daniela Kern (Universidade Federal do Rio Grande do Sul), Laura Karp Lugo (Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität), Eduard Kögel (Independent scholar, Berlin), Giulia Lamoni (IHA-FCSH / Universidade Nova de Lisboa), Rachel Lee (Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität), Sarah MacDougall (Ben Uri Gallery and Museum), Kathryn Milligan (University College Dublin), Partha Mitter (University of Sussex), Helene Roth (Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität), Elana Shapira (Universität für Angewandte Kunst), Cristiana Tejo (Universidade Nova de Lisboa), Joseph L. Underwood (Kent State University), Elvan Zabunyan (Université Rennes 2)
For more information visit www.metromod.net
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Chapter 1
Constitutive outsiders
1.1 Ambivalences of Kultur and Aufklärung
Constructions of German identity
Kultur versus Zivilisation
1.2 “Trapped by the image of a rejected self ”—Jews in Germany, German Jews
Emancipation and acculturation (1770–1880)
Modern anti-Semitism and Jewish dissimilation (1880–1933)
The ambivalence of assimilation 50
1.3 A reluctant country of immigration
From emigration to immigration
Kultur in the aftermath of non-policy: MultiKulti—Leitkultur—‘Deutschland schafft sich ab’
1.4 Literature, identity, and singularity
Chapter 2
Aesthetes between identity and opposition 67
2.1 The authenticity paradox—Writing between identity and opposition
2.2 The aesthete’s retreat: Arthur Schnitzler’s Fräulein Else (1924) versus Navid Kermani’s Kurzmitteilung (2007)
The ‘value’ of cultural difference: Arthur Schnitzler and Navid Kermani
A conflict of codes: ‘aesthetics of opposition’ versus ‘aesthetics of identity’
2.3 The aesthete’s awakening: Beer-Hofmann’s Der Tod Georgs (1900) versus Zaimoglu’s Liebesbrand (2008) 102
Jewish aesthete and romantic rebel: Richard Beer-Hofmann and Feridun Zaimoglu
Realitätsablehnung & experiences of finitude
Aesthetics of becoming—The ambivalent rhetoric of blood
Conclusion
Chapter 3
City dwellers between difference and indifference
3.1 Images of the city: emancipatory visions and spatialized difference
Berlin: image of an unsettled national identity
Indifference to difference
The city as a site of Jewish self-definition
Urban stereotype and spatialized difference
3.2 The failure of exemplarity—‘Figures of immanence’:Ludwig Jacobowski’s Werther, der Jude (1892) versus Terezia Mora’s Alle Tage (2004)
Exemplarity, identification, alienation
‘Figures of immanence’: the atomic individual versus the Leerstelle
Metropolitan milieus: ‘the law of the proper’ versus Verletzbarkeit
3.3 Disoriented city dwellers—Figures of ‘distanced proximity’:
Franz Hessel’s Spazieren in Berlin (1929) versus Emine Sevgi Ozdamar’s “Der Hof im Spiegel” (2001)
Reading the city
Disoriented/dis-Oriented city dwellers
Conclusion
Chapter 4
Family heroes between myth and storytelling
4.1 Writing in the shadow of an empire
4.2 Family heroes redefined: Joseph Roth’s Radetzkymarsch (1932) versus Dimitre Dinev’s Engelszungen (2003)
Storytellers between empires and nations:Joseph Roth and Dimitre Dinev
“Listening to the same story”—Heroic grandfathers and the power of fiction
“Against the confines of the image”—Un-/antiheroic grandsons and the power of storytelling
4.3 “Diaspora’s children”—Heroics of endurance and hope:
Joseph Roth’s Hiob (1930) versus Zsusza Bank’s Der Schwimmer (2002)
Between East and West—Between pathos and hope: Joseph Roth and Zsuzsa Bank
Communities of violence—Communities of silence
Allowing something to be said—Hope emerging from silence
Conclusion
Conclusion
The fallibility of Bildung
Notes
Introduction
Chapter 1: Constitutive outsiders
Chapter 2: Aesthetes between identity and opposition
Chapter 3. City dwellers between difference and indifference
Chapter 4. Family heroes between myth and storytelling
Conclusion: The fallibility of Bildung
Bibliography
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aThe first extensive comparison of the German-Jewish literary corpus and contemporary minority writing in German
Since the turn of the 21st century, countless literary endeavors by 'new Germans' have entered the spotlight of academic research. Yet 'minority writing', with its distinctive renegotiation of traditional concepts of cultural identity, is far from a recent phenomenon in German literature. A hundred years previously, the intense involvement of German-Jewish intellectuals in cultural and political discourses on Jewish identity put a clear stamp on German modernism. This book is the first to unfold literary parallels between these two riveting periods in German cultural history. Drawing on the philosophical oeuvre of Jean-Luc Nancy, a comparative reading of texts by, amongst others, Beer-Hofmann, Kermani, Özdamar, Roth, Schnitzler, and Zaimoglu examines a variety of literary approaches to the thorny issue of cultural identity, while developing an overarching perspective on the ‘politics of literature’.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1
Prelude to a new world conflict
The policy of neutrality under discussion
The problem of governing under occupation
Getting the gold stock to safety
Chapter 2
The Blitzkrieg and the Banque nationale de Belgique
The German invasion
Rising war panic
Ostend, a confused episode
The peregrination through France
Chapter 3
France and the monetary crisis
The capitulation and its monetary consequences
The search for scapegoats
Emotion and frustration among the Belgian refugees
The Bank under tutelage
Chapter 4
A rudderless Belgian government
The evacuation of Belgian gold from France
The dramatic discussion of 18 June 1940 at Bordeaux
A Belgian government in its death throes
The Bank’s return to Brussels
Chapter 5
In the aftermath of Belgium’s war drama in France
Ingenbleek’s ‘finest hour’
Theunis’s despair 82
Final efforts to evacuate the gold
The cost of the peregrination in France
Chapter 6
The installation of the German administration
Dislocation and the ‘new order’
‘Le temps des notables’
The bankers’ initiative for a bank of issue
Chapter 7
The Establishment of the Banque d’Emission
The decisive negotiations
The Bank and the Banque d’Emission
The principal actors of the two banks
Chapter 8
The politics of accommodation in daily reality
The distribution of responsibilities
The challenge to legal competence
The economic, social and political context in 1940 and 1941
Money circulation
The costs of occupation and their financing
Chapter 9
The policy of accommodation put to the test
The commandeering of gold and foreign currency
The fraudulent clearing system
The first crisis of the clearing system
Janssen and the German occupier
Chapter 10
The looting of gold
The prelude
Janssen misled
The Wiesbaden Convention (29 October 1940)
The supplementary protocol of 11 December 1940
The aftermath of the repatriation
The restoration of Luxembourg’s gold
Chapter 11
In the shadow of Janssen’s death
The problem of the succession
A new administration
The first great disillusions
Occupation and economy (May 1940-May 1942)
Chapter 12
The gold cover and the clearing system
under discussion
The dilemma concerning cover for the note issue
Towards a confrontation with the Ministry of Finance
The clearing system in discredit
The motion of 24 September 1941
The motion of 7 January 1942
The mission to Berlin (24-28 March 1942)
Chapter 13
The installation of the Banque Nationale de Belgique
in London
The establishment of a Belgian government in London
The financing of the Belgian government in London
The Bank in London and its protagonists
Baudewyn’s difficulties at his installation in London
Chapter 14
The Banque Nationale de Belgique in London in the
maelstrom of war
The loan of gold to Great Britain
The decrees of 27 November 1941
The reactions in Belgium
Goffin’s appointment and the outside world
Chapter 15
The proceedings against the Banque de France
in New York
The cause
The French attempts to achieve an amicable solution
The problem of the Luxembourg gold
The legal proceedings: worth the candle?
Chapter 16
The payment orders ‘Laut besonderer Mitteilung’
Incorporation into the German war economy
Towards the agreement of 5 May 1942
The reappearance of the Reichskreditkassenscheine
Cracco’s memorandum and its consequences
Chapter 17
The creation of a united front
The resolutions of 16 October 1942
The dramatic interview with Reeder
Reeder’s order for immediate payment
Chapter 18
The rupture of the united front
Preparations for the negotiations of 18 November 1942
The negotiations of 18 November 1942
The arrangement of 25 November 1942
The question of successors for Berger and Van Nieuwenhuyse
Chapter 19
Towards the end of the occupation
The turn of the tide in military affairs
The Belgian economy at the end of the occupation
Anxious years for the staff and for the Bank
Cracco’s Emissiebank certificates
Chapter 20
The liberation in sight
The final skirmishes with the Bankaufsichtamt
The export of banknotes to France
Monetary differences and disputes with the Netherlands and Germany
The preparations for post-war monetary reform
The final days of the occupation
Chapter 21
Preparation in London for post-war Belgium
The establishment and start of the CEPAG
Baudewyns’ proposal becomes the Gutt plan
The Belgian discussions about the exchange rate and currency reform
Chapter 22
The build-up to post-war international cooperation
From the Dutch-Belgian-Luxembourg monetary agreement to BENELUX
The Franco-Belgian and the Anglo-Belgian monetary agreements
Chapter 23
Belgium and the new economic world order
Belgium and the Bretton Woods agreements of 22 July 1944
The banknotes for the army of liberation and for the currency reform
The organization of the Bank’s return to Belgium
Chapter 24
The return from London
The great settling of scores
Governor Theunis in Brussels
The closure of the Belgo-French gold dossier
12 Contents
Chapter 25
Back to normality
The completion of the Belgo-French reconciliation
The Gutt Operation (6 October 1944)
Chapter 26
The end of an era
The currency reform in action
Criticism and evaluation
Chapter 27
The commission of enquiry and the Legal investigation
Installation and start
The Commission’s report
Reactions
The prosecutor’s decision and its aftermath
Epilogue
Sources
1. Public Archives
2. Private Archives
3. Interviews
Bibliography
List of abbreviations
index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aBased on intensive research in the archives of six countries, this monograph presents an in-depth analysis of Belgium’s monetary and financial history during the Second World War. Exploring Belgium’s financial and business links with Germany, France, The Netherlands, Great Britain, the United States, and the Grand Duchy of Luxembourg, the study focuses on the roles played in this complex wartime network by the Central Bank and private bankers in Brussels, by the Belgian government in exile in London, and by the Belgian minister plenipotentiary in New York. Among the many subjects arising in the course of the analysis are: German attempts to plunder Belgium and Belgian resistance strategies; the peripeteia of the Belgian gold reserve, given in custody to the central banks of France and Great Britain; the role of the Belgian Congo; Belgium’s participation in the discussions leading up to the Bretton Woods conference; and the negotiations for creating a Customs Union, the so-called Benelux, blueprint for the 1958 Treaty of Rome. The final part of the book analyzes the famous monetary reform devised by Belgian Minister of Finance Camille Gutt at the liberation of the country in September 1944. A Small Nation in the Turmoil of the Second World War is a magisterial contribution to European history, Belgian history, and the history of the Second World War.
Ebook available in Open Access.
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$aVerbreyt, Monique,$eauthor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aStudies in Social and Economic History ;$vvol. 1. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/sntsww$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/255451/65791/65791_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05706nam 22006132 4500 =001 a629ab70-abf1-42cd-bab5-85b5b431591e =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20222022\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462703179$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664389$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664396$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664389$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBJD$2bicssc =072 7$aJFCD$2bicssc =072 7$a3JB$2bicssc =072 7$aHIS010000$2bisacsh =072 7$aARC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS037090$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHD$2thema =072 7$aJBCC2$2thema =072 7$a3MD$2thema =100 1\$aDe Groot, Julie,$eauthor. =245 10$aAt Home in Renaissance Bruges :$bConnecting Objects, People and Domestic Spaces in a Sixteenth-Century City /$cJulie De Groot. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2022. =264 \4$c©2022 =300 \\$a1 online resource: $b30 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aGENERAL INTRODUCTION The Spatial Turn Reclaiming Domesticity At Home in Renaissance Bruges Sources and Challenges The Structure of the Book
PART 1CROSSING THE THRESHOLD: THE ORGANISATION OF DOMESTIC SPACE
INTRODUCTION Functional Specialisation: A Subject of Discussion What’s in a Name? The Nomenclature of Domestic Space
CONNECTING THE HOUSE TO THE STREET? THE SHOP AND WORKSHOP Introduction ‘Historians and the Nation of Shopkeepers’ Shops and Shopping in Bruges Similarities and Differences: The Broader Picture
THE MERCHANT IN THE CONTOOR Introduction The Contoor in Bruges Similarities and Differences: The Broader Picture
AT THE HEART OF THE HOME: ROOMS AT THE HEART OF DOMESTIC CULTURE The Kitchen in Bruges Dining Room and Salette The Elusive Realm of Sleep: Sleeping Rooms Similarities and Differences: The Broader Picture
PART 2DOMESTIC OBJECTS IN CONTEXT
INTRODUCTION DEVOTION ON DISPLAY? PAINTINGS IN DOMESTIC INTERIORS Introduction What’s in a Name? Possessing Paintings in Fifteenth- and Sixteenth-Century Bruges Canvas and Panel Paintings Paintings and Iconographical Themes Devotion on Display Conclusions
FOR PUBLIC ELEGANCE AND PRIVATE COMFORT: TEXTILES AND FURNITURE Introduction Comfort and the Textile Environment The Seat of Authority? The Design and Social Character of Seating Furniture Show Me Your Bed and I’ll Tell You Who You Are! Keeping Up Appearances? Tapestry in the Domestic Interior A Colourful Interior Exposing or Storing Textiles: The Garderobe and the Cleerschaprade Conclusions
GENERAL CONCLUSIONS APPENDIX 1: INVENTORY HOLDERS WHO WORKED AT HOME APPENDIX 2: INVENTORIES WITH ‘CONTOOR’ NOTES BIBLIOGRAPHY PLATES
Domestic materiality in a remarkable European city
How did citizens in Bruges create a home? What did an ordinary domestic interior look like in the sixteenth century? And more importantly: how does one study the domestic culture of bygone times by analysing documents such as probate inventories? These questions seem straightforward, yet few endeavours are more challenging than reconstructing a sixteenth-century domestic reality from written sources. This book takes full advantage of the inventory as a source and convincingly frames household objects in their original context of use. Meticulously connecting objects, people and domestic spaces, the book introduces the reader to the rich material world of Bruges citizens in the Renaissance, their sensory engagement, their religious practice, the daily activities of men and women, and other social factors. By weaving insights from material culture studies with urban history, At Home in Renaissance Bruges offers an appealing and holistic mixture of in-depth socio-economic, cultural and material analysis. In its approach the book goes beyond heavy-handed theories and stereotypes about the exquisite taste of aristocratic elites, focusing instead on the domestic materiality of Bruges’ middling groups. Evocatively illustrated with contemporary paintings and images of furniture and textiles from Bruges and beyond, this monograph shows a nuanced picture of domestic materiality in a remarkable European city.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
How conventional and experimental prototypes and series created an architecture for all.
Mass housing and prefabrication shaped global modernist architecture like no other aspect of industrialised construction. This book offers a comprehensive exploration of how both conventional and experimental prototypes and series gave rise to an architecture for all, often responding to crises, the imperatives of nation-building, and housing shortages by rapidly developing, distributing, and assembling structures.
The book’s contributions, with a geographical emphasis on Europe and Israel, offer innovative approaches to the history of prefabrication. Some explore partially unearthed empirical ground, such as cases from Finland and Sweden, while others offer a fresh interpretation of prefabrication’s role in the history of global architecture and planning after WWII, notably in the USSR and Italy. The chapters encompass a broad spectrum of topics, including colonial expansion, international collaboration, and the achievements and setbacks of industrialised design. The authors scrutinise the cultural impact of mass housing and prefabrication, tracing this influence through exhibitions, memory culture, and typologies, ultimately concluding with an outlook on the preservation and repair of structures and their adaptation for the future.
Within the broader context of transnational and regional research, Between Conventional and Experimental presents novel and forward-thinking approaches to prefabrication and mass housing. Drawing from transnational architectural history, construction history, housing studies, monument preservation, and exhibition studies, it effectively highlights the profound relevance of prefabrication history to our understanding of the cultural and material history of the built environment.
Contributors: Mia Åkerfelt (Åbo Akademi University, Turku), Yael Allweil (Technion Israel Institute of Technology), Inbal Ben Asher-Gitler (Sapir Academic College, Ashkelon/ Ben Gurion University of the Negev, Beer Scheva), Angelo Bertolazzi (University of Padua), Tamara Bjažić Klarin (University of Zagreb), Tzafrir Fainholtz (Technion Israel Institute of Technology), Alberto Franchini (Technical University Munich/Polytechnic University of Milan), Ilaria Giannetti (Sapienza, University of Rome), Regine Hess (ETH Zurich), Silke Langenberg (ETH Zurich), Daphna Levine (Technion Israel Institute of Technology), Stefania Mornati (Sapienza, University of Rome), Uta Pottgiesser (TU Delft), Maryia Rusak (Oslo School of Architecture and Design), Liat Savin Ben Shoshan (Technion Israel Institute of Technology), Maria Tassopoulou (Technical University of Athens), Anna Wilczyńska (Estonian University of Life Sciences/ Warsaw University of Life Sciences).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aSapir College =536 \\$aTechnion - Israel Institute of Technology =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aMass Housing =653 \\$aPrefabrication =653 \\$aModernity =653 \\$aTransnational Architecture History =653 \\$aSocial Housing =653 \\$aRationalization =653 \\$aPrototypes =653 \\$aSeries =700 1\$aHess, Regine,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000202564390$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-0256-4390 =700 1\$aBen-Asher Gitler, Inbal,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000197489129$1https://orcid.org/0000-0001-9748-9129 =700 1\$aFainholtz, Tzafrir,$eeditor. =700 1\$aAllweil, Yael,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665515$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/340523/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 03825nam 22004092 4500 =001 aad5c596-c586-4d5b-987d-9855bfca12f0 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20182018\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462701625$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461662668$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461662668$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHDW$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC003000$2bisacsh =072 7$aNK$2thema =245 00$aBeyond Provenance :$bNew Approaches to Interpreting the Chemistry of Archaeological Copper Alloys /$cedited by Mark Pollard. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2018. =264 \4$c©2018 =300 \\$a1 online resource (234 pages): $b90 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aStudies in Archaeological Sciences ;$vvol. 2. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aTable of Contents
Chapter 1Previous Approaches to the Chemistry and Provenance of Archaeological Copper Alloys
Chapter 2Developing a New Interpretative Framework
Chapter 3Legacy Datasets and Chemical Data Quality
Chapter 4Trace Elements and ‘Copper Groups’
Chapter 5Alloying Elements and ‘Alloy Types’
Chapter 6Lead Isotope Data from Archaeological Copper Alloys
Chapter 7The FLAME GIS-Database
Chapter 8Summary: Beyond Provenance?
References
Bibliography of Sources of Chemical and Isotopic Data Used in the FLAME Database
Index
Human intentionality in chemical patterns in Bronze Age metals
For the last 180 years, scientists have been attempting to determine the ‘provenance’ (geological source) of the copper used in Bronze Age artefacts. However, despite advances in analytical technologies, the theoretical approach has remained virtually unchanged over this period, with the interpretative methodology only changing to accommodate the increasing capacity of computers. This book represents a concerted effort to think about the composition of Bronze Age metal as the product of human intentionality as well as of geology. It considers the trace element composition of the metal, the alloying elements, and the lead isotopic composition, showing how a combination of these aspects, along with archaeological context and typology, can reveal much more about the life history of such artefacts, expanding considerably upon the rather limited ambition of knowing where the ore was extracted.
Beyond Provenance serves as a ‘how-to handbook’ for those wishing to look for evidence of human intentionality in the chemical patterning observed in bronzes.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
Our Mother, My Muse Salamishah Tillet and Scheherazade Tillet
Black Matrilineage, Photography, and Representation: Another Way of Knowing Lesly Deschler Canossi and Zoraida Lopez-Diago
PART ONEMORE BLACK AND MORE BEAUTIFUL: SOCIAL MEDIA & DIGITAL CULTURE IN THE REWRITING OF SELF
1 Regarding the Pain of Our Own: Jazmine Headley, Portraiture, and the Sorrow of Black Motherhood Brie McLemore 2 Beyond “Welfare Queens” and “Baby Mamas”: Low-Income Black Single Mothers’ Resistance to Controlling Images Jennifer L. Turner 3 Black Motherhood Online: A Reimagined Representation: A Conversation with Tomi Akitunde Kellie Carter Jackson 4 Thotty Mommies: The Erotic Potential of Black Mothers Online Marly Pierre-Louis
PART TWO“TURNING THE FACE OF HISTORY TO YOUR FACE”: SEEING THE REAL SELF THROUGH REPRESENTATIONS OF BLACK MOTHERHOOD
5 Motherhood in the work of Deana Lawson – A conversation with the Artist Susan Thompson 6 Photographic Afterimages: Nationalism, Care Work and Black Motherhood in Canada Rachel Lobo 7. “I Like to Make Pictures of Children”: African American Women Photographers and Wielding the Weapon of ‘Motherhood’ Emily Brady 8 Losses Not to Be Passed On: Paula C. Johnson’s and Sara Bennett’s Portraits Rewriting (Ex-) Incarcerated Black Mothers Atalie Gerhard 9 Speaking of “unspeakable things unspoken” Sasha Turner
PART THREE“YOU ARE YOUR BEST THING”: SELF-CARE AS A SITE OF RESISTANCE
10 Black Birth Matters – A Conversation with Andrea Chung and D’Yuanna Allen-Robb Nicole J. Caruth 11 Worth a Thousand Words: Visualizing Black Motherhood and Health Haile Eshe Cole 12 Three Black Mothers in a Cleveland Cabaret Rhaisa Williams
PART FOUR“IN SEARCH OF MY MOTHER’S GARDEN, I FOUND MY OWN”: BLACK FEMALE PHOTOGRAPHERS AND THE MATRILINEAL SPACE
13 Letter IV: Where Are They? – M/othering R/evolutions Renée Mussai 14 Every Day is Mother’s Day in My Book: Black Motherhood in the Work of Nona Faustine Simmons Jonathan Michael Square 15 The Motherland Between Us Grace Aneiza Ali 16 The Impossibility of Breathing When the Sun Covers Your Face Marcia MichaelPART FIVE“THE ASSERTION OF THE LIFEFORCE”: A SELECTION OF WORKS CURATED BY WOMEN PICTURING REVOLUTION
Afterword. Black Matrilineage, Photography, and Representation: Another Way of Knowing Régine Michelle Jean-Charles
Contributors Artists Colophon
Black motherhood through Black woman photographic art
Black Matrilineage, Photography, and Representation: Another Way of Knowing questions how the Black female body, specifically the Black maternal body, navigates interlocking structures that place a false narrative on her body and that of her maternal ancestors. This volume, which includes a curated selection of images, addresses the complicated relationship between Blackness and photography and, in particular, its gendered dimension, its relationship to health, sexuality, and digital culture – primarily in the context of racialized heteronormativity.
With over forty contributors, this volume draws on scholarly inquiry ranging from academic essays, interviews, poetry, to documentary practice, and on contemporary art. Black Matrilineage, Photography, and Representation: Another Way of Knowing thus offers a cross-section of analysis on the topic of Black motherhood, mothering, and the participation of photography in the process.
This collection challenges racist images and discourses, both historically and in its persistence in contemporary society, while reclaiming the innate brilliance of Black women through personal narratives, political acts, connections to place, moments of pleasure, and communal celebration. It serves as a reflection of the past, a portal to the future, and contributes to recent scholarship on the complexities of Black life and Black joy.
Foreword by Salamishah Tillet and Scheherazade Tillet.
Afterword by Régine Michelle Jean-Charles (Northeastern University)
Contributing authors: Tomi Akitunde (founder and editor-in-chief of mater mea), Grace Aneiza Ali (Florida State University), Emily Brady (University of Nottingham), Lesly Deschler Canossi (Women Picturing Revolution), Nicole J. Caruth (independent curator), Haile Eshe Cole (University of Connecticut), Atalie Gerhard (Saarland University), Kellie Carter Jackson (Wellesley College), Régine Michelle Jean-Charles (Northeastern University), Rachel Lobo (York University), Zoraida Lopez-Diago (Women Picturing Revolution), Salamishah Tillet (Rutgers University), Scheherazade Tillet (A Long Walk Home), Brie McLemore (University of California, Berkeley), Renée Mussai (Autograph London), Marly Pierre-Louis (independent curator), Jonathan Michael Square (Parsons School of Design), Susan Thompson (independent curator), Jennifer Turner (Hollins University), Sasha Turner (Johns Hopkins University), Rhaisa Kameela Williams (Princeton University)
Contributing artists: Nydia Blas, Samantha Box, Sheila Pree Bright, Renee Cox, Andrea Chung, Nona Faustine, Adama Delphine Fawundu, vanessa german , Ayana V. Jackson, Lebohang Kganye, Deana Lawson, Qiana Mestrich, Marcia Michael, Zanele Muholi, Wangechi Mutu, Keisha Scarville, Mickalene Thomas, Mary Sibande, Carrie Mae Weems, Deborah Willis
This book emerges from the project Women Picturing Revolution.
For more information, visit www.womenpicturingrevolution.com
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer Review Content).
Listen to an interview with Lesly Deschler Canossi and Zoraida Lopez-Diago at New Books Network: https://newbooksnetwork.com/black-matrilineage-photography-and-representation
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aKnowledge Unlatched =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aBlack Motherhood =653 \\$aMatrilineage =653 \\$aBlack Mother =653 \\$aPhotography =653 \\$aVisual Culture =653 \\$aPhotography =653 \\$aAfrican-American =653 \\$aAfrican Diaspora Studies =653 \\$aGender =653 \\$aFeminist Studies =653 \\$aWomen’s Studies =653 \\$aMotherhood Studies =653 \\$aAmerican Studies =653 \\$aAnthropology Studies =653 \\$awomen of the diaspora =700 1\$aDeschler Canossi, Lesly,$eeditor. =700 1\$aLopez-Diago, Zoraida,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664631$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/308463/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05681nam 22006252 4500 =001 48e32c83-c177-4fca-9ce6-27c2de377f88 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20192019\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462701724$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461662545$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461662781$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461662545$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aAMX$2bicssc =072 7$aAM$2bicssc =072 7$a3JJ$2bicssc =072 7$aARC005070$2bisacsh =072 7$aARC005000$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS037070$2bisacsh =072 7$aAMX$2thema =072 7$aAM$2thema =072 7$a1D$2thema =072 7$a3MPB$2thema =100 1\$aKohlrausch, Martin,$eauthor. =245 10$aBrokers of Modernity :$bEast Central Europe and the Rise of Modernist Architects, 1910-1950 /$cMartin Kohlrausch. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2019. =264 \4$c©2019 =300 \\$a1 online resource (400 pages): $b77 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aNote on Translation Abbreviations
Introduction Brokers of Modernity Why Modernist Architects? Modernist Architects and Modernity Thematic and Temporal Structures
1. Modernity in Eastern Europe – East European Modernism? The European East – Sketches of a Projection screen East Central Europe – A Space of Crisis? The Post-Monarchic State and the Legacy of the War Eastern Modernity Conclusion
2. Architects as Experts of the Social: A new Type entering the European Scene New Tasks for Architects Architects and the Rise of the Modern Expert Training Modern Architects The Rise of Scientific Urbanism and the Self-Empowerment of Architects The Lure of the Machine Themes of Change – Architecture as Technology: Rationalization, Planning, and Technocracy 89 Conclusion
3. Organising New Architectural Goals Organising Architects in a New State Architecture in a New Key – the CIAM Self-empowerment – the CIAM and its Polish Group CIAM-Universalism or Eastern Fast-track? The CIAM-Ost Realizers – the WSM as Interface
Conclusion
4. Communicating Social Change through Architecture The Spatial Structure of the New Discourse on Architecture The Abstract Heritage of the First World War and the Logic of the Media Architectural Journals and Books as Architectural Programme Travelling, Gathering, Thinking Alike: Architects as Modern Men Communicating Problems and Solutions via Language and Exhibitions Conclusion
Gallery with Plates
5. Materialising the International Agenda: Warszawa Funkcjonalna The CIAM IV Moment – Politics Coming in Realising the Novel: The Functionalist Laboratory of Zlín The Idea of the Functional City Warszawa Funkcjonalna Conclusion
6. Under Pressure: Modernist Architects and the Rise of Political Extremes Questioned Loyalties and Strained International Exchange Continuity and Rupture – the Onslaught on Warsaw Personal Toll and Collaboration Windows of Opportunity: Warsaw as a Post-catastrophic City Old Bonds and new Attention: Warsaw as a Realized Utopia? 2 Conclusion
Epilogue Acknowledgements Notes Bibliography Illustration Credits Index
The story of modernist architects in East Central Europe
The first half of the twentieth century witnessed the rise of modernist architects. Brokers of Modernity reveals how East Central Europe turned into one of the pre-eminent testing grounds of the new belief system of modernism. By combining the internationalism of the CIAM organization and the modernising aspirations of the new states built after 1918, the reach of modernist architects extended far beyond their established fields. Yet, these architects paid a price when Europe’s age of extremes intensified. Mainly drawing on Polish, but also wider Central and Eastern European cases, this book delivers a pioneering study of the dynamics of modernist architects as a group, including how they became qualified, how they organized, communicated and attempted to live the modernist lifestyle themselves. In doing so, Brokers of Modernity raises questions concerning collective work in general and also invites us to examine the social role of architects today.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
NOTES ON TERMINOLOGY AND FIGURES
INTRODUCTION
White Nation-building and the Myths of Afrikaner Nationalism
Propaganda and Photography
Researching Propaganda Photography and the State of the Archives
I. SOUTH AFRICA’S INFORMATION SERVICE
I.1. The Information Service and Photography
I.2. Publications
I.3. Actors in the Propaganda Machinery
II. CELEBRATING THE WHITE NATION
II.1. The Inauguration of the Voortrekker Monument, 1949
II.2. ‘We Build a Nation’: The Jan van Riebeeck Festival, 1952
III. H. F. VERWOERD: ‘MASTER-BUILDER’ OF THE WHITE NATION
III.1. From Minister of Native Affairs to Prime Minister
III.2. The Pivotal Year 1960
III.3. The Verwoerd Couple
III.4. Statesman
III.5. Pictorial Afterlife
IV. PROPAGATING SEPARATE DEVELOPMENT
IV.1. Bantu Education
IV.2. The Health Care System
IV.3. Ernest Cole’s House of Bondage, 1967
V. PERFORMING THE STATE
V.1. The Annual Openings of Parliament
V.2. The Transkei Independence Celebrations, 1976
VI. THE HENDRIK VERWOERD DAM
VI.1. Symbol of Modernity and National Pride
VI.2. The Dam in the Regime’s Visual Network
CONCLUSION
NOTES
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Archival Sources
Literature
Periodicals and Newspapers
Film
Online Sources
Email Communication and Interviews
ILLUSTRATION CREDITS
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aA unique study of South African propaganda photography during apartheid.
Throughout the apartheid era, South Africa maintained a wide-reaching propaganda apparatus. At its core was the information service that strongly capitalised on photography to visually articulate the minority regime’s racist political messages, promote Afrikaner nationalism, and consolidate White rule. By unearthing a substantial corpus of photographs that so far have been hidden in archives, this book offers a distinctive perspective on the institutional context of the regime’s photographic production and how it was tightly linked to the objective to build a White nation. Through scrutiny of the photographic material’s iconographies, its circulation in printed matters, and a comparison with works by photographers like Margaret Bourke-White, Ernest Cole, and David Goldblatt, readers gain fresh insight into the country’s visual culture of the period. Based on the ambiguity of photographs, the monograph challenges the alleged dichotomy between so-called pro- and anti-apartheid photographies, highlighting how the regime was able to position photographs in the grey area of inconspicuousness.
By blending photo theory and art historical analysis with historical studies, Building a White Nation will appeal to scholars and postgraduate students in cultural studies interested in photo history and theory, visual culture and art history, African studies, South African photography, Afrikaner nationalism, propaganda studies, postcolonial studies, and archive theory.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
PrefaceThe Gipuzkoa model, a solid trajectoryMarkel Olano
List of abbreviations
Glossary of Etorkizuna Eraikiz terms
Chapter 1Introduction: Etorkizuna Eraikiz, a major case of collaborative governanceXabier Barandiarán, María José Canel & Geert Bouckaert
Part I. Structural dimensions to institutionalise collaborative governanceChapter 2Etorkizuna Eraikiz: The conceptual basis of the model Egoitz Pomares, Asier Lakidain & Alfonso Unceta
Chapter 3How to institutionalise collaborative governance? From concepts to practiceXabier Barandiarán, Sebastián Zurutuza, Unai Andueza & Ainhoa Arrona
Chapter 4What a systemic vision can do to help to develop collaborative governance: The example of Etorkizuna Eraikiz Naiara Goia, Gorka Espiau & Ander Caballero
*** WORKSHOP 1Synthesis of interactions between scholars and practitioners 1. To what extent do structures of governance of Etorkizuna Eraikiz differ from hierarchical organisational decision-making? 2. Which formulae did (and did not) work for decision-making with multi-level, cross-departmental, and public- and private-sector actors? 3. Analysis of meta-governance: what for, who, what, how and with what impact
Comments from scholars Comment 1 Etorkizuna Eraikiz: A collaborative governance framework for learning and acting Tina Nabatchi Comment 2 The challenge of combining legitimacy and effectiveness when building collaborative governance Luis Aguilar Comment 3 Historical background in the Basque Country for diverse social capital as a precondition for Etorkizuna Eraikiz collaborative governance Peter Loge Comment 4 Collaborative governance as jazz: Three propositions
Adil Najam ***
Part II. Relational dimensions to learn and communicate about a culture of collaborative governanceChapter 5Active experimentation through action research: The experience of the Etorkizuna Eraikiz Think TankAndoni Eizagirre, Miren Larrea & Fernando Tapia
Chapter 6Communicating for collaborative governance Ion Muñoa
Chapter 7Listening and learning together: Using action learning for collaborative governanceAnne Murphy, María José Canel, Olatz Errazkin, Ander Arzelus, & Elena Oyon
*** WORKSHOP 2Synthesis of interactions between scholars and practitioners 1. Analysis of stakeholders. Who is in, who is still out? Issues of democracy. 2. The role of culture in interactions management. What worked and what did not in aligning different stakeholders around common goals? Why do people engage in collaborative governance (efficiency, equality, social and economic growth)? 3. The role of leadership. How to organise leadership? What skills are needed for leading collaborative governance? 4. How has EE approached communication? What can be learned from it about the role communication plays in collaborative governance?
Comments from scholars Comment 5 Collaborative governance, accountability and leadership in Etorkizuna Eraikiz Sonia Ospina Comment 6 Etorkizuna Eraikiz: A case of interactive political leadership Eva Sørensen Comment 7 The need to systematise relationships with stakeholders to make collaborative governance work Jacob Torfing Comment 8 Public-sector communication to engage citizens in collaborative governance Vilma Luoma-aho ***
Part III. Looking at results and conclusions
*** WORKSHOP 3Synthesis of interactions between scholars and practitioners 1. What indicators are there about Etorkizuna Eraikiz? 2. How do we shift from results to trust? How is the collaborative governance of Etorkizuna Eraikiz building and keeping trust? How do inclusion/exclusion lead to trust? 3. How to further analyse outputs and impact of collaborative governance?
Comments from scholars Comment Notes on the evaluation of Etorkizuna Eraikiz Gregg Van Ryzin Comment 10 Looking at the impact of collaborative policies on intangibles and outcomes through dynamic performance governance Carmine Bianchi Comment 11 Looking about achievements and results: Further steps to evaluate Etorkizuna Eraikiz Stephan Ansolabehere Comment 12 Some reflections about the future of Etorkizuna EraikizJavier Lezaun ***
Chapter 8Conclusions: Pracademic lessons learnedGeert Bouckaert, María José Canel & Xabier Barandiarán
Appendices References About the authors and contributors
Insights and recommendations for collaborative governance.
Democratic societies are being challenged to look for new ways of doing politics that involve different stakeholders, particularly citizens. This book looks at public authorities' attempts to put society at the core of public policies in the form of collaborative governance. It provides a full account of a major case from the provincial council of Gipuzkoa (Basque Country, Spain): 150 projects, more than 900 organisations, and 50.000 participants and beneficiaries. ‘Pracademic’ lessons learned derive from the interaction among 50 practitioners engaged in the day-to-day practice of the case and scholars from different countries. Topics included relate to major challenges that collaborative governance reforms are facing across the world: structures, institutionalisation, relationships, leadership, accountability, innovation, experimentation, communication, intangible resources, trust, and assessment of outcomes (particularly in terms of Sustainable Development Goals or SDGs). Ultimately, issues of democracy arise from a case covering a comprehensive list of policies: health, employment, elderly care, energy, cybersecurity, electromobility, artificial intelligence, immigration, education, social equity, and culture. This book is intended for students, professionals and scholars interested in fostering the study and practice of democracy.
Contributors: Luis F. Aguilar (National Researcher Emeritus, Mexico), Stephen Ansolabehere (Harvard University), Ander Arzelus (Diputación Foral de Gipuzkoa), Unai Andueza (Diputación Foral de Gipuzkoa), Ainhoa Arrona (Deusto Foundation), Xabier Barandiaran (Provincial Council of Gipuzkoa), Carmine Bianchi (University of Palermo), Geert Bouckaert (KU Leuven), Ander Caballero (Harvard University), María José Canel (University Complutense Madrid), Andoni Eizaguirre (Mondragon University), Olatz Errazkin (Diputación Foral de Gipuzkoa), Gorka Espiau (University of the Basque Country), Naiara Goia (Diputación Foral de Gipuzkoa), Asier Lakidain (University of the Basque Country), Miren Larrea (Deusto Foundation), Javier Lezaun (Oxford University), Peter Loge (The George Washington University), Vilma Luoma-aho (Jyväskylä University School of Business and Economics), Ion Muñoa (University of Deusto), Anne Murphy (Lancaster University), Tina Nabatchi (Syracuse University Maxwell School of Citizenship and Public Affairs), Adil Najim (Boston University), Markel Olano (Diputación Foral de Gipuzkoa), Sonia Ospina (New York University), Elena Oyon (strategic thinker, doer and facilitator), Egoitz Pomares (University of the Basque Country), Eva Sørensen (Roskilde University), Fernando Tapia (University of the Basque Country), Jacob Torfing (Roskilde University), Alfonso Unceta (University of the Basque Country), Gregg G. Van Ryzin (Rutgers University–Newark), Sebastián Zurutuza (Provincial Council of Gipuzkoa)
Ebook available in Open Access.
=536 \\$aDiputación Foral de Gipuzkoa =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aCollaborative Governance =653 \\$aDemocracy =653 \\$aLeadership =653 \\$aAccountability =653 \\$aIntangible Resources =653 \\$aTrust =653 \\$aSocial Capital =653 \\$aDeliberation =653 \\$aPublic Sector Communication =653 \\$aCitizen Participation =700 1\$aBarandiaran, Xabier,$eeditor. =700 1\$aJosé Canel, María,$eeditor. =700 1\$aBouckaert, Geert,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000202828106$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-0282-8106 =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665058$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/329893/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 07265nam 22006972 4500 =001 6834ad32-2099-4729-887e-40cf197a2c7a =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702950$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664129$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664136$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664129$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aDSA$2bicssc =072 7$aJFS$2bicssc =072 7$aD$2bicssc =072 7$aDSK$2bicssc =072 7$a2ACD$2bicssc =072 7$aLIT004130$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC032000$2bisacsh =072 7$aFIC019000$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT024060$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT025050$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT025040$2bisacsh =072 7$aFOR006000$2bisacsh =072 7$aDSA$2thema =072 7$aJBS$2thema =072 7$aDSBJ$2thema =072 7$aDSK$2thema =072 7$aGPH$2thema =072 7$a2ACD$2thema =100 1\$aSmeets, Roel,$eauthor. =245 10$aCharacter Constellations :$bRepresentations of Social Groups in Present-Day Dutch Literary Fiction /$cRoel Smeets. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (252 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aChapter 1: Introduction 1.1 Introduction: Character Constellations
1.1.1 Example: Character Constellations in Joost Zwagerman’s De buitenvrouw (1994) and Robert Vuijsje’s Alleen maar nette mensen (2008) 1.1.2 Delineation of the Study and Research Question 1.1.3 Character Studies 1.1.4 Characterization and Character Types 1.1.5 The One Versus the Many 1.2. Critique of Representation 1.2.1 Representation and Ideology 1.2.2 Critiques of Representation in Dutch Literature 1.3. Cultural Analytics 1.3.1 Debates on Distant versus Close Reading 1.3.2 Modeling in Cultural Analytics 1.4 Methodological Background 1.4.1 Tools: Narratology and Network Analysis 1.4.2 Corpus and Data 1.4.3 Previous Research on Corpus and Dataset 1.5 Structure of the Book and Instruction for Reading
Chapter 2: Data 2.1 Introduction: Descriptive Statistics 2.2 Information on the Authors 2.3 Demographic Metadata on the Characters 2.4 (In)Dependence of Variables 2.5 Relational Information
2.6 Interpretation of Descriptive Statistics
Chapter 3: Centrality 3.1 Introduction: Narrative Cornerstones 3.2 Centrality in Network Theory 3.3 Centrality in Narratology 3.4 Method for Extracting Character Networks 3.4.1 Characters as Nodes 3.4.2 Character Relations as Edges 3.4.3 Automatic Extraction of Character Networks 3.5 Model I: Character Rankings 3.5.1 Results Multiple Regression Analysis 3.5.2 Close Reading: Centrality, Gender, and Descent in Özcan Akyol’s Eus (2012) 3.6 Conclusion to this Chapter
Chapter 4: Community 4.1 Introduction: Narrative Connections 4.2 Community in Network Theory 4.2.1 Community Detection 4.2.2 Homophily 4.3 Community in Narratology 4.3.1 Syntagmatic and Paradigmatic Collectives 4.3.2 Dialogic Interaction and Polyphony 4.4 Model I: Community Detection 4.4.1 Clauset-Newman-Moore and Girvan-Newman Algorithms 4.4.2 Kernighan-Lin Bisection Algorithm 4.4.3 Close Reading: Communities in Philip Huff ’s Niemand in de stad (2012) 4.5 Model II: Homophily 4.5.1 Dyad Assortativity 4.5.2 Close Reading: Homophily in Mensje van Keulen’s Liefde heeft geen hersens (2012) 4.6 Conclusion to this Chapter
Chapter 5: Conflict 5.1 Introduction: Narrative Clashes 5.2 Conflict in Network Theory 5.3 Conflict in Narratology 1 5.4 Model I: Hierarchies in One-on-one Conflicts 5.4.1 Conflict Scores 5.4.2 Results of Multiple Linear Regression 5.4.3 Close Reading: Class Conflicts between Two Characters in Bart Koubaa’s De Brooklynclub (2012) 5.5 Model II: Social Balance in Triangular Conflicts 5.5.1 Automatic Modeling of Social Balance in Enemy/Friend triads 5.5.2 Social Balance in Leon de Winter’s VSV, of daden van onbaatzuchtigheid 5.5.3 Social Imbalance in Tommy Wieringa’s Dit zijn de namen 5.6 Conclusion to this Chapter
Chapter 6: Conclusion 6.1 Findings of the Book 6.2 Public Debates on Literary Representation 6.3 Future Research
Appendix A: Statistical tests Appendix B: Distribution of Relational Roles Appendix C: Main and Interaction Effects Appendix D: Pearson Correlations Notes References
**Large-scale data analysis of cultural representation in Dutch literary fiction **
Fiction has a major social impact, not least because it co-shapes the image that society has of various social groups. Drawing on a collection of 170 contemporary Dutch-language novels, Character Constellations presents a range of data-driven, statistical models to study depictions of characters in terms of gender, race, ethnicity, class, age, sexuality, and other identity categories. Incorporating the tools of network analysis, each chapter highlights an aspect of fictional social networks that affects the representation of social groups: their centrality, their communities, and their conflicts. While reading individual novels in light of emerging statistical patterns, combining the formal methods of social network analysis with the interpretive tools of narratology, this study shows how central societal themes such as (in)equality and emancipation, integration and segregation, and social mobility and class struggle are foregrounded, replicated, or distorted in the Dutch novel.
Showcasing what character-based critiques of literary representation gain by integrating data-driven methods into the practice of critical close reading, Character Constellations contributes to societal debates on cultural representation and identity and the role fiction and art have in those debates.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Studying Christian masculinity. An introduction
Yvonne Maria Werner
Part I
Key Concepts and theoretical Perspectives
The unrecognised piety of men.
Strategies and success of the re-masculinisation campaign around 1900
Olaf Blaschke
Masculinity and secularisation in twentieth-century Britain
Callum G. Brown
Part II
Visions and Ideals of Christian Manhood
Heroic men and Christian ideals
Tine Van Osselaer and Alexander Maurits
Masculinity, memory, and oblivion in the Dutch Dominican Province, 1930-1950
Marit Monteiro
The man in the clergyman. Swedish priest obituaries, 1905-1937
Anna Prestjan
Crises of faith and the making of Christian masculinities at the turn of the twentieth century
David Tjeder
Part III
Missionary Masculinity
Protestant mission in China. A proletarian perspective
Erik Sidenvall
Alternative masculinity? Catholic missionaries in Scandinavia
Yvonne Maria Werner
Part IV
Fostering Christian Men
The making of Christian men.
An evangelical mission to the Swedish army, c. 1900-1920
Elin Malmer
Danish folk high school and the creation of a new Danish man
Nanna Damsholt
Part V
Transgressing Gender Boundaries
Literary transgressions of masculinity and religion
Inger Littberger Caisou-Rousseau
A manly queen with feminine charm.
Intersectional perspectives on gender
Anders Jarlert
The new Catholic feminism.
Tradition and renewal in Catholic gender theology
Gösta Hallonsten
Bibliography
Contributors
Index
Colophon
In the mid-nineteenth century, when the idea of religion as a private matter connected to the home and the female sphere won acceptance among the bourgeois elite, Christian religious practices began to be associated with femininity and soft values. Contemporary critics claimed that religion was incompatible with true manhood, and today's scholars talk about a feminisation of religion. But was this really the case? What expression did male religious faith take at a time when Christianity was losing its status as the foundation of society?
This is the starting point for the research presented in Christian Masculinity. Here we meet Catholic and Protestant men struggling with and for their Christian faith as priests, missionaries, and laymen, as well as ideas and reflections on Christian masculinity in media, fiction, and correspondence of various kinds. Some men engaged in social and missionary work, or strove to harness the masculine combative spirit to Christian ends, while others were eager to show the male character of Christian virtues. This book not only illustrates the importance of religion for the understanding of gender construction, but also the need to take into consideration confessional and institutional aspects of religious identity.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Foreword Acknowledgements
Introduction A brief excursion into the history of virology and vaccines
Chapter I. Leuven: a hotbed for antiviral research The cross-fertilization between academia and pharma Vaccines and celebrity scientists
Chapter II. Behind the Iron Curtain The molecular revolution goes east The Academy of Sciences in Prague
Chapter III. Strange bedfellows: a Czech chemist and a Flemish virologist Auspicious omens A young prodigy’s path to science
Chapter IV. The sixties in Leuven and Prague Antiviral penicillin Spring turns into winter
Chapter V. Enzymes: the secret of life as chemistry At Stanford, a new world opens up The Rega Institute cuts corporate ties and goes its own way
Chapter VI. From interferon to nucleosides A first encounter with nucleosides A fateful meeting in Göttingen Bringing compounds to life Chapter VII. Breaking away from interferon A molecule for all seasons Cloning the interferon gene
Chapter VIII. The first antiviral drugs NA TO supports a nucleosides network Bringing antiviral therapy to the clinic
Chapter IX. Aids emerges in the shadow of the Cold War The East German connection The Cold War heats up Revealing a retrovirus
Chapter X. From passivity to action A pivotal year A triangular collaboration is set in motion Launching an aids laboratory in Leuven: the story of d4T
Chapter XI. First attempts to halt the epidemic Two irons in the fire: Bristol-Myers and Janssen Taking stock after AZT Holý’s compound is active against HIV
Chapter XII. Finding the best therapy: the one-a-day-pill A new start-up: Gilead Sciences The birth of Cidofovir, Tenofovir and Adefovir
Epilogue: Of scientists and crusaders
Album Notes References Index
The extraordinary story of scientists in East and West combatting HIV
A small group of scientists were doggedly working in the field of antiviral treatments when the AIDS epidemic struck. Faced with one of the grand challenges of modern biology of the twentieth century, scientists worked across the political divide of the Cold War to produce a new class of antivirals. Their molecules were developed by a Californian start-up together with teams of scientists at the Rega Institute of KU Leuven and the Institute of Organic Chemistry and Biochemistry (IOCB) of the Academy of Sciences in Prague. These molecules became the cornerstone of the blockbuster drugs now used to combat and prevent HIV. Cold War Triangle gives an insight into the human face of science as it recounts the extraordinary story of scientists in East and West who overcame ideological barriers and worked together for the benefit of humanity.
Read more on the book's dedicated website: www.coldwartriangle.com
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663979$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/256162//_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 07542nam 22006372 4500 =001 22e36802-9993-47aa-beb3-ba7753094ae1 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20242024\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462703780$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461665409$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665409$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aACBP$2bicssc =072 7$a1DF$2bicssc =072 7$aART019000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART006000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART059000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015100$2bisacsh =072 7$a1.3.0.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aAGA$2thema =072 7$aGLZ$2thema =072 7$aAGC$2thema =072 7$a1DF$2thema =072 7$a1F$2thema =072 7$a3MP$2thema =245 00$aCollecting Asian Art :$bCultural Politics and Transregional Networks in Twentieth-Century Central Europe /$cedited by Markéta Hánová, Yuka Kadoi, Simone Wille. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2024. =264 \4$c©2024 =300 \\$a1 online resource: $b32 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aNote on Transliteration and Translation 7
Collecting Asian Art: Central Europe’s Transregional Connectivity
Simone Wille
THE LOCATION OF ASIAN ART IN EARLY TWENTIETH-CENTURY CENTRAL EUROPE
The Ideals of the East : Asian Art and the Crisis of Visual Expression across the Globe, ca. 1900
Yuka Kadoi
Picasso’s Meeting with Buddha
Tomáš Winter
COLLECTIONS AND COLLECTORS, NETWORKS AND DISPLAY
Twentieth-Century Cultural Politics and Networks : The Genesis of the Asian Art Collection at the National Gallery in Prague
Markéta Hánová
‘I Have Shown You Japan …’ Feliks Jasieński and Japanese Art Collections in Poland
Agnieszka Kluczewska-Wójcik
Networks of Enthusiasm for Japan
Johannes Wieninger
SPOTLIGHT ON (COMMUNIST) ASIA
When East and West met in the Heart of Europe : Vojtěch Chytil and His Contribution to Collecting Asian Art in Central Europe
Michaela Pejčochová
Big Presents Maintain the Friendship : The Gift of the People’s Republic of China to the Staatliche Museen zu Berlin (National Museums in Berlin), GDR, in 1959
Uta Rahman-Steinert
Saved from the Furnace, thrown into the Cold War: Islamic Art in Hungary in the 1950s
Iván Szántó
SOUTH ASIA IN POST-WAR PRAGUE
Lubor Hájek and Indian Modernist Art
Zdenka Klimtová
M. F. Husain’s Work in the Collection of the National Gallery in Prague : Connecting East and West
Simone Wille
THE ARCHIVE: A REPOSITORY
Collecting East Asian Objects in Slovenia : A Methodological Approach to Creating the VAZ Database
Nataša Vampelj Suhadolnik
COLLECTING ASIAN ART: PAST, PRESENT, AND FUTURE
Of Centres, Peripheries, Values, and Judgements
Simone Wille in Conversation with Partha Mitter on ‘Decentering Modernism’ and Modernist Routes beyond Western Europe
Biographies of the Authors
Index
Gallery with Colour Plates
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aMuseum collections of Asian art in Central Europe.
Rather than centering on the well-known collections in Western European and North American museums, Collecting Asian Art turns to museum collections of Asian art in Central Europe which emerged from the late 19th century onwards. Highlighting the dimensions of Central European connectedness, this volume explores how these collections evolved and changed under changing cultural and political conditions from the pre-World War I to the post-World War II periods. With a primary focus on collections of East Asian, South Asian, and West Asian art in Vienna, Prague, Berlin, Warsaw, Kraków, Budapest, and Ljubljana, it outlines the transregional connections and networks that gradually developed.
Collecting Asian Art locates Asian art across the twentieth-century in Central Europe via discourse and ideology, and discusses key collections and the way individual collectors built their networks. It thus explores transregional connections that developed through collecting activities and strategies in the prewar, interwar and postwar eras. Contributors also examine the personal connections between a group of Indologists from postwar Prague and modernist Indian artists from the early 1950s to the 1980s and also discuss the systematic archiving of East Asian art collections in Slovenia. A concluding conversation looks at colonisation and decolonisation from a broader perspective by approaching it through recent art historical discussions on the global dimensions of modernism. By defining the region through its external relationships and its entanglements with regions across Asia rather than as a self-contained unit, the contributions in this volume outline how these transregional connections and networks evolved and changed over time, thus highlighting their singularity in comparison to developments in Western Europe. Based on recent research, Collecting Asian Art reveals neglected sources while reinterpreting well-known ones.
Contributors: Zdenka Klimtová (National Gallery in Prague); Agnieszka Kluczewska-Wójcik (Polish Institute of World Art Studies); Partha Mitter (University of Sussex); Michaela Pejčochová (National Gallery in Prague); Uta Rahman Steinert (Staatliche Museen zu Berlin); Iván Szántó (Eötvös Loránd University); Nataša Vampelj Suhadolnik (University of Ljubljana); Johannes Wieninger (MAK – Museum of Applied Arts); Tomáš Winter (Czech Academy of Sciences).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
General Introduction: Comics of the 'New' Europe Martha Kuhlman, José Alaniz
Part 1: The Former Yugoslav States
Un-Drawn Experience: Visualizing Trauma in Aleksandar Zograf’s Regards from Serbia
Max Bledstein
Filial Estrangement and Figurative Mourning in the Work of Nina Bunjevac
Dragana Obradović
Reality Check Through the Historical Avant-garde: Danilo Milošev Wostok
Aleksandra Sekulić
Part 2: Czechoslovakia/the Czech Republic
Facets of Nostalgia: Text-centric Longing in Comics and Graphic Novels by Pavel Čech
Pavel Kořínek
The Avant-Garde Aesthetic of Vojtěch Mašek
Martha Kuhlman
Regardless of Context: Graphic Novels with the Faceless (and Homelandless) Hero of Branko Jelinek
Martin Foret
Part 3: Germany
Co-Opting Childhood and Obscuring Ideology in Mosaik von Hannes Hegen, 1959-1974
Sean Eedy
Images of Spies and Counter Spies in East German Comics
Michael F. Scholz
Towards a Graphic Historicity: Authenticity and Photography in the German Graphic Novel
Elizabeth “Biz” Nijdam
Part 4: Poland, Ukraine, Romania, Hungary
Women, Feminism and Polish Comic Books: Frąś/Hagedorn’s Totalnie nie nostalgia
Ewa Stańczyk
Igor Baranko and National Precarity in Post-Soviet Ukrainian Comics
José Alaniz
The Autobiographical Mode in Post-Communist Romanian Comics:
Everyday Life in Brynjar Åbel Bandlien’s Strîmb Living and Andreea Chirică’s The Year of the Pioneer
Mihaela Precup
Avatars and Iteration in Contemporary Hungarian Autobiographical Comics
Eszter Szép
Acknowledgments
About the authors
Index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aA new generation of European cartoonists
Bringing together the work of an array of North American and European scholars, this collection highlights a previously unexamined area within global comics studies. It analyses comics from countries formerly behind the Iron Curtain like East Germany, Poland, Czech Republic, Hungary, Romania, Yugoslavia, and Ukraine, given their shared history of WWII and communism. In addition to situating these graphic narratives in their national and subnational contexts, Comics of the New Europe pays particular attention to transnational connections along the common themes of nostalgia, memoir, and life under communism. The essays offer insights into a new generation of European cartoonists that looks forward, inspired and informed by traditions from Franco-Belgian and American comics, and back, as they use the medium of comics to reexamine and reevaluate not only their national pasts and respective comics traditions but also their own post-1989 identities and experiences.
Contributors: Max Bledstein (University of Winnipeg), Dragana Obradović (University of Toronto), Aleksandra Sekulić (University of Arts in Belgrade), Pavel Kořínek (Institute of Czech Literature, Czech Academy of Sciences in Prague), Martin Foret (Palacký University), Michael Scholz (Uppsala University), Sean Eedy (Carleton University), Elizabeth Nijdam (University of British Columbia), Ewa Stańczyk (University of Amsterdam), Eszter Szép (Eötvös Loránd University)
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKnowledge Unlatched =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aEuropean Comics =653 \\$aTransnational Comics =653 \\$aGraphic Narrative =653 \\$aGraphic narrative Memoir =653 \\$aGraphic narrative and History =653 \\$aAutographics =700 1\$aKuhlman, Martha,$eeditor. =700 1\$aAlaniz, José,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aStudies in European Comics and Graphic Novels ;$vvol. 3. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665270$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/284935/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05888nam 22007212 4500 =001 c83076f8-c607-4450-845c-10bf34cc1cab =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20222022\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\spa\d =020 \\$z9789462703230$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664440$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664457$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664440$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBJD$2bicssc =072 7$aJFFN$2bicssc =072 7$a1DSE$2bicssc =072 7$a3JB$2bicssc =072 7$a3JD$2bicssc =072 7$aHIS045000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS037090$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS037040$2bisacsh =072 7$a1.5.7.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHD$2thema =072 7$aJBFH$2thema =072 7$a1DSE$2thema =072 7$a3MD$2thema =072 7$a3MGB$2thema =100 1\$aPoggio, Eleonora,$eauthor. =245 10$aComunidad, pertenencia, extranjería :$bEl impacto de la migración laboral y mercantil de la región del Mar del Norte en Nueva España, 1550-1640 /$cEleonora Poggio. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2022. =264 \4$c©2022 =300 \\$a1 online resource: $b30 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aAvisos de Flandes ;$vvol. 3. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aLista de cuadros, esquemas, gráficas y mapas
Agradecimientos
Siglas y abreviaturas
Monedas y conversiones
Introducción
Primera Parte
Comunidad, pertenencia y extranjería en Nueva España, 1560-1640
1. La categorización del extranjero en la comunidad política
2. La fiscalidad como instrumento de categorización social: Las
composiciones de extranjeros
3. La categorización de extranjeros en la comunidad espiritual
Segunda Parte
El impacto social y económico de la migración del Mar del Norte
en Nueva España
4. La migración laboral
5. Migración cualificada y transmisión tecnológica: Los efectos de la
gestión neerlandesa de la producción de salitre, los nitroderivados y
el apartado de metales en México, 1590-1630
6. La migración mercantil
Tercera parte
Una comunidad de comunidades
7. La construcción de la pertenencia en el espacio novohispano
Conclusiones
Bibliografía
Índice de nombres, lugares y temas
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aThe role and impact of cross-cultural migrations in the modern age
Comunidad, pertenencia, extranjería desvela el papel central que tuvo la migración laboral y mercantil de la región del Mar del Norte en el virreinato de la Nueva España durante un periodo crítico de la formación de las sociedades coloniales. Lejos de ser una migración marginal, como hasta ahora se ha creído, la presencia de migrantes septentrionales fue estratégica para la expansión y el mantenimiento de la monarquía hispánica por su aporte de mano de obra, de conocimientos tecnológicos, de redes comerciales y de capital transnacional. A partir del análisis transversal del impacto de esta migración en la sociedad, la política y la economía novohispana, este trabajo muestra como es imposible contar la historia del imperio español sin tomar en cuenta el papel que los europeos no españoles tuvieron en su formación y evolución.
**Comunidad, pertenencia, extranjería reveals the central role played by labour and mercantile migration from the North Sea region in the Viceroyalty of New Spain during a critical period in the formation of colonial societies. Far from being a marginal migration, as has been believed until now, the presence of northern migrants was strategic for the expansion and maintenance of the Hispanic monarchy due to their contribution of labour, technological knowledge, commercial networks, and transnational capital. From the cross-sectional analysis of the impact of this migration on the society, politics, and economy of New Spain, this work shows how it is impossible to tell the story of the Spanish empire without taking into account the role that non-Spanish Europeans played in its formation and evolution.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).*
*
ESSAYS
Forewords
Introduction
Sandrine Colard
Congoville: A Black Flâneur’s Path through a Post-Colonial City
Filip De Boeck
Congoville–Putuville: Mirroring Models and Beyond in the (Post)Colonial World
Nadia Yala Kisukidi
In Congoville, the “Belgian-Negros” Never Saw the Light of Day: Travelling (Back) in Time
Bas De Roo
Masters in Colonization? The Colonial College of Antwerp and Its Legacies (1920-1960)
Sorana Munsya & Léonard Pongo
Congolese Resistance to Belgian Africa? The Colonial College of Antwerp (1920-1960)
EXHIBITION
About the Artists
Artist Interviews
Postface
About the authors
Colophon
--------
ESSAYS
Woord vooraf
Inleiding
Sandrine Colard
Congoville: een zwarte flâneur op pad door een postkoloniale stad
Filip De Boeck
Congoville–Putuville: voorbij de spiegelbeelden in de (post)koloniale wereld
Nadia Yala Kisukidi
In Congoville zagen de ‘Belgo-Negers’ nooit het daglicht: een (terug)reis in de tijd
Bas De Roo
Masters in de kolonisatie? De Koloniale Hogeschool van Antwerpen en zijn erfenissen (1920-2020)
Sorana Munsya & Léonard Pongo
Congolese weerstand tegen Belgisch Afrika? De Koloniale Hogeschool van Antwerpen (1920-1960)
TENTOONSTELLING
Over de kunstenaars
Interviews met de kunstenaars
Nabeschouwing
Over de auteurs
Colofon
=520 \\$aCompanion to the exhibition CONGOVILLE, Middelheim Museum, May 2021 – October 2021
One hundred years after the founding of the École Coloniale Supérieure in Antwerp, the adjacent Middelheim Museum invites Sandrine Colard, researcher and curator, to conceive an exhibition that probes silenced histories of colonialism in a site-specific way. For Colard, the term Congoville encompasses the tangible and intangible urban traces of the colony, not on the African continent but in 21st-century Belgium: a school building, a park, imperial myths, and citizens of African descent. In the exhibition and this adjoining publication, the concept Congoville is the starting point for 15 contemporary artists to address colonial history and ponder its aftereffects as black flâneurs walking through a postcolonial city.
Due to the multitude of perspectives and voices, this book is both a catalogue and a reference work comprised of artistic and academic contributions. Together, the participating artists and invited authors unfold the blueprint of Congoville, an imaginary city that still subconsciously affects us, but also encourages us to envision a decolonial utopia.
Een eeuw na de oprichting van de École Coloniale Supérieure in Antwerpen nodigt het naburige Middelheimmuseum onderzoeker en curator Sandrine Colard uit om een tentoonstelling te creëren die sitespecifiek peilt naar de stille geschiedenissen van het kolonialisme. Congoville duidt op de zichtbare en onzichtbare stedelijke sporen van de kolonie, niet op het Afrikaanse continent, maar pal in het België van vandaag: een schoolgebouw, een park, imperialistische mythes en burgers van Afrikaanse origine. Doorheen de tentoonstelling en deze bijhorende publicatie is Congoville de context waarbinnen 15 hedendaagse kunstenaars, als zwarte flâneurs op pad in een postkoloniale stad, het koloniale verleden en de impact ervan adresseren.
Door de veelheid aan perspectieven en stemmen is dit boek tegelijk een catalogus en een naslagwerk met zowel academische als artistieke bijdragen. Samen ontvouwen de betrokken kunstenaars en auteurs de blauwdruk van Congoville, een imaginaire stad die ons nog steeds onbewust in haar greep houdt, maar ons ook aanspoort om na te denken over een de-koloniaal utopia.
With contributions by/Met bijdragen van: Pieter Boons, Sandrine Colard, Filip De Boeck, Bas De Roo, Nadia Yala Kisukidi, Sorana Munsya & Léonard Pongo, Herman Van Goethem, Sara Weyns, Nabilla Ait Daoud
Participating artists/Deelnemende kunstenaars: Sammy Baloji, Bodys Isek Kingelez, Maurice Mbikayi, Jean Katambayi, KinAct Collective, Simone Leigh, Hank Willis Thomas, Zahia Rahmani, Ibrahim Mahama, Ângela Ferreira, Kapwani Kiwanga, Sven Augustijnen, Pascale Marthine Tayou, Elisabetta Benassi, Pélagie Gbaguidi
For more information, visit www.middelheimmuseum.be/nl/activiteit/congoville
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aContemporary Art =653 \\$aSculpture =653 \\$aMiddelheim Museum =653 \\$aDecoloniality =653 \\$aImaging =653 \\$aColonial History =653 \\$aAugmented History =653 \\$aAntwerp =653 \\$aColonial College =653 \\$aPostcoloniality =653 \\$aAnthropology =653 \\$aArt History =653 \\$aBelgian Congo =653 \\$aDemocratic Republic of Congo =653 \\$aAfrica =653 \\$aBelgium =653 \\$aArchive =700 1\$aBoons, Pieter,$eeditor. =700 1\$aColard, Sandrine,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663948$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/294419/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 07137nam 22007332 4500 =001 736beef0-d95e-4e45-98ce-b53f0467af67 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20222022\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\dut\d =020 \\$z9789462702363$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461663955$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663955$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =041 0\$adut$aeng$afre =072 7$aHBTQ$2bicssc =072 7$aA$2bicssc =072 7$aAGC$2bicssc =072 7$a1HFJC$2bicssc =072 7$a1DDB$2bicssc =072 7$aPOL045000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART006000$2bisacsh =072 7$a3.2.3.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$a1.2.1.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHTQ$2thema =072 7$aA$2thema =072 7$aAGC$2thema =072 7$a1HFJC$2thema =072 7$a1DDB$2thema =245 00$aCongoville (FR/NL) :$bDes artistes contemporains sur les traces de la colonisation. Hedendaagse kunstenaars bewandelen koloniale sporen /$cedited by Pieter Boons, Sandrine Colard. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2022. =264 \4$c©2022 =300 \\$a1 online resource (272 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aESSAYS
Forewords
Introduction
Sandrine Colard
Congoville: A Black Flâneur’s Path through a Post-Colonial City
Filip De Boeck
Congoville–Putuville: Mirroring Models and Beyond in the (Post)Colonial World
Nadia Yala Kisukidi
In Congoville, the “Belgian-Negros” Never Saw the Light of Day: Travelling (Back) in Time
Bas De Roo
Masters in Colonization? The Colonial College of Antwerp and Its Legacies (1920-1960)
Sorana Munsya & Léonard Pongo
Congolese Resistance to Belgian Africa? The Colonial College of Antwerp (1920-1960)
EXHIBITION
About the Artists
Artist Interviews
Postface
About the authors
Colophon
--------
ESSAYS
Woord vooraf
Inleiding
Sandrine Colard
Congoville: een zwarte flâneur op pad door een postkoloniale stad
Filip De Boeck
Congoville–Putuville: voorbij de spiegelbeelden in de (post)koloniale wereld
Nadia Yala Kisukidi
In Congoville zagen de ‘Belgo-Negers’ nooit het daglicht: een (terug)reis in de tijd
Bas De Roo
Masters in de kolonisatie? De Koloniale Hogeschool van Antwerpen en zijn erfenissen (1920-2020)
Sorana Munsya & Léonard Pongo
Congolese weerstand tegen Belgisch Afrika? De Koloniale Hogeschool van Antwerpen (1920-1960)
TENTOONSTELLING
Over de kunstenaars
Interviews met de kunstenaars
Nabeschouwing
Over de auteurs
Colofon
=520 \\$aOuvrage compagnant de l'exposition CONGOVILLE, Musée de Middelheim, mai 2021 - octobre 2021
Un siècle après la fondation de l’École coloniale supérieure à Anvers, le musée voisin du Middelheim invite la chercheuse et curatrice Sandrine Colard à créer une exposition qui interroge les histoires silencieuses du colonialisme à la lumière du site. Le mot Congoville désigne les traces visibles et invisibles de la colonie, non pas sur le continent africain, mais au cœur de la Belgique actuelle : un bâtiment scolaire, un parc, des mythes impérialistes et des citoyens d’origine africaine. À travers l’exposition et la publication qui l’accompagne, le concept devient pour 15 artistes contemporains prétexte à explorer en tant que « flâneurs » noirs la ville postcoloniale, à questionner le passé colonial et son impact.
Par sa diversité de perspectives et de voix, ce livre est aussi un catalogue et un ouvrage de référence réunissant des articles tant académiques qu’artistiques. Ensemble, les artistes et les auteurs impliqués déplient la carte de Congoville, une ville imaginaire qui nous tient encore sous sa coupe à notre insu, mais nous encourage aussi à imaginer une utopie décoloniale.
Een eeuw na de oprichting van de École Coloniale Supérieure in Antwerpen nodigt het naburige Middelheimmuseum onderzoeker en curator Sandrine Colard uit om een tentoonstelling te creëren die sitespecifiek peilt naar de stille geschiedenissen van het kolonialisme. Congoville duidt op de zichtbare en onzichtbare stedelijke sporen van de kolonie, niet op het Afrikaanse continent, maar pal in het België van vandaag: een schoolgebouw, een park, imperialistische mythes en burgers van Afrikaanse origine. Doorheen de tentoonstelling en deze bijhorende publicatie is Congoville de context waarbinnen 15 hedendaagse kunstenaars, als zwarte flâneurs op pad in een postkoloniale stad, het koloniale verleden en de impact ervan adresseren.
Door de veelheid aan perspectieven en stemmen is dit boek tegelijk een catalogus en een naslagwerk met zowel academische als artistieke bijdragen. Samen ontvouwen de betrokken kunstenaars en auteurs de blauwdruk van Congoville, een imaginaire stad die ons nog steeds onbewust in haar greep houdt, maar ons ook aanspoort om na te denken over een de-koloniaal utopia.
Avec des contributions de/Met bijdragen van: Pieter Boons, Sandrine Colard, Filip De Boeck, Bas De Roo, Nadia Yala Kisukidi, Sorana Munsya & Léonard Pongo, Herman Van Goethem, Sara Weyns, Nabilla Ait Daoud
Artistes participants/Deelnemende kunstenaars: Sammy Baloji, Bodys Isek Kingelez, Maurice Mbikayi, Jean Katambayi, KinAct Collective, Simone Leigh, Hank Willis Thomas, Zahia Rahmani, Ibrahim Mahama, Ângela Ferreira, Kapwani Kiwanga, Sven Augustijnen, Pascale Marthine Tayou, Elisabetta Benassi, Pélagie Gbaguidi
Pour plus d'informations, consultez le site www.middelheimmuseum.be/nl/activiteit/congoville
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aContemporary Art =653 \\$aSculpture =653 \\$aMiddelheim Museum =653 \\$aDecoloniality =653 \\$aImaging =653 \\$aColonial History =653 \\$aAugmented History =653 \\$aAntwerp =653 \\$aColonial College =653 \\$aPostcoloniality =653 \\$aAnthropology =653 \\$aArt History =653 \\$aBelgian Congo =653 \\$aDemocratic Republic of Congo =653 \\$aAfrica =653 \\$aBelgium =653 \\$aArchive =700 1\$aBoons, Pieter,$eeditor. =700 1\$aColard, Sandrine,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663955$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/309383/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 06455nam 22007092 4500 =001 a49c47a2-e7cc-47bd-add5-0c9ce5a53f88 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702523$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663573$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663580$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663573$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aAJ$2bicssc =072 7$aJFFN$2bicssc =072 7$aHBJK$2bicssc =072 7$aAJCR$2bicssc =072 7$aAJB$2bicssc =072 7$aPHO010000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015020$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHO011000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHO011020$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHO023120$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHO023100$2bisacsh =072 7$aAJ$2thema =072 7$aJBFH$2thema =072 7$aNHK$2thema =072 7$aAJF$2thema =245 00$aContact Zones :$bPhotography, Migration, and Cultural Encounters in the United States /$cedited by Justin Carville, Sigrid Lien. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (360 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgments
INTRODUCTION
Contact Zones: Photography, Migration, and the United States
Justin Carville and Sigrid Lien
PHOTOGR APHIES, REPRESENTATIONS, AND MIGRATIONS
The Figure of Migration
David Bate
VERNACULAR PHOTOGR APHIES AND MIGR ATION
From Cavan to Kansas: A Photographic Album of Family Migration from Ireland to North America
Orla Fitzpatrick
A Letter from Pat in America: Photo-remittances and the Irish American Diaspora
Justin Carville
DIASPORIC IMAGINATIONS
“First Pictures”: New York through the Lens of Emigrated European Photographers in the 1930s and 1940s
Helene Roth
Migrating Images of War and Dislocation: From War Zone to Contact Zone and from Photography to Photomontage
Aleksandra Idzior
Far from Home: Winston Vargas in Washington Heights
Leslie Ureña
EXHIBITING MIGRATIONS
A Box, a Suitcase, a Museum Photographic Records of Croatian Immigrants to the United States
Sandra Križić Roban
What Moves You? Georges Didi-Huberman’s Arts of Passage and Pittsburgh Stories of Migration
Alexandra Irimia
DOCUMENTING MIGRATIONS
Searching for Oleana: Contemporary Photographic Negotiations of Migration and Settler-Colonial Tropes
Sigrid Lien
The Photographer as Advocate: Representing Migrant Communities in San Francisco and Tijuana
Bridget Gilman
Witnessing the Trauma of Undocumented Migrants in Mexico
Sarah Bassnett
There Was no Record of Her Smile: Muriel Hasbun’s X post facto Erina Duganne
Contributors
Gallery with Color Plates
The role of photography in U.S. migrant histories
Since the mid-nineteenth century photography has played a central role in cultural encounters within and between migrant communities in the United States. Migrant histories have been mediated through the photographic image, and the cultural practices of photography have themselves been transformed as migrant communities mobilise the photographic image to navigate experiences of cultural dislocation and the forging of new identities. Exploring photographic images and the cultural practices of photography as ‘contact zones’ through which cultural exchange and transformation takes place, this volume addresses the role of photography in migrant histories in the United States from the mid-nineteenth century to today. Taking as its focal point photography’s role in shaping migrant experiences of cultural transformation, and how migrant experiences have re-configured culturally differentiated practices of photography, case studies on migration from Europe, Central America, and North America position photography as entwined with cultural histories of migration and cultural transformation in the United States.
Contributors: Sarah Bassnett (Western University), David Bate (University of Westminster), Justin Carville (Institute of Art, Design & Technology, Dun Laoghaire), Erina Duganne (Texas State University), Orla Fitzpatrick (National Museum of Ireland), Bridget Gilman (Independent Scholar), Aleksandra Idzior (University of Fraser Valley), Alexandra Irimia (University of Western Ontario), Sandra Križić Roban (Institute of Art History, Zagreb), Sigrid Lien (University of Bergen), Helene Roth (Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität Munich), Leslie Ureña (Smithsonian National Portrait Gallery)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
INTRODUCTION. THE PAST AND FUTURE OF POSTWAR HOUSING ESTATES: FACTS, HERITAGE, PROJECT
Andrea Migotto and Martino Tattara
PART 1. THE MODERN HOUSING PROJECT IS A SOCIAL PROJECT: A CRITICAL READING
CHAPTER 1. SOCIAL HOUSING AND THE REGIMES OF TIME: A FEW MOMENTS WITHIN THE LONG LINES OF (SOCIAL) HOUSING IN VIENNA AND AUSTRIA
Michael Klein
CHAPTER 2. TOO BIG? DEBUNKING SCALE MYTHS WITH THE LONDON COUNTY COUNCIL ARCHITECT’S DEPARTMENT
Jesse Honsa
CHAPTER 3. A SOCIAL CRITIQUE OF THE LARGE-SCALE MODERN HOUSING PROJECT
Martino Tattara
PART 2. INTERPRETATIONS OF THE ‘UNBUILT’ SPACE: FORMS, CATEGORIES, AND TERMS
CHAPTER 4. BELOW THE SHADOWS
Federico Coricelli and Nicola Russi
CHAPTER 5. THE COMMON SPACE PROJECT: THE CASE OF LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBOURHOOD UNITS
Umberto Bonomo
PART 3. AGENTS MEAN HISTORIES: ACCOUNTING FOR MULTIPLE EXPERIENCES AND AGENCIES IN POSTWAR HOUSING ESTATES
CHAPTER 6. LIVING TOGETHER: (THE MULTIPLE) ‘STORIES’ OF AN ORDINARY HOUSING DEVELOPMENT IN POST-WWII TURIN
Gaia Caramellino
CHAPTER 7. GOSSIP AND COMPLAINT: WAYS OF (RE-)PRODUCING THE SOCIAL IN HOUSING ‘EXPERTLY’
Heidi Svenningsen Kajita
PART 4. CULTURES OF TRANSFORMATION
CHAPTER 8. HOUSING COMPLEXES IN BRAZIL: A MODERNIST HERITAGE
Flávia Brito do Nascimento
CHAPTER 9. MODERNISM IS DEAD, LONG LIVE MODERNITY: THE BIJLMER AND THE PROJECT OF ‘INCOMPLETENESS’
Andrea Migotto
ABOUT THE AUTHORS
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aNew insights on the controversial and often-overlooked postwar large-scale housing estates.
In the light of the current housing and environmental crisis and increasing social inequalities, there is a growing sense of urgency for architecture as a discipline to engage with the transformation in housing evident in the postwar period. Rather than conceiving this task as a technical matter, this book proposes to reassess the conditions and legacy of this large and ubiquitous housing stock. By foregrounding the mismatch between constructed cultural, social and ideological narratives and the everyday realities of residents, the contributors rediscover some of the tropes of modern housing, such as the impact of technological innovations or the often overlooked character of open spaces, and unveil the intellectual and practical tools that paved the way for this large-scale construction.
Contested Legacies advances a new notion of heritage which, rather than seeking to preserve the past, sets outs to actively transform what exists to meet current societal needs. It offers an ‘atlas’ of exemplary cases, each illustrating a defining yet often neglected aspect of modern postwar housing, from which present engagement and active reflection can grow, making the book an appealing read for both scholars and housing practitioners worldwide.
Contributors: Umberto Bonomo (Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile), Flávia Brito do Nascimento (Universidade de São Paulo), Gaia Caramellino (Politecnico di Milano), Federico Coricelli (Politecnico di Torino), Jesse Honsa (KU Leuven), Heidi Svenningsen Kajita (University of Copenhagen), Michael Klein (TU Wien), Andrea Migotto (KU Leuven), Nicola Russi (Politecnico di Torino), Martino Tattara (KU Leuven)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
DANKWOORD
VOORWOORD
AGENDA
Uitdagingen voor een nieuwe universiteit
De derde stichter
De traditie als fundament
De problemen van de dag
'De moeilijkste hypothese'
Leidraad
HOMO NOVUS
Een portret van Pieter de Somer
1. NOCH PRINS NOCH KERK
De strijd om de zelfstandigheid
'Leuven Vlaams'
Geen kerkelijke universiteit
De letter van de wet
Voor een ander beleid
Nieuwe verbanden
2. STRUCTUREN
De organisatie van de geleerde wereld
Een voortvarende start
De macht van academici
'Malaise'
Renovatie in stijl
Principes
3. STUDENTENPOLITIEK
Contestatie en participatie
'Jonge karavanen'
Het rode Leuven
Kentering
Verambtelijking
De karavanen voorbij
4. DE STAND DER PROFESSOREN
Leven in een andere tijd
Vijf generaties
Kolonialen en kanunniken
Pioniers en pragmatici
Bedreigingen
Een open wereld
5. MODELLEN
De overdracht van kennis
Een Gesamthochschule?
Afslanken
Stroomlijnen
Verder leren, levenslang leren
Triomf van de didactiek
DE REDENAAR
Een portret van Roger Dillemans
6. ROEPING EN BEROEP
Over engagement, ethos en zingeving
Signatuur
Inzet in verandering
Een missie
Waarden en wetenschap
Een bijzondere glans
7. WERELDSE ZAKEN
De dienst aan de maatschappij
In de openbaarheid
Genezen en helen
Academische steunpunten
Contractresearch, octrooien en spin-offs
8. HET GESLACHT VAN DE UNIVERSITEIT
Vervrouwelijking als discussie
Een vrijer levenswijze?
Bedachtzaamheid
Vrouwelijke kracht
Vele agenda's
9. DE STAND DER STUDENTEN
Van Leuven naar Barcelona
Iedereen student
Klasse en stijl
In beweging
Privatisering
10. GEOGRAFIE
De gebouwde universiteit
Drie kernen
Planning
De architecten van de nieuwbouw
Het prestige van restauraties
SELF MADE
Een portret van André Oosterlinck
11. RICHTEN
De bureaucratisering van onderzoek en onderwijs
Een studiebureau
Coördineren
Rationaliseren
Kwaliteit als beleid
De strijd tegen de Moloch
12. SPECIALISATIE
Disciplines zonder centrum
Big Science
In de frontlijn
Andere wetenschap
Als neven en nichten
Gesprekken
13. DE 'MIDDENSTAND'
Blauwe en witte jassen
Het residu van het verleden
Pluriformiteit
Opwaarts
Groepsbelangen
'De stervende zwaan'
14. SLAGKRACHT
Inkomsten, uitgaven en verdeelsleutels
Evenwaardigheid
Besparingen
Vlaams geld
Een wervelwind
Een scheve verhouding
15. MISE-EN-SCàˆNE
Het zelfbeeld van een instelling
Herdenken
Academische rituelen
Erfgoed en cultuur
Imagovorming
De verruimde gemeenschap
BALANS
De togati van de toekomst
Jaren van geestdrift
Jaren van ontnuchtering
Jaren van inkeer en verzekering
Een wijder horizon
BRONNEN EN LITERATUUR
Voor kennis van zaken
Archivalia
Beelden en interviews
Gepubliceerde bronnen
Literatuur
HERKOMST VAN DE ILLUSTRATIES
REGISTER VAN PERSOONSNAMEN
VERANTWOORDING
'De stad op de berg is een leesbaar en lezenswaardig boek, (...) eigenlijk een bijou van een boek.' Willem Otterspeer, Universiteit Leiden
In dit bekroonde boek ('Provinciale prijs historisch onderzoek 2006', van de provincie Vlaams-Brabant) worden de ontwikkelingen die volgden op de splitsing van de Leuvense tweetalige universiteit, op magistrale wijze in kaart gebracht. In 1968 werd een regime van autoritaire monseigneursen statusgevoelige professoren ten grave gedragen. In de euforie om de autonomie koos de nieuwe, Nederlandstalige universiteit voor de vlucht vooruit. Maar in het midden van de jaren 1970 maakte het revolutionaire elan plaats voor gevoelens van ontnuchtering. Daaraan kwam pas in het midden van de jaren 1980 een einde. De universiteit werd toen als het ware ‘heruitgevonden’. Het onderzoek werd geprofessionaliseerd, het onderwijs verruimd, de contacten met de maatschappij benadrukt. Sindsdien werd de horizon steeds weidser. De stad op de berg vertelt op meeslepende wijze het verhaal van de strijd om zelfstandigheid, van contestatie en verzakelijking, van wetenschap en engagement. Het boek is een absolute aanrader voor iedereen die de Leuvense universiteit en haar gemeenschap van professoren en studenten, maar ook van laboranten, bibliothecarissen en technici beter wil leren.
Voorwoord Olivier LUMINET
Dankwoord
Inleiding Wie zijn wij?
Journalistiek Nina VERHAEGHE en Christian LAPORTE
Politiek Philippe MOUREAUX en Herman VAN ROMPUY
Film Adil EL ARBI en Jan VERHEYEN
Poëzie Dirk VAN BASTELAERE en Laurence VIELLE
Proza Kristien HEMMERECHTS en Vincent ENGEL
Sport Laurence RASE en Jean-Michel SAIVE
Bedrijfswereld Yves NOËL en Christ’l JORIS
Vakbonden Caroline COPERS en Felipe VAN KEIRSBILCK
Religie Brahim LAYTOUSS en Myriam TONUS
BesluitNoten Over de redacteurs
Achttien bekende Belgen bieden een unieke blik op het Belgische collectieve geheugen
Welke gebeurtenissen, plekken en figuren blijven er hangen in het geheugen van achttien prominente Belgen als ze aan hun land denken? Op deze vraag zochten Franstalige en Nederlandstalige academici gedurende enkele jaren een antwoord. Ze organiseerden ontmoetingen met Belgische duo’s uit uiteenlopende maatschappelijke domeinen: de journalisten Nina Verhaeghe en Christian Laporte, de politici Herman Van Rompuy en Philippe Moureaux, de dichters Dirk Van Bastelaere en Laurence Vielle, de regisseurs Jan Verheyen en Adil El Arbi, de schrijvers Kristien Hemmerechts en Vincent Engel, de atleten Laurence Rase en Jean-Michel Saive, de zakenmensen Yves Noël & Christ'l Joris, de syndicalisten Caroline Copers en Felipe Van Keirsbilck, en de imam en islamleraar Brahim Laytouss en theologe Myriam Tonus.
Je ontdekt in deze unieke dialogen hoe er tijdens de ontmoetingen gedeelde herinneringen zijn – zoals de Rode Duivels op het WK in 1986 of de zaak Dutroux – maar ook waar de herinneringen tussen de gesprekspartners sterk uiteenlopen – over de Eerste Wereldoorlog bijvoorbeeld, of over Brussel. De verschillen lopen vaak langs de lijnen van de gemeenschappen van ons land, maar zeker niet altijd. Ook verschillen tussen de maatschappelijke domeinen van de gesprekspartners worden duidelijk. In een uitgebreide conclusie brengen de redacteurs de belangrijkste rode draden en lacunes in de gesprekken samen: wat zit er in het Belgische collectieve geheugen, wat niet en hoe komt dat geheugen naar boven in de gesprekken.
Dialogen over België biedt een unieke blik op België met herkenbare herinneringen en verrassende inzichten voor Belgen en niet-Belgen.
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
De Franstalige versie Dialogues sur la Belgique. Souvenirs, images, questions is beschikbaar bij Presses Universitaires de Louvain (UCLouvain).
"We kennen elkaar te weinig." Herbekijk het interview met Elke Brems over 'Dialogen over België'.
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$aBrems, Elke,$eeditor. =700 1\$aBeyen, Marnix,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000256316392$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-5631-6392 =700 1\$aBazan, Ariane,$eeditor. =700 1\$aLuminet, Olivier,$eeditor. =700 1\$aRosoux, Valérie,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663481$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/288015/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 09296nam 22003852 4500 =001 c5647e33-5ac5-43a7-bbdb-cc601b91c56f =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\dut\d =020 \\$z9789058678805$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664303$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664303$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aAVA$2bicssc =072 7$aMUS041000$2bisacsh =072 7$aAVA$2thema =245 00$aDies irae :$bKroniek van het requiem /$cedited by Pieter Bergé. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (320 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aINHOUD
Voorwoord
Inleiding: het gregoriaanse requiem
Missa Pro Defunctis
De tekst van het requiem: historiek, structuur en betekenis
De muziek van het requiem: historiek, structuur en compositie
I Het requiem tot 1600
Kroniek 1
Johannes Ockeghem
Pierre de la Rue
Antoine Brumel
Jean Richafort
Cristobal de Morales
Orlandus Lassus
II Het requiem van 1600 tot 1900
Kroniek 2
Heinrich Schutz
Jean Gilles
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart
Hector Berlioz
Johannes Brahms
Giuseppe Verdi
Gabriel Faure
III Het requiem na 1900
Kroniek 3
Kurt Weill
Maurice Durufle
Benjamin Britten
Gyorgy Ligeti
Igor Stravinsky
Bernd Alois Zimmermann
Krzysztof Penderecki
Andrew Lloyd Webber
Gavin Bryars
John Tavener
Bibliografie
Discografie
Index
Over de auteurs
DISCOGRAFIE
Gregoriaans requiem
1995; Aurora Surgit o.l.v. Alessio Randon (Naxos)
Johannes Ockeghem
1997; The Clerk's Group o.l.v. Edward Wickham (asv)
Pierre de la Rue
2005; The Clerks' Group o.l.v. Edward Wickham (Gaudeamus)
Antoine Brumel
2005; The Clerks' Group o.l.v. Edward Wickham (Gaudeamus)
Jean Richafort
2002; Huelgas-Ensemble o.l.v. Paul Van Nevel (Harmonia Mundi)
Christóbal de Morales
1992; La Capella Reial de Catalunya en Hespèrion xx o.l.v. Jordi Savall (Astrée)
Orlandus Lassus
1998; The Hilliard Ensemble (ecm)
Heinrich Schütz
2007; La Chapelle Rhénane o.l.v. Benoît Haller (K617)
Jean Gilles
1989; o.l.v. Hervé Niquet, met als uitvoerders Véronique Gens (sopraan), Jean-Paul Fouchecourt (tenor), Hervé Lamy (tenor), Peter Harvey (bas), Jean-Louis Paya (bas) en Le Concert Spirituel (Musidisc France)
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart
2003; o.l.v. Nikolaus Harnoncourt, met als uitvoerders Christine Schäfer (sopraan), Bernarda Fink (alt), Kurt Streit (tenor), Gerald Finley (bas), het Arnold Schönberg Chor, en het Concentus Musicus Wien (Deutsche Harmonia Mundi)
Hector Berlioz
1970; o.l.v. Sir Colin Davis, met als uitvoerders Ronald Dowd (tenor), Wandsworth School Boys' Choir, London Symphony Orchestra and Chorus (Universal International Music, remastered quadro recording, 2008)
Johannes Brahms
1996; o.l.v. Philippe Herreweghe, met als uitvoerders Christiane Oelze (sopraan), Gerald Finley (bariton), La Chapelle Royale, Collegium Vocale Gent, en het Orchestre des Champs-Elysées (Harmonia Mundi)
Giuseppe Verdi
2001; o.l.v. Claudio Abbado, met als uitvoerders Angela Gheorghiu (sopraan), Daniela Barcellona (mezzo), Roberto Alagna (tenor), Julian Konstantinov, het Swedish Radio Chorus, het Eric Ericson Chamber Choir, Orfeón Donostiarra en de Berliner Philharmoniker (emi)
Gabriel Fauré
1988; o.l.v. Philippe Herreweghe, met als uitvoerders Agnès Mellon (sopraan), Peter Kooy (bariton), Les Petits Chanteurs de Saint-Louis, en het Ensemble Musique Oblique (Harmonia Mundi)
Kurt Weill
1992; o.l.v. Philippe Herreweghe, met als uitvoerders Alexandre Laiter (tenor), Peter Kooy (bas), het koor van de Chapelle Royale, en het Ensemble Musique Oblique (Harmonia Mundi)
Maurice Duruflé
1999; o.l.v. Michel Plasson, met als uitvoerders Anne Sofie von Otter (mezzosopraan), Thomas Hampson (bariton), Marie-Claire Alain (orgel), Orfeón Donostiarra en het Orchestre du Capitole de Toulouse (emi)
Benjamin Britten
1963; o.l.v. Benjamin Britten, met als uitvoerders Galina Vishnevskaya (sopraan), Peter Pears (tenor), Dietrich Fischer-Dieskau (bariton), The Bach Choir, het London Symphony Orchestra Chorus, het Highgate School Choir, het Melos Ensemble en het London Symphony Orchestra (decca)
György Ligeti
1968; o.l.v. Michael Gielen, met als uitvoerders Liliana Poli (sopraan), Barbro Ericson mezzosopraan), het Chor des Bayerischen Rundfunks en het Sinfonie-Orchester des Hessischen Rundfunks Frankfurt (Wergo)
Igor Stravinsky
1994; o.l.v. Neeme Järvi, met als uitvoerders Irene Friedli (alt), Michel Brodard (bas), Choeur Pro Arte de Lausanne, Choeur de Chambre Romand en het Orchestre de la Suisse Romande (Chandos)
Bernd Alois Zimmermann
1986; o.l.v. Gary Bertini, met als uitvoerders Phyllis Bryn-Julson (sopraan), Roland Hermann (bariton), Hans Franzen en Lutz Lansemann (sprekers), het Manfred-Schoof-Quintett, het Kölner Rundfunkchor, het Chor des Norddeutschen Rundfunks, het Wiener Rundfunkchor, en het Kölner Rundfunk-Sinfonie-Orchester (Wergo)
Krzysztof Penderecki
1995; o.l.v. Krzysztof Penderecki met als uitvoerders Jadwiga Gadulanka (sopraan), Jadwiga Rappé (mezzosopraan), Zachos Terzakis (tenor), Piotr Nowacki (bas), en het Royal Stockholm Philharmonic Chorus and Orchestra (Chandos)
Andrew Lloyd Webber
1985; o.l.v. Lorin Maazel, met als uitvoerders Placido Domingo (tenor), Sarah Brightman (sopraan), Paul Miles-Kingston (knapenstem), het Winchester Cathedral Choir en het English Chamber Orchestra (emi)
Gavin Bryars
(herwerkte versie) 1998; met het Hilliard Ensemble en Fretwork als uitvoerders (Point Music)
John Tavener
2007; o.l.v. Vasily Petrenko, met als uitvoerders Elin Manahan Thomas (sopraan), Andrew Kennedy (tenor), Josephine Knight (cello) en het Royal Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra and Choir (emi)
Muziekhistorisch overzicht van belangrijke componisten en hun dodenmissen
Het requiem (of de dodenmis) is een van de oudste en langst overlevende genres uit de westerse muziekgeschiedenis. Honderden jaren heeft het enkel bestaan in zijn oorspronkelijke gregoriaanse gedaante, maar vanaf ca. 1450 hebben heel wat grote componisten zich laten inspireren tot het schrijven van magistrale nieuwe dodenmissen. Dies Irae laat de lezer op toegankelijke wijze kennismaken met deze meesterwerken zonder dat muzikale voorkennis vereist is.
Na een inleiding over de betekenis en structuur van de tekst en muziek van de aloude Latijnse dodenmis, volgt een kroniek in drie delen die de lezer door de geschiedenis van het requiem gidst. In aparte hoofdstukken komen alle grote en bekende requiems aan bod (onder meer van Mozart, Brahms, Verdi, Fauré, Britten en Webber), evenals enkele minder populaire maar minstens even aangrijpende werken (zoals de requiems van Ockeghem, Schütz, Weill, Ligeti, Stravinsky en Zimmermann).
Elk requiem wordt volgens een vast stramien besproken, zodat de lezer vrijelijk kan grasduinen door verschillende perioden en composities: eerst wordt ieder werk muziekhistorisch gesitueerd, daarna volgt een korte bespreking van elk deel afzonderlijk. Door de besprekingen te koppelen aan één referentieopname per werk, kan de lezer de uitleg meteen ook aan de luisterpraktijk toetsen.
Onder de leiding van Pieter Bergé, en met medewerking van Jan Christiaens werden alle bijdragen aan 'Dies Irae. Kroniek van het requiem' geschreven door auteurs die als docent, onderzoeker of alumnus verbonden zijn aan de onderzoekseenheid Musicologie van de KU Leuven.
Introducing the Sagalassos Archaeological Research Project
Jeroen Poblome
How do we document ancient urban stratigraphy?
Sam Cleymans
How do we document architecture in classical archaeological practice?
Ebru Torun, Göze Üner and Özge Başağaç
How do we document ancient ceramic material culture?
Philip Bes and Rinse Willet
How do we document ancient coinage?
Fran Stroobants
How do we document time?
Jeroen Poblome
How do we document the beginning of Sagalassos?
Dries Daems
How we document ancient (suburban) life and death?
Johan Claeys
How do we document a concept? Social memory in antiquity
Bas Beaujean
How do we document ancient religion?
Peter Talloen
How do we document the past countryside?
Ralf Vandam
How do we document the past natural environment?
Patrick T. Willett
Illustration credits
About the authors
The methods, concepts and practices of KU Leuven’s Sagalassos Archaeological Research Project.
Sagalassos speaks to the imagination in more ways than one. The authentic and natural beauty of the site no doubt plays a role in that. The Sagalassos Project testifies to the fact that its core business, archaeology, also appeals to the imagination. Learning about the past is fascinating, for young and old alike. Curiosity unquestionably plays a role in this. Archaeologists, as any other scientist, are driven to really know about past human activities. As they leave no stone unturned in their endeavours, archaeologists also stimulate the curiosity of society. The public at large is not only interested in the results per se, but also wants to understand how knowledge about the past comes about. This volume gives the word to the archaeologists and other scientists of the Sagalassos Archaeological Research Project. They explain their ways, methods and concepts as they reconstruct and interpret the past of the archaeological site of Sagalassos and the surrounding study region.
By bringing testimony to the broader discipline of archaeology, this book deserves to be read by scholars and students with an open interest in classical archaeology who wish to (re)discover some of the basics of the science and process. It will also be of interest to professionals involved with archaeologists and the wider interested public.
Contributors: Sam Cleymans (Gallo-Roman Museum Tongeren), Ebru Torun, Göze Üner and Özge Başağaç (independent architects), Rinse Willet (Radboud University) and Philip Bes (Österreichisches Archäologisches Institut), Fran Stroobants (Royal Library of Belgium), Dries Daems (KU Leuven) Johan Claeys (KU Leuven), Bas Beaujean (KU Leuven), Peter Talloen (Bilkent University), Ralf Vandam (Vrije Universiteit Brussel ), Patrick Willett (ARIT).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aClassical Archaeology =653 \\$aSagalassos =653 \\$aarchaeological method =653 \\$aarchaeological (documentation) procedures =653 \\$aregional archaeology =700 1\$aPoblome, Jeroen,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000274031921$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-7403-1921 =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665256$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/332734/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04591nam 22004092 4500 =001 ea908085-8314-47e7-a54d-41265ce9c144 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20162016\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462700598$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461661951$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/EPE_AMP$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHPC$2bicssc =072 7$aPHI009000$2bisacsh =072 7$aQDH$2thema =100 1\$aTrabattoni, Franco,$eauthor. =245 10$aEssays on Plato’s Epistemology /$cFranco Trabattoni. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2016. =264 \4$c©2016 =300 \\$a1 online resource (336 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aAncient and Medieval Philosophy - Series 1 ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroduction
Chapter 1. Thought as Inner Dialogue (Theaet. 189e4-190a6)
Chapter 2. Logos and doxa: The Meaning of the Refutation of the Third Definition of Epistêmê in the Theaetetus
Chapter 3. Theaetetus 200d-201c: Truth without Certainty
Chapter 4. Foundationalism or Coherentism? On the Third Definition of Epistêmê in the Theaetetus
Chapter 5. What is the Meaning of Plato's Theaetetus? Sοme Remarks on a New Annotated Translation of the Dialogue
Chapter 6. David Sedley's Theaetetus
Chapter 7. The “Virtuous Circle” of Language. On the meaning of Plato's Cratylus
Chapter 8. The Knowledge of the Philosopher
Chapter 9. What Role do the Mathematical Sciences Play in the Metaphor of the Line?
Chapter 10. Socrates' error in the Parmenides
Chapter 11. On the Distinguishing Features of Plato's “Metaphysics” (Starting from the Parmenides)
Chapter 12. Is There Such a Thing as a “Platonic theory of the Ideas” According to Aristotle?
Chapter 13. The Unity of Virtue, Self-Predication and the “Third Man” in Protagoras 329e-332a
Chapter 14. Plato: Philosophy, Politics and Knowledge. An Overview
Bibliography
An Innovating approach to Plato’s philosophy.
Through a careful survey of several significant Platonic texts, mainly focussing on the nature of knowledge, Essays on Plato’s Epistemology offers the reader a fresh and promising approach to Plato’s philosophy as a whole. From the very earliest reception of Plato’s philosophy, there has been a conflict between a dogmatic and a sceptical interpretation of his work and thought. Moreover, the two sides are often associated, respectively, with a metaphysical and an anti-metaphysical approach. This book, continuing a line of thought that is nowadays strongly present in the secondary literature – and also followed by the author in over thirty years of research –, maintains that a third way of thinking is required. Against the widespread view that an anti-dogmatic philosophy must go together with an anti-metaphysical stance, Trabattoni shows that for Plato, on the contrary, a sober and reasonable assessment of both the powers and limits of human reason relies on a proper metaphysical outlook.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
PRELIMINARY TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Public Administration and Futures
3. Public Administration and Disciplines
4. Public Administration and Cultures
5. Public Administration and Practices
6. Country chapters: Public Administration Perspectives
6.1. Estonia
6.2. France
6.3. Germany
6.4. Hungary
6.5. Italy
6.6. Netherlands
6.7. Norway
6.8. Portugal
6.9. Spain
7. What’s Next?
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aStrategies and priorities for the public sector in Europe
The public sector in our society has over the past two decades undergone substantial changes, as has the academic field studying Public Administration (PA). In the next twenty years major shifts are further expected to occur in the way futures are anticipated and different cultures are integrated. Practice will be handled in a relevant way, and more disciplines will be engaging in the field of Public Administration.
The prominent scholars contributing to this book put forward research strategies and focus on priorities in the field of Public Administration. The volume will also give guidance on how to redesign teaching programmes in the field. This book will provide useful insights to compare and contrast European PA with PA in Europe, and with developments in other parts of the world.
Contributors: Geert Bouckaert (KU Leuven), Werner Jann (University of Potsdam), Jana Bertels (University of Potsdam), Paul Joyce (University of Birmingham), Meelis Kitsing (Estonian Business School, Tallinn), Thurid Hustedt (Hertie School of Governance, Berlin), Tiina Randma-Liiv (Tallinn University of Technology), Martin Burgi (Ludwig Maximilians University of Munich), Philippe Bezès (Science Po Paris; CNRS), Salvador Parrado (Spanish Distance Learning University (UNED), Madrid), Mark Bovens (Utrecht University; WRR), Roel Jennissen (WRR), Godfried Engbersen (Erasmus University Rotterdam), Meike Bokhorst (WRR), Bogdana Neamtu (Babes Bolyai University, Cluj-Napoca), Christopher Pollitt (KU Leuven), Edoardo Ongaro (Open University UK, Milton Keynes), Raffaella Saporito (Bocconi University, Milan), Per Laegreid (University of Bergen), Philip Marcel Karré (Erasmus University Rotterdam), Thomas Schillemans (Utrecht University), Martijn Van de Steen (Nederlandse School voor Openbaar Bestuur), Zeger van de Wal (National University of Singapore), Michael Bauer (University of Speyer), Stefan Becker (University of Speyer), Jean-Michel Eymeri-Douzans (Université de Toulouse), Filipe Teles (University of Aveiro), Denita Cepiku (Tor Vergata University of Rome), Marco Meneguzzo (Tor Vergata University of Rome), Külli Sarapuu (Tallinn University of Technology), Leno Saarniit (Tallinn University of Technology), Gyorgy Hajnal (Corvinus University of Budapest; Centre for Social Research of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Voorwoord
Democratie
Het project Case4EU
Kijken achter het recht
Dank
Afkortingen
Visie
Mondige EU-burgers
EU-casusonderwijs: Objectief, kritisch en pluralistisch
Leeswijzer
Doelgroep
Ga jij de uitdaging aan?
Structuur
Casusfiches
Masterfiches
Werkvormenfiches
Woordenlijst
Hoe een casus kiezen?
Website
Schoolvriendelijke vertaling van basisteksten
Onderwijsdoelen van Case4EU
Overzichten van casussen
Overzicht per module (basismatrix)
Overzicht per lesthema of trefwoord
Overzicht per leerdomein
CASUSFICHES
Module 1: De interne markt – De EU als een open ruimte zonder binnengrenzen
Casus Schmidberger – Het verhaal van de milieubetogers op de snelweg
Casus TopFit – Het verhaal van de Italiaanse hardloper
Andere casussen in de module Interne markt 71
Module 2: Democratie en rechtsstaat
Casus Puppinck – Het verhaal van het Europees burgerinitiatief met twee miljoen handtekeningen
Andere casussen in de module Democratie en rechtsstaat
Module 3: Grondrechten op gelijke behandeling
Casus Defrenne – Het verhaal van de stewardess
Casus Feryn – Vacatures! Maar niet voor Marokkanen
Andere casussen in de module Gelijkheid
Module 4: Privacy
Casus Google Spanje – Het verhaal van de Spaanse zakenman tegen Google
Andere casussen in de module Privacy
Module 5: Sociale rechten
Casus Fuß – Het verhaal van de brandweerman
Casus Dano – Het verhaal van de sociale uitkeringen
Andere casussen in de module Sociale rechten
Module 6: Consumentenbescherming
Casus Teekanne – Het verhaal van het ‘framboos-vanille avontuur’
Andere casussen in de module Consumentenbescherming
Module 7: Milieu
Casus Craeynest – Het verhaal van de schonere lucht in Brussel
Andere casussen in de module Milieu
Module 8: Migratie, derdelanders en gecontroleerde buitengrenzen
Casus Haqbin – Het verhaal van de jonge Afghaan
Andere casussen in de module Migratie
MASTERFICHES
Masterfiche 1: Het DNA van de EU
Masterfiche 2: EU-regels
Masterfiche 3: Europees burgerschap
Masterfiche 4: Het Hof van Justitie van de Europese Unie
Masterfiche 5: De interne markt – De EU als een open ruimte zonder binnengrenzen
Masterfiche 6: Democratie en rechtsstaat
Masterfiche 7: Gelijkheid en non-discriminatie
Masterfiche 8: Privacy
Masterfiche 9: Sociale rechten
Masterfiche 10: Consumentenbescherming
Masterfiche 11: Milieu
Masterfiche 12: Migratie – Gecontroleerde buitengrenzen
WERKVORMENFICHES
Argumenten ordenen
Argumenten verbinden met het DNA van de EU
Begrippen matchen en toepassen
Borddiscussie (chat talk)
Carrousel (speeddate)
Creatieve opdracht
Debat met jury
Definitiegesprek
Dilemmagesprek
Doceren
Eliminatiespel
Expertgroepen (jigsaw)
Filosofisch (onderzoeks)gesprek
Gestructureerde academische controverse (SAC)
Hoekenwerk
Klasgesprek
Lezen / Luisteren met opdrachten
Lezen van een tekst in een vreemde taal
Link met de leefwereld
Living library
Onderwijsleergesprek
Opzoekwerk
Origami-oefening
Overloopdebat
Perspectiefwisseling
Roezemoesgroepen (of zoemsessie)
Rollenspel (over een EU-casus)
Schaal van rechtvaardigheid
Schrijfopdracht
Simulatie (over een EU-casus)
Stap-vooruit-spel
Stellingenspel
Think – pair – share (denken – delen – uitwisselen)
Verbinden met EU-waarden en -doelstellingen
Waardenschaal
Wat als?
Wat denk jij?
Wat beslis jij als rechter?
What happens next?
Bijlage: Woordenlijst
Auteurs
Illustratieverantwoording
Unieke en innovatieve methode voor vorming tot geïnformeerd en kritisch EU-burgerschap
De impact van de EU op het dagelijkse leven is enorm, maar niet altijd zichtbaar. Jongeren vormen tot geïnformeerde en mondige EU-burgers vraagt actief leren om hen voor te bereiden op maatschappelijke verantwoordelijkheid en democratische inspraak. Dit boek biedt een praktische handleiding voor alle leerkrachten in het secundair onderwijs en docenten in het hoger onderwijs die hun leerlingen en studenten kritisch burgerschap willen bijbrengen binnen verschillende vakken en opleidingen. Concrete casussen op basis van rechtszaken behandeld door het Hof van Justitie van de Europese Unie stimuleren studenten tot kritisch nadenken. De casussen illustreren treffend de impact van de EU in het dagelijkse leven van haar burgers op tal van maatschappelijke domeinen: van de interne markt en het vrije verkeer van goederen en personen, over thema’s als democratie, gelijkheid, privacy, sociale rechten, tot consumentenbescherming, milieu en migratie. Via een ruim aanbod van lesactiviteiten en werkvormen verleent het boek op een laagdrempelige wijze inzicht in het DNA van de EU en EU-burgerschap. Europees burgerschap in de klas is daarom een must-read voor iedereen die zelf Europees burgerschap beter wil begrijpen of jongeren wil stimuleren tot kritische reflectie hierover.
Deze handleiding is ontstaan vanuit het Erasmus+project Case4EU en is geschreven door een multidisciplinair team van auteurs (recht, filosofie, politieke en sociale wetenschappen).
Met bijdragen van Celia Challet (Europacollege), Ellen Claes (KU Leuven), Caranina Colpaert (KU Leuven), Roel De Meu (KU Leuven), Susi Forderer (European University Institute), Griet Galle (KU Leuven), Sacha Garben (Europacollege), Kris Grimonprez (KU Leuven), Koen Lenaerts (KU Leuven), Randy Samyn (KU Leuven), Willem Theus (KU Leuven), Flore Vavourakis (KU Leuven), Piet Van Nuffel (KU Leuven), Kurt Willems (KU Leuven) en de studenten Kobe Adriaens, Arnaud Bouten, Eline D’Joos, Fien Van Reempts (KU Leuven) en Arne Verheyen.
Meer info op www.kuleuven.be/case4EU
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aKU Leuven =536 \\$aCollege of Europe =536 \\$aFonds Lenaerts-Grimonprez =536 \\$aEuropean Union =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aEuropese Unie =653 \\$aOnderwijs =653 \\$aBurgerschap =653 \\$aCasussen =653 \\$aDemocratie =653 \\$aRechten =653 \\$aWaarden =700 1\$aGalle, Griet,$eeditor. =700 1\$aGrimonprez, Kris,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664570$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/307094/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 09755nam 22005172 4500 =001 4784372d-4928-4f2d-b0c6-6c2b71944bf3 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702783$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663900$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663917$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663900$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJFD$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC052000$2bisacsh =072 7$aJBC$2thema =072 7$aJBCT1$2thema =100 1\$aVan Petegem, Wim,$eauthor. =245 10$aEvolving as a Digital Scholar :$bTeaching and Researching in a Digital World /$cWim Van Petegem, JP Bosman, Miné De Klerk, Sonja Strydom. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (180 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgments
Foreword
Why this book?
Where does this book come from?
What to expect in this book?
How to read this book?
1 The Digital Scholar Framework
1.1 The Digital World
1.2 Digital Technologies
1.3 Digital Competences
1.4 The Digital Scholar
1.5 The Digital Scholar Framework
1.5.1 The Digital Scholar as a Human Being
1.5.2 The Digital Scholar as an Academic
1.5.3 The Digital Scholar as a Role Player
1.6 Evolving as a Digital Scholar
1.7 How to understand and use the Digital Scholar framework
References
2 The Digital Scholar as Author : Choices in disseminating scholarly work
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Academic authorship and its relation to the disciplinary field and online
2.1.1 The impact of field, capital and habitus on digital scholarship
2.1.2 Academic identity in a digitised world
2.3 Approaches in conveying scientific ideas to the broader community
2.3.1 Journal Publishing
2.3.2 Critical engagement with your scholarly impact (Self, Team, Society, Global)
2.4 Moving beyond journal publication towards a digital context
2.4.1 The affordances of social media in scientific knowledge dissemination
2.4.2 Social media platforms
2.4.3 Academic social networking
2.4.4 Academic blogging
2.4.5 The digital portfolio: An integrative approach to scientific authorship
2.5 Suggestions for the way forward
2.6 Conclusion
References
3 The Digital Scholar as Storyteller : Using digital audio in teaching, research and social impact
3.1 Introduction
3.2 The power of the human voice, audio and the telling of stories
3.3 Using audio in Teaching and Learning
3.3.1 Creating audio teaching resources
3.3.2 Using recorded audio feedback in assessment for and of student learning
3.3.3 Creating Digital Stories for student engagement and reflection
3.4. Research and social impact perspectives on storytelling
3.5 How to record, edit and publish good audio
3.6 Suggested way forward
3.7 Final thoughts on audio and stories
References
4 The Digital Scholar as Creator : Integrating digital media design with scholarly practice
4.1 Introduction
4.2 ‘Creation’ in practice
4.3 A three–tiered approach to digital media creation
4.3.1 Planning of content
4.3.2 Choice of ICT and digital media genre
4.3.3 Process of design
4.4 The way forward
4.5 Conclusion
References
5 The Digital Scholar as Integrator : Why, how and where to bring your teaching, research and social impact to life
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Why or to what end do we integrate?
5.2.1 Integrate towards powerful cumulative knowledge-building
5.2.2 Integrate with the aim of digital access for all – Universal Design for Learning
5.2.3 Be open to being open
5.2.4 Always be critical – as a good scholar should
5.3 How do we integrate? Theory-informed practices around Integration
5.3.1 Integrate with a plan – Curriculum and pedagogical design strategies, frameworks and planners
5.3.2 Making cognitively pleasing and persuasive multimedia resources
5.3.3 Teaching collaboratively online (in emergencies) – some pointers
5.4. “Where” to integrate?
5.5 Suggested way forward
5.6 Some final integratory remarks
References
6 The Digital Scholar as Networker : Re-thinking why and how we ‘network’
6.1 Introduction: Considering networking and social networks
6.2 A shift in thinking about networking
6.2.1 Networking for scholarship
6.2.2 Networking for teaching
6.2.3 Networking for service
6.3. Suggestions for next steps
6.4 Conclusion
References
7 Professional Development Approaches for Digital Scholars : Taking ownership of your professional learning
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Continuous professional development
7.2.1 Digital knowledge: Digital tools and their affordances
7.2.2 Pedagogical knowledge: Pedagogical approaches associated with digital technologies
7.2.3 Vehicle for further knowledge development: Exploring different avenues for learning
7.3 Aspects associated with digital technology use
7.3.1 Human factors related to continuous professional development choices
7.3.2 Human action and digital technology
7.3.3 Knowledge application: Translating learning into practice
7.4 Suggested way forward
7.5 Conclusion
References
8 The Future Digital Scholar
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Be agile
8.2.1 Agile methods
8.2.2 Agile methods for a digital scholar: Focusing on instructional design
8.3 Watch the trends
8.3.1 Gartner hype cycle
8.3.2 EDUCAUSE Horizon Report
8.3.3 Innovating Pedagogy
8.4 Engage in action research
8.5 Lead the change
8.6 In sum: Go DIGITAL
References
Notes
About the authors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aHow to become digitally proficient as a teacher and researcher
What does it take to become a digitally agile scholar? This manual explains how academics can comfortably navigate the digital world of today and tomorrow. It foregrounds three key domains of digital agility: getting involved in research, education and (community) service, mobilising (digital) skills on various levels, and acting in multiple roles, both individually and interlinked with others.
After an introduction that outlines the foundations of the three-dimensional framework, the chapters focus on different roles and skills associated with evolving as a digital scholar. There is the author, who writes highly specialised texts for expert peers; the storyteller, who crafts accessible narratives to a broader audience in the form of blogs or podcasts; the creator, who uses graphics, audio, and video to motivate audiences to delve deeper into the material; the integrator, who develops and curates multimedia artefacts, disseminating them through channels such as websites, webinars, and open source repositories; and finally the networker, who actively triggers interaction via social media applications and online learning communities. Additionally, the final chapters offer a blueprint for the future digital scholar as a professional learner and as a “change agent” who is open to and actively pursues innovation.
Informed by the authors’ broad and diverse personal experience, Evolving as a Digital Scholar offers insight, inspiration, and practical advice. It equips a broad readership with the skills and the mindset to harness new digital developments and navigate the ever-evolving digital age. It will inspire academic teachers and researchers with different backgrounds and levels of knowledge that wish to enhance their digital academic profile.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Listen to an interview with Wim Van Petegem at New Books Network: https://newbooksnetwork.com/evolving-as-a-digital-scholar
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aDigital agile scholar =653 \\$aDigital scholar framework =653 \\$aDigital identity =653 \\$aProfessional academic development =653 \\$aChange agent =700 1\$aBosman, JP,$eauthor. =700 1\$aDe Klerk, Miné,$eauthor. =700 1\$aStrydom, Sonja,$eauthor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663900$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/294572/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05829nam 22005652 4500 =001 9456e76c-ae5f-4109-b1c0-b32b997114ee =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20152015\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462700611$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461661883$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461661883$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aAVA$2bicssc =072 7$aMUS041000$2bisacsh =072 7$aAVA$2thema =245 00$aExperimental Affinities in Music /$cedited by Paulo de Assis; contributions by Lydia Goehr, Felix Diergarten, Martin Kirnbauer, Helmut Lachenmann, Mark Lindley, Edward Wickham, Lawrence Kramer, Leon Fleisher, Hermann Danuser, Thomas Christensen, Luk Vaes, Frederic Rzewski. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2015. =264 \4$c©2015 =300 \\$a1 online resource (252 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aOrpheus Institute Series ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroduction Paulo de Assis Chapter One Explosive Experiments and the Fragility of the Experimental Lydia Goehr Chapter Two Omnis ars ex experimentis dependeat: “Experiments” in Fourteenth-Century Musical Thought Felix Diergarten Chapter Three “Vieltönigkeit” instead of Microtonality: The Theory and Practice of Sixteenth- and Seventeenth-Century “Microtonal” Music Martin Kirnbauer Chapter Four Inscriptions: An Interview with Helmut Lachenmann Chapter Five Nuance and Innovation in Part I of the “48” Mark Lindley Chapter Six Tales from Babel: Musical Adventures in the Science of Hearing Edward Wickham
Chapter Seven From Clockwork to Pulsation: Music and Artificial Life in the Eighteenth Century Lawrence Kramer
Chapter Eight The Inner Ear: An Interview with Leon Fleisher
Chapter Nine Execution—Interpretation—Performance: The History of a Terminological Conflict Hermann Danuser Chapter Ten Monumental Theory Thomas Christensen Chapter Eleven Testing Respect(fully): An Interview with Frederic Rzewski Luk Vaes Appendix Notes on Contributors Index
Exploring experimental attitudes in music
Experimental Affinities in Music brings together diverse artistic, musicological, historical, and philosophical essays, enhancing a broad discourse on artistic experimentation, and exploring various experimental attitudes in music composed between the thirteenth and twentieth centuries.
The golden thread running through the different chapters is the quest for inherently experimental musical practices, a quest pursued from interrogating, descriptive, or challenging perspectives, and always in relation to concrete music examples.
Experimental is taken as an adventurous compositional, interpretive, or performative attitude that can cut across different ages and styles. Affinitiessuggest connectors and connections, convergences, contiguities, and adjacencies that are found in and through a diversity of approaches and topics.
The texts share a common genesis: the lectures of the International Orpheus Academies for Music and Theory convened by Luk Vaes (2011) and Paulo de Assis (2012, 2013). The affinities found in this volume include essays by Lydia Goehr, Felix Diergarten, Mark Lindley, Martin Kirnbauer, Edward Wickham, Lawrence Kramer, Hermann Danuser, and Thomas Christensen, as well as interviews with pianist Leon Fleisher, with pianist-composer Frederic Rzewski, and with composer Helmut Lachenmann.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors
Paulo de Assis (Orpheus Institute, Ghent), Thomas Christensen (University of Chicago), Hermann Danuser (Humboldt University), Felix Diergarten (Schola Cantorum Basiliensis), Leon Fleisher (pianist), Lydia Goehr (Columbia University), Martin Kirnbauer (University of Basel), Lawrence Kramer (Fordham University), Helmut Lachenmann (composer), Mark Lindley (University of Hyderabad), Frederic Rzewski (pianist-composer), Luk Vaes (Orpheus Institute, Ghent), Edward Wickham (St Catharine’s College, Cambridge)
Acknowledgements
Exploring the Transnational Neighbourhood: An Introduction Stephan Ehrig, Britta C. Jung and Gad Schaffer
Challenging Accusations of Separatism: Transnational Neighbourhood and Vernacular Cosmopolitanism in Insa Sané’s Comédie urbaine (2006–2017) Christina Horvath
SECTION I VIRTUAL NEIGHBOURHOODS
“We will be ephemeral”: Encounter, Community and Unsettled Cosmopolitanism in Senthuran Varatharajah’s Vor der Zunahme der Zeichen (2016) Maria Roca Lizarazu
All Saints Catholic Church in Williamsburg, Brooklyn, NYC: From Religious Space to Transnational Territory of Multiterritorial Mexican Immigrants Emilio Maceda Rodríguez
Networking and Representing the Transnational Neighbourhood Online: The Linguistic Landscapes of Latin Americans in London’s Seven Sisters Naomi Wells
SECTION II OVERLAPPING NEIGHBOURHOODS
The Translocalisation of Place: Sectarian Neighbourhoods, Boundaries and Transgressive Practices in Anna Burns’ Belfast Anne Fuchs
The Quiet Unification of a Divided City: Jerusalem’s Train-Track Park Gad Schaffer
Ruins and Representation: Remembering Flushing Meadows–Corona Park in Queens, New York City Daniela Bohórquez Sheinin
The Materiality of the Wall(s): Mural Art and Counterspace Appropriation in El Paso’s Chihuahuita and El Segundo Barrio Anna Marta Marini
SECTION III NEGOTIATING STRANGENESS AND MOBILE NEIGHBOURHOODS
Transnational Neighbourhoods in Barbara Honigmann’s Das überirdische Licht (2008) and Chronik meiner Straße (2016) Godela Weiss-Sussex
Territories of Otherness: Genoa’s Prè Neighbourhood as a Deviant Terrain and Exotic Counterspace in Ilja Leonard Pfeijffer’s La Superba (2013) Britta C. Jung
“Your Allah can’t see you here”: Moscow’s Subterranean Spaces and Dissimulated Life in Svetlana Alexievich’s Vremya sekond khend (2013) Emma Crowley
Transnational Neighbourhood and Theatrical Practices: The Concept of Home, Negotiating Strangeness and Familiarity, and the Experience of Migrant Communities in North Essex Mary Mazzilli
About the Authors
Practices of community-building in a globalised context
Urban neighbourhoods have come to occupy the public imagination as a litmus test of migration, with some areas hailed as multicultural success stories while others are framed as ghettos. In an attempt to break down this dichotomy, Exploring the Transnational Neighbourhood filters these debates through the lenses of geography, anthropology, and literary and cultural studies. By establishing the interdisciplinary concept of the 'transnational neighbourhood', it presents these localities – whether Clichy-sous-Bois, Belfast, El Segundo Barrio or Williamsburg – as densely packed contact zones where disparate cultures meet in often highly asymmetrical relations, producing a constantly shifting local and cultural knowledge about identity, belonging, and familiarity.
Exploring the Transnational Neighbourhood offers a pivotal response to one of the key questions of our time: How do people create a sense of community within an exceedingly globalised context? By focusing on the neighbourhood as a central space of transcultural everyday experience within three different levels of discourse (i.e., the virtual, the physical local, and the transnational-global), the multidisciplinary contributions explore bottom-up practices of community-building alongside cultural, social, economic, and historical barriers.
Contributors: Christina Horvath (University of Bath), Maria Roca Lizarazu (NUI Galway), Emilio Maceda Rodriguez (Universidad Autónoma de Tlaxcala), Naomi Wells (IMLR, University of London), Anne Fuchs (University College Dublin), Gad Schaffer (Tel-Hai Academic College), Daniela Bohórquez Sheinin (University of Michigan), Anna Marta Marini (Universidad de Alcalá), Godela Weiss-Sussex (IMLR, University of London), Britta C. Jung (Maynooth University), Emma Crowley (University of Bristol), Mary Mazzilli (University of Essex)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Blog post ‘Exploring the Transnational Neighbourhood’, by Britta C. Jung, Gad Schaffer, Stephan Ehrig, 3 Feb 2023
Algemene inleiding
I. Een polemische geschiedschrijving
II. Verwetenschappelijking
III. Recente evoluties
IV. De ondermijnde Godsvrede
V. Flamenpolitik en activisme
Hoofdstuk 1: Het vooroorlogse spanningsveld
1. Het völkische denken
2. Een “Duits” Antwerpen?
3. Het nieuwe Carthago
4. Het völkische element in de Waalse beweging
5. De ophef rond Pol de Mont
6. Een Nederlands-Belgische Entente?
7. Besluit
Hoofdstuk 2: De godsvrede tot de val van Antwerpen
1. Francofilie en pan-Germanisme?
2. Een vermeend anti-Vlaams artikel
3. De Gentse Godsvrede
4. Besluit
Hoofdstuk 3: Perspolemieken in de nasleep van de val van
een “onneembare” vesting
1. Omtrent de val van Antwerpen
2. De vluchtelingenkwestie als splijtzwam
3. Het Journal des Réfugiés verbreekt de Godsvrede
4. Het beleid van Franck en het verdrag van Kontich
5. Een katholiek volksvertegenwoordiger in het oog van de storm
6. De pers in het bezette land: een schietschijf
7. Vier actoren uit de “anti-Vlaamse campagne” en een dreigement
8. Besluit
Hoofdstuk 4: De Duitse diensten treden in actie
1. De Flamenpolitik
2. De oorsprong van de Duitse voorstelling van zaken
3. De propagandamolen komt op toerental
4. Antwerpen moet kapot!
5. Andere vlugschriften
6. De ontwikkeling van het activisme in het bezette land
7. Omtrent de Duitse pers in bezet België
8. Besluit
Hoofdstuk 5: De waarheid over La Vérité
1. Ontleding van een mysterieus vlugschrift
2. Apocalyps van een nieuw Carthago
3. In het spoor van de Duitse cultuurpolitiek
4. Caveant Consules
5. De mensen achter de schermen
6. Een opmerkelijk stuk van Harry
7. Besluit
Hoofdstuk 6: De top van de ijsberg
1. La Politique Belge après la Crise – Un Parti National
2. Het Appel aux Wallons
3. De koers van De Vlaamsche Stem
4. Een Duits programma voor Nederland
5. De zomer van 1915: een doorbraak
6. De zaak-Buisset: een Duitse tegenzet
7. De Groot-Nederlandse beweging
8. Besluit
Hoofdstuk 7: Radicalisering
1. Demoralisatie en frontbeweging
2. De propaganda intensiveert
3. Een verslag van het Vlaams-Belgisch Verbond
4. De “sublieme deserteurs”
5. De propaganda van de Raad van Vlaanderen
6. Besluit
Slotbeschouwingen
Noten
Bibliografie
1. Dagbladen
2. Opiniërende tijdschriften
3. Aangehaalde bronnen en werken
4. Naslagwerken
5. Repertoria voor verder archiefonderzoek
Personenregister
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aGrensverleggende analyse van Duitse propaganda in België in de beginfase van WOI
Tijdens de Eerste Wereldoorlog probeerde de Duitse bezetter België intern te splijten. Dat gebeurde door het voeren van een Flamenpolitik, een beleid dat erop gericht was de Vlamingen of in elk geval de Vlaamse beweging in het harnas te jagen tegen België. Dat lukte, want een klein deel Vlaamsgezinden, de zogenaamde activisten, collaboreerde inderdaad. Vanaf de nazomer van 1914 zou Berlijn in het bezette land de Vlaamse beweging onophoudelijk bestoken met een grootscheepse mediacampagne. De Duitse diensten, gesteund door hun Oostenrijkse bondgenoten, maakten daarbij vooral gebruik van vlugschriften en de geschreven pers, niet alleen in België maar ook in het neutrale Nederland. In de zomer van 1915 was het activisme een feit: een anti-Belgisch Vlaams-nationalisme, waarvan de gevolgen tot op heden voelbaar zijn, had het daglicht gezien. De propaganda die eraan ten grondslag lag was zó vernuftig en ingenieus dat ze niet alleen tijdgenoten overtuigde, maar zelfs meer dan een eeuw later nog steeds historici misleidt. Het is een mooi staaltje van “fake news” avant la lettre.
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
Deze publicatie is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
List of Figures
List of Tables
Chapter 1. Introduction
Chapter 2. The choice of countries and regions2.1 British Columbia
2.2 Estonia
2.3 Finland
2.4 Flanders
2.5 Massachusetts
Chapter 3. Overview of education systems3.1 British Columbia
Expenditure on education
Approach to special needs students and language minorities
The autonomy and providers of education
3.2 Estonia
Expenditure on education
Approach to special needs students and language minorities
The autonomy and providers of education
3.3 Finland
Expenditure on education
Approach to special needs students and language minorities
The autonomy and providers of education
3.4 Flanders
Expenditure on education
Approach to special needs students and language minorities
Autonomy and providers of education
3.5 Massachusetts
Expenditure on education
Approach to special needs students and language minorities
Autonomy and providers of education
Chapter 4. Funding formulas4.1 British Columbia
Primary schools
An example a primary school budget in the district of Mission Secondary schools
An example of a secondary school budget in the district of Mission Support for special needs students
A case study on special needs funding in the district of Mission A case-study of the funding formula in the district of Mission
Summary of the education funding system in British Columbia and the district of Mission
4.2 Estonia
Primary schools
An example of a primary school budget in Estonia Secondary schools
An example of a secondary school budget in Estonia Special needs schools
An example of a an additional funding calculation for special needs students in Estonia Summary of the Estonian education funding system
4.3 Finland
Primary schools
An example of a primary school in a municipality in Finland Secondary schools
An example of a secondary school in a municipality in Finland Special needs schools
The case of the municipality of Hanko
An example of a school in a municipality in Finland Summary of the Finnish education funding system
4.4 Flanders
Primary schools
An example of a primary school board budget in Flanders Secondary schools
An example of a secondary school board budget in Flanders Special needs education
An example of the budget of a school with special needs students in Flanders Summary of the Flemish education funding system
4.5 Massachusetts
The mechanism behind the formula
The calculation of allocations
An example of a primary school district budget in Massachusetts Required local contribution calculation
Filling the gap with Chapter 70 education aid
An example of a secondary school district budget in Massachusetts Effective funding per student
Funding outside the main formula
Summary of the education funding in Massachusetts
Chapter 5. Conclusions Summary of the funding formulas in the selected regions and countries
Discussion
Appendix
List of primary sources British Columbia
Estonia
Finland
Flanders
Massachusetts
References
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aFunding, efficiency, and equity in education
In OECD countries the average expenditure on primary and secondary education institutions is about 3.5% of GDP. The investment in education has large implications for economic development and the proper functioning of democratic institutions, as well as overall well-being. However, clear consensus and guidance on which system leads to the best educational outcomes is lacking. This volume describes the resource allocation for compulsory and special needs education for a selection of well-performing countries and regions on PISA tests. By studying the funding systems in well-performing countries and regions the authors identify the elements in the respective funding systems that are associated with best outcomes and have the ideal characteristics to pursue particular goals of education systems such as equity and efficiency. The funding methods of primary and secondary education as well as special needs education are covered.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Preface
Francis Alÿs. The Nature of the Game
Gerard-Jan Claes and Stéphane Symons
Interview with Francis Alÿs and Rafael Ortega, Nov. 9, 2022
Gerard-Jan Claes and Stéphane Symons
Children’s Games. A Reflection on the Work of Francis Alÿs
Tim Ingold
Francis Alÿs. Children’s Games
Karen Lang
Not a Playground
Rodrigo Pérez de Arce Antoncic
A Space to Play
Zeynep Kubat
Entering the Game
Virginia Roy
The Right to Play
Juan Martín Pérez Garcia
The Echo of the Children’s Games
Hilde Teerlinck
Curating Connection and Cultural Memory. Reflections on an Encounter with The Nature of the Game at the Venice Biennale in 2022
John Potter
Sharing the Game
Giulio Piovesan
Illustration Credits
Acknowledgements
The first multidisciplinary analysis of one of the most impactful and popular contemporary artworks of recent years.
In 1999, a short video of a solitary boy kicking an empty bottle up a hill in Mexico City became the first instalment of Children’s Games, a series of works by artist Francis Alÿs (b. Antwerp, 1959). The ongoing project, which now numbers around thirty-five works, has gradually given shape to an extensive collection of videos of children at play. For almost twenty-five years, Alÿs and his collaborators Félix Blume, Julien Devaux, and Rafael Ortega have been travelling around the world to document the distinctive ways in which children interact with each other and their physical environment. They have gone from remote villages in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Afghanistan, Venezuela, and Nepal to the mountains of Switzerland and metropoles like Hong Kong and Paris, but have also visited the war-torn city of Mosul in Iraq, the border between Mexico and the United States, and the strait of Gibraltar that divides Africa and Europe. The resulting images are standing proof of the seriousness of play and of children’s stunning powers of resilience in the face of conflict.
This volume provides a multidisciplinary perspective to the many layers of Children’s Games. It includes an interview with Francis Alÿs and Rafael Ortega, a series of essays by well-known scholars and art critics, curatorial statements, and a logbook related to the presentation of Children’s Games at the Venice Biennale of 2022.
Contributors: Francis Alÿs (artist), Gerard-Jan Claes (filmmaker, artistic director of Sabzian), Tim Ingold (anthropologist, University of Aberdeen), Zeynep Kubat (art historian, curator and writer), Karen Lang (art historian, Royal Society of Arts), Rafael Ortega (artist), Rodrigo Perez de Arce (architect, Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile), Juan Martín Pérez García (Network for the Rights of Children in Mexico (REDIM), Giulio Piovesan (journalist and photographer), John Potter (media education, University College London), Virginia Roy (curator at the University Museum of Contemporary Art of the National Autonomous University of Mexico), Stéphane Symons (professor of philosophy, KU Leuven), Hilde Teerlinck (Han Nefkens Foundation /curator of the Belgian Pavilion at the Venice Art Biennale 2022).
Ebook available in Open Access.
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aFrancis Alÿs =653 \\$aContemporary Art =653 \\$aChildren =653 \\$aGames and Play =653 \\$aVideo Art =700 1\$aClaes, Gerard-Jan,$eeditor. =700 1\$aSymons, Stéphane,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000300917815$1https://orcid.org/0000-0003-0091-7815 =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665416$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/334072/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04776nam 22004332 4500 =001 d036e347-97e7-4fdd-b136-f5199f0e038b =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20122012\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789058679123$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461661043$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/GCME_KAD$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHRCC2$2bicssc =072 7$aREL108020$2bisacsh =072 7$aQRM$2thema =072 7$aQRAX$2thema =245 00$aGender and Christianity in Modern Europe :$bBeyond the Feminization Thesis /$cedited by Patrick Pasture, Jan Art. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2012. =264 \4$c©2012 =300 \\$a1 online resource (240 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aKADOC-Studies on Religion, Culture and Society ;$vvol. 2. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aCONTENTS
Patrick Pasture
Beyond the feminization thesis.
Gendering the history of Christianity in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries
Bernhard Schneider
The Catholic poor relief discourse and the feminization of the Caritas in early nineteenth-century Germany
Angela Berlis
Celibate or married priests?
Polemical gender discourse in nineteenth-century Catholicism
Jan Art
The Cult of the Virgin Mary, or the feminization of the male element in the Roman Catholic Church? A psycho-historical hypothesis
Hugh McLeod
The 'Sportsman' and the 'Muscular Christian'.
Rival ideals in nineteenth-century England
Thomas Buerman
Lions and lambs at the same time!
Belgian Zouave stories and examples of religious masculinity
Tine Van Osselaer
'From that moment on, I was a man!'.
Images of the Catholic male in the Sacred Heart devotion
Marit Monteiro
Repertoires of Catholic manliness in the Netherlands (1850-1940).
A case study of the Dutch Dominicans
Marieke Smulders
The boys of Saint Dominic 's.
Catholic boys' culture at a minor seminary in interwar Holland
Marjet Derks
Female soldiers and the battle for God.
Gender ambiguities and a Dutch Catholic conversion movement, 1921-1942
Michael E. O'Sullivan
A feminized Church?
German Catholic women, piety, and domesticity, 1918-1938
Bibliography
Index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aCase studies upon the use of concepts like feminization and masculinization in relation to christianity
Since the 1970s the feminization thesis has become a powerful trope in the rewriting of the social history of Christendom. However, this ‘thesis' has triggered some vehement debates, given that men have continued to dominate the churches, and the churches themselves have reacted to the association of religion and femininity, often formulated by their critics, by explicitly focusing their appeal to men. In this book the authors critically reflect upon the use of concepts like feminization and masculinization in relation to Christianity. By presenting case studies that adopt different gendered approaches with regard to Christian, mainly Catholic discourses and practices, the authors capture multiple ‘feminizations' and ‘masculinizations' in Europe during the 19th and 20th centuries. In particular, it becomes clear that the idea that Christianity took on ‘charicteristically feminine' values and practices cannot withstand the conclusion that what is considered ‘manly' or ‘feminine' depends on time, place, and context, and on the reasons why gendered metaphors are used.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
List of Illustrations List of Tables
Chapter 1 The archaeology and archaeometry of natron glass making R.B. Scott, P. Degryse
Chapter 2 Western Mediterranean sands for ancient glass making D. Brems, P. Degryse
Chapter 3 The Sr-Nd isotopic fi ngerprint of sand raw materials D. Brems, M. Ganio, P. Degryse
Chapter 4 Trace elements in sand raw materials D. Brems, P. Degryse
Chapter 5 The Sources of Natron V. Devulder, P. Degryse
Chapter 6 Primary glass factories around the Mediterranean P. Degryse, M. Ganio, S. Boyen, A. Blomme, B. Scott, D. Brems, M. Carremans, J. Honings, T. Fenn, F. Cattin
Chapter 7 Conclusions P. Degryse Appendix A Sampling locations, elemental compositions of the analysed sand samples as determined by ICP-;OES analysis, LOI results, results of the Sr and Nd isotopic analysis and trace element analysis results.
Appendix B Calculated glass compositions after raising the Na2O levels of the sands to 16.63%, the average Na2O content of Roman natron glass (Foster and Jackson, 2009).
Appendix C Calculated glass compositions after raising the CaO levels of the sands containing insuffi cient lime to 7.48%, the average CaO content of Roman natron glass (Foster and Jackson, 2009).
Appendix D http://ees.kuleuven.be/geology/archaeometry/index.html References
New insights into the trade and processing of mineral raw materials for glass making This book presents a reconstruction of the Hellenistic-Roman glass industry from the point of view of raw material procurement. Within the ERC funded ARCHGLASS project, the authors of this work developed new geochemical techniques to provenance primary glass making. They investigated both production and consumer sites of glass, and identified suitable mineral resources for glass making through geological prospecting. Because the source of the raw materials used in the manufacturing of natron glass can be determined, new insights in the trade of this material are revealed. While eastern Mediterranean glass factories were active throughout the Hellenistic to early Islamic period, western Mediterranean and possibly Italian and North African sources also supplied the Mediterranean world with raw glass in early Roman times. By combining archaeological and scientific data, the authors develop new interdisciplinary techniques for an innovative archaeological interpretation of glass trade in the Hellenistic-Roman world, highlighting the development of glass as an economic material.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors Annelore Blomme (KU Leuven), Sara Boyen (KU Leuven), Dieter Brems (KU Leuven), Florence Cattin (Université de Bourgogne), Mike Carremans (KU Leuven), Veerle Devulder (KU Leuven, UGent), Thomas Fenn (Yale University), Monica Ganio (Northwestern University), Johan Honings (KU Leuven), Rebecca Scott (KU Leuven)
List of Abbreviations Preface Acknowledgments About the Editors
Chapter One. The Handbook and Its Structure 1.1. Introduction to the Handbook 1.2. The Structure of the Handbook
Chapter Two. International, African, and National Higher Education Contexts 2.1. International and African Contexts: UN SDG and AU Agenda 2063 2.2. Higher Education in Ethiopia: Post-1990s Institutional Context 2.3. Conclusions
Chapter Three. Public Administration Education in Ethiopia 3.1. Emperor Haile Selassie’s Regime (1930–1974) 3.2. Derge Regime (1974–1991) 3.3. BA and Postgraduate Curriculum Development and Review: Post-1991 Ethiopia 3.3.1. Curriculum Development and Review Process Guiding Principles 3.3.2. Curriculum Development and Approval Process. 3.3.3. Procedure for Curriculum Modification 3.3.4. The Structure of the Curriculum 3.4. PA Program under the EPRDF Regime 3.4.1. Bachelor of Arts (BA) (1991–2000) 3.4.2. Bachelor of Arts (BA) (2000–2013) 3.4.3. Bachelor (BA) (2013–) 3.5. PA Masters and PhD Programs in Public Universities 3.5.1. Master’s and PhD Programs PA Curricula 3.6. Conclusions
Chapter Four. Public Administration Education Accreditation 4.1. Why Accreditation? 4.2. Elements of Accreditation 4.3. Approaches and Types of PA Program Evaluation 4.3.1. Approaches to PA Program Evaluation 4.3.2. Types of Evaluation: Accreditation versus Audit 4.4. Public Administration Education and Training Program Accreditation Institutions 4.4.1. International Commission on Accreditation of Public Administration Education and Training Programs (ICAPA) 4.4.2. European Association for Public Administration Accreditation (EAPAA) 4.4.3. African Higher Education Quality Assurance and Accreditation (AHEQAA) 4.4.4. National Association of Schools of Public Affairs and Administration (NASPAA) 4.4.5. Other National Experiences: Africa 4.5. The Debate on Public Administration Program Accreditation 4.6. The Costs and Challenges of Accreditation 4.7. Conclusions
Chapter Five. Steps to Ethiopian Public Administration Program Accreditation 5.1. Beyond De Jure Accreditation 5.2. How to Start and Conduct Accreditation? 5.3. PA Program Accreditation Initiative in Ethiopia: Lessons from AAU and AU 5.4. How to Organize the Accreditation 5.5. How to Respond to Recommendations and Use Accreditation as Part of Quality Improvement Strategy? 5.6. The Need for Capacity Building to Improve and Sustain PA Program Quality 5.7. The Need to Establish an Accreditation Unit and a Network of Ethiopian PA Departments within the Ethiopian Public Administration Association (EPAA): The Proposal 5.8. Conclusions
Annexes Annex 1. Three PA Curriculums during the Haile Selassie Regime Annex 2. Three PA Curricula during the Derge Regime Annex 3. Three PA Curricula from 1993 to 2000 Annex 4. BA in Development Administration Curriculum (ESCU), and BA in PA and Development Management Curriculum (AAU) Annex 5. Harmonized BA Curriculum in Public Administration and Development Management Annex 6. BA Curricula Major in Governance and Development Management/Studies, and BA Major in Development Management Annex 7. MA and PhD Curricula Annex 8. International Commission on Accreditation of Public Administration Education and Training (ICAPA) Self-Assessment Guide Document
References Useful Websites
Follow-up to the handbook Public Administration in Ethiopia
Improving, assuring, and maintaining the quality and relevance of education and training in Public Administration has attracted increasing attention among PA scholars and practitioners worldwide.
The Handbook for Ethiopian Public Administration Program Accreditation is a follow-up to the first handbook on Ethiopian Public Administration. The new handbook zooms in on how to improve, assure, and accredit PA education and training programs in Ethiopia. It is consistent with the Pan-Africanism and African Union’s Agenda 2063 and contributes to the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), particularly SDGs 4 and 16.
Together with the handbook Public Administration in Ethiopia (2020), the current follow-up volume is a valuable stepping stone for PA teaching and PA research in Ethiopia and therefore essential reading for students, practitioners, and theorists interested in public administration, public policy, and sustainable development.
Ebook available in Open Access.
=536 \\$aKU Leuven =536 \\$aVLIR-UOS (Belgium) =536 \\$aAmbo University =536 \\$aAddis Ababa University =536 \\$aEthiopian Public Administration Association =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$apublic administration =653 \\$aEthiopia =700 1\$aKebede Debela, Bacha,$eeditor. =700 1\$aBouckaert, Geert,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000202828106$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-0282-8106 =700 1\$aTemesgen Eshetu, Berhanu,$eeditor. =700 1\$aDeyessa Fita, Chala,$eeditor. =700 1\$aMegersa Tola, Hailu,$eeditor. =700 1\$aWorku Angaw, Kiflie,$eeditor. =700 1\$aBerhie Teshome, Shumey,$eeditor. =700 1\$aGebreyohans Gebru, Solomon,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664679$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/319228/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04453nam 22006372 4500 =001 eef7ffee-bb9b-4456-bec4-27a3bbf92265 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20222022\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462703469$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664778$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664785$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664778$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHP$2bicssc =072 7$aHPN$2bicssc =072 7$aHPS$2bicssc =072 7$aJFD$2bicssc =072 7$aPHI000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHI001000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHI016000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHI019000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC052000$2bisacsh =072 7$aQD$2thema =072 7$aQDTN$2thema =072 7$aQDTS$2thema =072 7$aJBCT$2thema =100 1\$aLawtoo, Nidesh,$eauthor.$0(orcid)0000000300833208$1https://orcid.org/0000-0003-0083-3208 =245 10$aHomo Mimeticus :$bA New Theory of Imitation /$cNidesh Lawtoo. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2022. =264 \4$c©2022 =300 \\$a1 online resource (358 pages): $b10 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroduction: Drawing Mimetic Studies
PART 1 — GENEALOGIES: FOUNDATIONS Chapter 1: Birth of Homo Mimeticus Chapter 2: Vita Mimetica in the Cave Chapter 3: Sameness and Difference Replayed
PART 2 — AESTHETICS: CASE STUDIES Chapter 4: The Plasticity of Mimesis Chapter 5: On Animal and Human Mimicry Chapter 6: The Human Chameleon
PART 3 — POLITICS: MIMETIC RE-TURNS Chapter 7: Banality of Evil/Mimetic Complexity Chapter 8: Vibrant Mimesis Chapter 9: The Age of Viral Reproduction
Coda: The Complexity of Mimesis: A Dialogue with Edgar Morin
Notes Bibliography Index
Genealogy of one of the most ancient and
influential concepts in western thought: Mimesis
Imitation is, perhaps more than ever, constitutive of human originality. Many things have changed since the emergence of an original species called Homo sapiens, but in the digital age humans remain mimetic creatures: from the development of consciousness to education, aesthetics to politics, mirror neurons to brain plasticity, digital simulations to emotional contagion, (new) fascist insurrections to viral contagion, we are unconsciously formed, deformed, and transformed by the all too human tendency to imitate—for both good and ill. Crossing disciplines as diverse as philosophy, aesthetics, and politics, Homo Mimeticus proposes a new theory of one of the most influential concepts in western thought (mimesis) to confront some of the hypermimetic challenges of the present and future.
Written in an accessible yet rigorous style, Homo Mimeticus appeals to both a specialized and general readership. It can be used in courses of modern and contemporary philosophy, aesthetics, political theory, literary criticism/theory, media studies, and new mimetic studies.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Watch the recording of the book launch: https://youtu.be/3fRhGvbv0Pg
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aEuropean Research Council =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$amimetic studies =653 \\$aMimesis =653 \\$aintersubjectivity =653 \\$amimetic theory =653 \\$acontagion =653 \\$asimulation =653 \\$acrowd behaviour =653 \\$aidentification =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664778$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/320864/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 06620nam 22006372 4500 =001 5bb30e69-a03e-4c66-b81f-1cad3f290644 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20192019\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462701809$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461662811$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461662828$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461662811$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJFD$2bicssc =072 7$aJFFD$2bicssc =072 7$aJFFN$2bicssc =072 7$aKNT$2bicssc =072 7$aKNTJ$2bicssc =072 7$aLAN008000$2bisacsh =072 7$aBUS070060$2bisacsh =072 7$aLAW032000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC066000$2bisacsh =072 7$aJBCT4$2thema =072 7$aJBFG$2thema =072 7$aJBFH$2thema =072 7$aKNTP2$2thema =245 00$aImages of Immigrants and Refugees in Western Europe :$bMedia Representations, Public Opinion and Refugees’ Experiences /$cedited by Leen d’Haenens, Willem Joris, François Heinderyckx. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2019. =264 \4$c©2019 =300 \\$a1 online resource: $b42 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aChapter 1. Images of Immigrants and Refugees in Western Europe : Media Representations, Public Opinion, and Refugees’ Experiences Leen d’Haenens and Willem Joris
Part I – Policy on migration and integration in Europe
Chapter 2. Migration and integration policy in Europe: Comparing Belgium and Sweden Paul Puschmann, Ebba Sundin, David De Coninck, and Leen d’Haenens
Part II – Media representations
Chapter 3. The Refugee Situation as Portrayed in News Media : A Content Analysis of Belgian and Swedish Newspapers – 2015-2017 Rozane De Cock, Ebba Sundin, and Valériane Mistiaen
Chapter 4. Depiction of Immigration in Television News : Public and Commercial Broadcasters – a Comparison Valériane Mistiaen
Chapter 5. Agency and Power in the Dutch-Language News Coverage of the Summer 2015 Refugee Situation in Europe: A Transitivity Analysis of Semantic Roles Lutgard Lams
Chapter 6. A Diverse View on the Promotion of Tolerance and Cultural Diversity through the Eyes of Journalists: Focus on Belgium and Sweden Stefan Mertens, Leen d’Haenens, Rozane De Cock, and Olivier Standaert
Part III – Public opinion
Chapter 7. Discordance between Public Opinion and News Media Representations of Immigrants and Refugees in Belgium and Sweden David De Coninck, Hanne Vandenberghe, and Koen Matthijs
Chapter 8. Online News Consumption and Public Sentiment toward Refugees : Is there a Filter Bubble at Play? Belgium, France, the Netherlands, and Sweden: A Comparison Stefan Mertens, Leen d’Haenens, and Rozane De Cock
Chapter 9. The Effects of Dominant versus Peripheral News Frames on Attitudes toward Refugees and News Story Credibility Willem Joris and Rozane De Cock
Part IV – Refugees’ experiences
Chapter 10. Beyond Victimhood : Reflecting on Migrant-Victim Representations with Afghan, Iraqi, and Syrian Asylum Seekers and Refugees in Belgium Kevin Smets, Jacinthe Mazzocchetti, Lorraine Gerstmans, and Lien Mostmans
Conclusion François Heinderyckx
List of authors
Perception and representation of newcomers and immigrants
The topic of migration has become particularly contentious in national and international debates. Media have a discernable impact on overall societal attitudes towards this phenomenon. Polls show time and again that immigration is one of the most important issues occupying people’s minds. This book examines the dynamic interplay between media representations of migrants and refugees on the one hand and the governmental and societal (re)actions to these on the other. Largely focusing on Belgium and Sweden, this collection of interdisciplinary research essays attempts to unravel the determinants of people’s preferences regarding migration policy, expectations towards newcomers, and economic, humanitarian and cultural concerns about immigration’s effect on the majority population’s life. Whilst migrants and refugees remain voiceless and highly underrepresented in the legacy media, this volume allows their voices to be heard.
Contributors: Leen d’Haenens (KU Leuven), Willem Joris (KU Leuven), Paul Puschmann (KU Leuven/Radboud University Nijmegen), Ebba Sundin (Halmstad University), David De Coninck (KU Leuven), Rozane De Cock (KU Leuven), Valériane Mistiaen (Université libre de Bruxelles), Lutgard Lams (KU Leuven), Stefan Mertens (KU Leuven), Olivier Standaert (UC Louvain), Hanne Vandenberghe (KU Leuven), Koen Matthijs (KU Leuven), Kevin Smets (Vrije Universiteit Brussel), Jacinthe Mazzocchetti (UC Louvain), Lorraine Gerstmans (UC Louvain), Lien Mostmans (Vrije Universiteit Brussel), and François Heinderyckx (Université libre de Bruxelles)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
With thanks to the funding provided by Belspo (Belgian Science Policy Office), as part of the framework programme BRAIN-be (Belgian Research Action Through Interdisciplinary Networks), contract nr BR/165/A4/IM2MEDIATE.
Preface: GlassRoutes and the systems of change
Acknowledgements
List of Illustrations
List of Tables
Introduction
Chapter 1
Islamic glassmaking in Egypt contingent on local administration 27
• Primary glass workshops in Egypt – the archaeological evidence 28
• Roman and late antique glass groups of Egyptian origin 32
Roman antimony-decoloured glass 32
High iron, manganese and titanium (HIMT) glass 36
HIMT2 & Foy 3.2 (série 3.2) 38
Glass group Foy 2.1 (série 2.1) 40
Magby – a high Mg Byzantine glass type 42
Compositions and working properties over time 45
• The beginnings of Islamic glass production 47
Natron type Egypt 1A-C & Egypt 2 49
Natron type Egypt 1Ax – glass mosaics from the Great Mosque in Damascus 56
• The earliest plant ash glasses from Egypt 62
Plant ash glasses E1 – E4 63
Recycling and chronological evolution 66
Tin-oxide opacified glass weights 68
• Trace element discriminants of Egyptian glass 71
• Egyptian glass and its market 72
10 Table of Contents
Chapter 2
Islamic glassmaking in Greater Syria (Bilâd al-Shâm): distribution patterns 77
• Glassmaking and glass-working in the Bilâd al-Shâm –
the archaeological evidence 78
• Roman and late antique glass groups of Levantine origin 80
Roman manganese-decoloured and naturally coloured glass 80
The glass from fourth-century Jalame 83
Late antique Apollonia glass – Levantine I 84
• The beginnings of Islamic glass production 88
Early Islamic natron glass from Bet Eli‘ezer – Levantine II 88
The early Islamic mosaic tradition in Greater Syria 93
An interlude – the gold in gold leaf tesserae 97
Colours and opacifiers of the mosaic tesserae 99
• The last hurrah of natron-type glass in the Levant 105
• The earliest plant ash glasses from the Bilâd al-Shâm 108
Raqqa group 1 & Raqqa group 4 108
Glass from the primary production site of Tyre 113
Glass from the Serçe Limani shipwreck and the secondary workshop at Banias 115
• Ruptures and shifts in the production of glass in the Levant 119
• Distribution patterns and the glass market 121
Chapter 3
Glass production in Mesopotamia: preservation of plant ash recipes 125
• Sasanian glassmaking tradition - Veh Ardašīr et al. 126
• The transition to Islamic glassmaking in Mesopotamia 135
Mesopotamian group Raqqa 4 135
Two early Islamic glass groups from Mesopotamia: Samarra 1 and Samarra 2 138
Colourless glass from Nishapur 140
Millefiori tiles from Samarra and the ‘missing link’ 144
Message in a bottle 150
The port city of Siraf – a trading hub 155
• Glass from Iran and Central Asia – multiple origins of the glass
at Nishapur and Merv 157
• Mesopotamian versus Central Asian glass productions 163
Table of Contents 11
Chapter 4
“From Polis to Madina” and the flux of glass in Spain 173
• Late Roman and Visigothic glass from Hispania 176
The glass from Recópolis – exception to the rule or genuine trend? 177
• The first local production of glass in Islamic al-Andalus 183
The ‘invention’ of glassmaking – the case of Šaqunda 183
The glass workshop in Pechina (Almería) 189
The glass from Madīnat al-Zahrā’ – the Brilliant City 194
Domestic assemblages in Córdoba and the advent of Iberian plant ash glass 203
• Mosaics from Madīnat al-Zahrā’ and the Great Mosque of Córdoba 207
• The glass supply in eighth- to tenth-century al-Andalus 217
• Glass and the processes of Islamisation 221
• Western expansion: Sicily and the Maghreb 222
Byzantine, Islamic and Swabian Sicily 222
Islamic glass in the Maghreb 226
Emancipation of western Islamic glassmaking 226
Chapter 5
In conclusion – geographical and chronological dimensions 229
References 237
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aNew insights into the history of Islamic glassmaking
The ancient glass industry changed dramatically towards the end of the first millennium. The Roman glassmaking tradition of mineral soda glass was increasingly supplanted by the use of plant ash as the main fluxing agent at the turn of the ninth century CE. Defining primary production groups of plant ash glass has been a challenge due to the high variability of raw materials and the smaller scale of production. Islamic Glass in the Making advocates a large-scale archaeometric approach to the history of Islamic glassmaking to trace the developments in the production, trade and consumption of vitreous materials between the eighth and twelfth centuries and to separate the norm from the exception. It proposes compositional discriminants to distinguish regional production groups, and provides insights into the organisation of the glass industry and commerce during the early Islamic period. The interdisciplinary approach leads to a holistic understanding of the development of Islamic glass; assemblages from the early Islamic period in Mesopotamia, Central Asia, Egypt, Greater Syria and Iberia are evaluated, and placed in the larger geopolitical context. In doing so, this book fills a gap in the present literature and advances a large-scale approach to the history of Islamic glass.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
PART I KEY CONCEPTS 1 Islamophobia as a Form of Violent Radicalisation Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada & Leen d’Haenens
2 The Mutual Antagonism between Sharia for Europe and Anti-Islam Far-Right Networks Erkan Toguslu & Leen d’Haenens
PART II CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL DISCOURSES ON ISLAMOPHOBIA 3 Building Blocks of Polish Islamophobia: The Case of Polish Youth Katarzyna Górak-Sosnowska & Joanna Sozańska
4 The Political and Intellectual Discourse on Islam and Muslims in Flanders Alexander Van Leuven, Stefan Mertens, Leen d’Haenens & Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada
5 Islamophobia in Germany, Still a Debate? Luis Manuel Hernández Aguilar
PART III MEDIA PRACTICES 6 Islamophobia in the Media in the Province of Québec, Canada : A Corpus-Assisted Critical Discourse Analysis Vivek Venkatesh, Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada, Jihène Hichri, Rawda Harb & Ashley Montgomery
7 The Veil in France: Twenty Years of Media Coverage (1989–2010) Camila Arêas & Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada
8 From Pen to Perception: Does News Reporting Advance Terrorists’ Agendas? Stefan Mertens, David De Coninck & Leen d’Haenens
9 Islamophobia in the Portuguese Opinion Press Camila Arêas, Alfredo Brant, Ana Flora Machado, Colin Robineau, Helena Cruz Ventura & Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada
10 Islamophobia and Far-Right Parties in Spain: The ‘Vox’ Discourse on Twitter Alfonso Corral, Cayetano Fernández & Antonio Prieto-Andrés
PART IV RESPONDING TO ISLAMOPHOBIA, EXTREMISM AND RADICALISATION 11 Coping with Islamophobia: (Social) Media, a Double-Edged Sword Ans De Nolf, Leen d’Haenens & Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada
12 Safe Spaces and Sensitive Issues : Towards an Emic Understanding of Radicalisation Alexander Van Leuven & Ann Trappers
13 ‘Wait, What?! Islamophobia Exists in Newfoundland and Labrador?’ : Theorising Polite Dismissal of Anti-Islamophobia Public Engagement Sobia Shaheen Shaikh & Jennifer A. Selby
14 Muslim Communities and the Covid-19 Pandemic : The Complex Faces of Protection Salam El-Majzoub, Anabelle Vanier-Clément & Cécile Rousseau
15 From Media and Pseudo-Scholarly Islamophobia in Post 9/11 Moral Panic to ‘Meta-Solidarity’ Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada & Leen d’Haenens
Notes on Contributors
Foundations and mechanisms of Islamophobia in the West.Islamophobia as a Form of Radicalisation discusses the scope and fragmented boundaries of Islamophobia as a concept and a sociopolitical reality. The fifteen chapters of this collection cover and connect interdisciplinary research, media content analysis, media discourse analysis, ethnographic research, intersectoral advocacy work, and action research conducted in Belgium, Canada, France, Germany, Poland, Portugal, and Spain. Confronted with an Islamophobia that is growing as a symptom of broader societal malaise in the West, a resistance against it is also arising. It is now a question of better understanding the foundations and mechanisms of this metasolidarity and resistance. Islamophobia as a Form of Radicalisation offers recommendations for urgent consideration by Muslim citizens of Canada and Europe, media professionals, civil society and academic stakeholders, policymakers at the municipal, provincial and federal levels.
Contributors: Abdelwahed Mekki-Berrada (Laval University), Alexander Van Leuven (KU Leuven), Alfonso Corral (San Jorge University), Alfredo Brant (Catholic University of Portugal), Anna Flora Machado (Catholic University of Portugal), Anabelle Vanier-Clément (SHERPA University Institute), Ann Trappers (Foyer VZW), Ans De Nolf (KU Leuven), Antonio Prieto-Andrés (San Jorge University), Ashley S. Montgomery (Concordia University), Camila Arêas (University of Reunion), Cayetano Fernández (San Jorge University), Cécile Rousseau (McGill University), Colin Robineau (University of Reunion), David De Coninck (KU Leuven), Erkan Toguslu (KU Leuven), Helena Cruz Ventura (University Institute of Lisbon), Jennifer A. Selby (Memorial University of Newfoundland and Labrador), Jihène Hichri (Université du Québec à Montreal), Joanna Sozańska (Warsaw School of Economics), Katarzyna Górak-Sosnowska (Warsaw School of Economics), Leen d’Haenens (KU Leuven), Luis Manuel Hernández Aguilar (European University Viadrina Frankfurt Oder), Rawda Harb (Concordia University), Salam El-Majzoub (McGill University), Sobia Shaheen Shaikh (Memorial University of Newfoundland and Labrador), Stefan Mertens (KU Leuven), Vivek Venkatesh (Concordia University)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Errata : In the printed book, there is an error in the source citations at the top right from p. 254 to p. 271. This has been corrected in the Open Access ebook that can be accessed and downloaded here.
KU Leuven and UCLouvain’s Co-operation Strengthened by Japan — Luc Sels & Vincent Blondel
Message by the Ambassador of Japan to Belgium — Shimokawa Makita
Introduction — Jan Schmidt, Willy Vande Walle, Eline Mennens
The First World War as the Precondition to the Japanese Donation to the University of Louvain — Jan Schmidt
An Empire of the Mid-Tier: The Japanese Ministry of Foreign Affairs and the New Mass Public-Focused Diplomacy of the Early Twentieth Century — Lieven Sommen
The Japanese Book Donation to the University of Louvain — Willy Vande Walle
Selected Books from the 1920s Japanese Donation — Willy Vande Walle
Japanese Art in Belgium in the 1920s: Hidden Treasures and Public Celebrations — Freya Terryn
Japan’s Sonic Modernity: Popular Music and Culture in the 1920s — Aurel Baele
Selected Objects from 1920s Japan: Modernity in Popular Culture, Media, Society and Politics as Background to the Donation — Jan Schmidt
Notes About the Editors and Authors Bibliography Acknowledgements Classification List of Selected Books List of Selected Objects List of Background Explanations Alphabetical List of Selected Books Alphabetical List of Selected Objects Colophon
Companion to the exhibition “Japan’s Book Donation to the University of Louvain”, KU Leuven University Library, 28 October 2022 - 15 January 2023
With more than 3,000 titles in almost 14,000 volumes, the 1920s Japanese book donation to the University of Leuven/Louvain constitutes an invaluable time capsule of Japan’s pre-modern culture in all its diversity and richness. A century on, the time is right to take a new look at its contents, as well as its history and the political, social and cultural context surrounding the donation. To commemorate its centenary, the Katholieke Universiteit Leuven (KU Leuven) and the Université catholique de Louvain (UCLouvain) have joined forces to set up a special exhibition under the title “Japan’s Book Donation to the University of Louvain. Japanese Cultural Identity and Modernity in the 1920s” (October 2022–January 2023), at the University Library of KU Leuven.
The present book has been compiled for the occasion of the exhibition, to serve as a durable guide to the magnificent book donation and its historical background, and as a reference for further research in the future. In five essays by historians of politics, media, culture, and arts of Japan, it offers a richly illustrated overview of the history of the donation and its wider historical context, providing illuminating insights into the vibrant 1920s in Japan, its politics, society, and popular culture. The reader is further invited to explore a sample of 65 remarkable and rare items from the donation, which were carefully selected for inclusion in the exhibition and are provided here with a detailed description. Moreover, the reader is introduced to 41 representative items, including visually captivating commercial and political posters related to Japan’s modernity in the 1920s, which represent mass culture, progress, and tensions, and highlight both imperial ambitions and a willingness to contribute to international cooperation.
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aJapan =653 \\$aLeuven =653 \\$a1920s =653 \\$aDonation =653 \\$aInterwar Period =653 \\$aEdo Period =653 \\$aTaisho Period =653 \\$aFirst World War =653 \\$aPhilanthropy =653 \\$aCultural Diplomacy =653 \\$aPre-modern book history =653 \\$aCulture =653 \\$aSociety =653 \\$aMedia =653 \\$aFashion =653 \\$aArt =653 \\$aPrint =653 \\$aEmperor Hirohito =700 1\$aSchmidt, Jan,$eeditor. =700 1\$aVande Walle, Willy,$eeditor. =700 1\$aMennens, Eline,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663283$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/321082/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04240nam 22006372 4500 =001 0ea48d7b-bd64-4b1b-9654-1215aca0d0e8 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20242024\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\spa\d =020 \\$z9789462704084$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461665553$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665553$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBJK$2bicssc =072 7$aHBLL$2bicssc =072 7$a1DSE$2bicssc =072 7$a1KLSR$2bicssc =072 7$aHIS024000$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS037040$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS045000$2bisacsh =072 7$a5.0.10.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHK$2thema =072 7$a1KLSR$2thema =072 7$a1QBCV$2thema =072 7$a3MGQ$2thema =100 1\$aJiménez Castillo, Juan,$eauthor.$0(orcid)0000000274865221$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-7486-5221 =245 10$aLa Monarquía Indiana de Carlos II en la encrujiada :$bLa reconfiguración del poder virreinal en el Perú (1674-1689) /$cJuan Jiménez Castillo. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2024. =264 \4$c©2024 =300 \\$a1 online resource. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aAvisos de Flandes ;$vvol. 4. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aA finales del siglo XVII, la América española no sufrió ninguna crisis destinada a la decadencia de su Imperio. El presente libro desentraña las causas y consecuencias de los cambios políticos que llevó a cabo Carlos II en uno de los reinos más poderosos de su patrimonio: el Perú. Este libro presenta, desde una perspectiva inédita, cómo la América hispánica fue precursora en las reformas sobre las cortes virreinales, las cuales fueron el prolegómeno de un punto de inflexión en el paradigma de gobierno y articulación de los reinos en la distancia. Desde entonces, la Monarquía hispánica basculó sus intereses hacia América bajo una rearticulación de sus territorios, lo que no solo le llevó a luchar por su resiliencia, sino a afianzar su protagonismo en la política internacional que heredó la dinastía borbónica.
At the end of the 17th century, Spanish America was not yet in the throes of the crisis that would lead to the decadence of its Empire. This book unravels the causes and consequences of the political changes carried out by Carlos II in one of the most powerful kingdoms of his patrimony: Peru. This book shows, from a hitherto unexamined perspective, how Hispanic America was a forerunner in the reforms of the viceregal courts, which in turn reshaped the paradigm of government and interaction of the distant kingdoms. From then on, the Hispanic Monarchy shifted its interests towards America, in a reorganisation of its territories that led it not only to fight for its resilience, but also to strengthen its leading role in the international politics it had inherited from the Bourbon dynasty.
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aVirrey =653 \\$aAmérica =653 \\$areinos =653 \\$areconfiguración =653 \\$aCarlos II =653 \\$aMonarquía católica =653 \\$aPerú =653 \\$adistancia =653 \\$apoder =653 \\$areforma política =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aAvisos de Flandes ;$vvol. 4. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665553$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/338884/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 03867nam 22005532 4500 =001 98581dd2-ad92-44c6-8fc1-3fd306000708 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20232023\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462703742$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461665171$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461665188$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665171$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHRCX7$2bicssc =072 7$a1KLSR$2bicssc =072 7$aREL045000$2bisacsh =072 7$a5.0.0.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aQRVS4$2thema =072 7$a1KLSR$2thema =100 1\$aOehri, Noah,$eauthor. =245 10$aLandscapes of Liberation :$bMission and Development in Peru’s Southern Highlands, 1958 – 1988 /$cNoah Oehri. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2023. =264 \4$c©2023 =300 \\$a1 online resource. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aLeuven Studies in Mission and Modernity ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgments
Introduction
PART I. MODERNIZING CATHOLICISM (1943-1968)
1 ‘Compulsive Modernization’
2 Mission in Progress
3 Pastors on Pastures
PART II: LIBERATING EVANGELIZATION (1968-1980)
4 Liberation and Revolution
5 Anthropological Concerns
6 Opting for the Peasantry
PART III: MOBILIZING FAITH (1980-1988)
7 A Third Path
8 Land of Communities
Conclusion
Bibliography
The reception of liberation theology in
Andean America
Catholic mission from the mid-20th century onwards was complicated by geopolitical upheaval, church reform, and the emergent critique of the colonial power matrix to which the Church belonged. Missionary movements to Latin America coincided with visions for a progressive, radically transformative church.
Landscapes of Liberation expands scholarship into liberation theology’s reception in Andean America and critically examines the interplay of the Catholic Church as a global institution with parishes as local actors. Through source material from both sides of the Atlantic, this book charts how a transnational network of pastoral agents and laypeople in Peru’s southern highlands claimed mission and development as intertwined tenets of spiritual and social life throughout three decades of agrarian reform, activism, and social conflict. Ultimately, this book reveals how transformative theories for rural development yield contingent transformations: concrete change, yet contested liberation.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
1. Introduction
2. Mapping the Field
Phases of EU mobility: a timeline
Zooming in on the Spanish case
Taking on a biographical perspective
3. Biographical Case Studies
Adam Sanchez
María Navarro
Mateo López
Where to go from here?
4. Time to go?
‘Going abroad’ in the context of one’s academic training
Withstanding a collective mood of demoralisation
Trying to overcome a prolonged period of dependency and stagnation
Trying to cope with or escape from a trajectory of suffering
In search of professional recognition and adequate pay
Acquiring foreign language skills in order to gain a competitive advantage
5. On Studying and Working Abroad
Exchange programmes as pathways into a long-term stay
Alternatives to wage labour
‘Unskilled’ labour?
Skilled labour
Voluntary work
6. A Web of Social Relationships
On working to maintain personal ties to Spain
The emergence of new social relationships in the receiving society
Spaces of transition
Perceived barriers in everyday interactions
7. Established-Outsider Relations in Times of Brexit
The case of Diego
Looking beyond the single case
A note on the recent political developments
8. An Uneasy Homecoming
Returning as an answer to what?
Moving ‘back’: expectations vs. reality
9. Conclusion
A brief overview of my findings
Addressing different audiences
Looking back and looking ahead
10. Methodological Appendix
A note on biographical research
The autobiographical narrative interview and procedures of sequential analysis
The history of my field research
Data overview
Consent form
Notes
References
Index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aLife histories and experiences of Spanish migrants
Since the beginning of the economic crisis of 2008, Spain, like other southern European countries, has witnessed a mass departure of mostly young people looking for opportunities abroad. Leaving Spain is based on 58 autobiographical narrative interviews with recent Spanish migrants who went to the UK and Germany, and sometimes returned. By presenting a combination of in-depth case studies and comparative analyses, the author demonstrates the potential of biographical research and narrative analysis in studying contemporary Europe, including its overlapping crises. The scope of the sociological study is not limited to examining how those who left Spain experienced single phases of their migration. Instead, it focuses on the significance of migration projects in the context of their life histories and how they make sense of these experiences in retrospect.
This book will not only be of great interest to social scientists and students in different disciplines and interdisciplinary studies such as sociology, anthropology, human geography, European studies, education, and social work, but also to professionals, European and national policy makers, and those interested in learning more about migrants’ experiences, perspectives, and (often invisible) contributions.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction / IntroductionNicholas Bullock & Luc Verpoest
1. THE RECONSTRUCTION OF HERITAGE / LA RECONSTRUCTION DU PATRIMOINE
Heritage in Time of War / Patrimoine en temps de guerre
Art and Architectural History as Substitutes for Preservation. German Heritage Policy in Belgium during and after the First World War.
Marnix Beyen
‘The German Way of Making Better Cities’. German Reconstruction Plans for Belgium during the First World War.
Wolfgang Cortjaens
The Institutional Framework / Le cadre institutionnel
La France d’un modèle de reconstruction à l’autre, 1918-1945.
Danièle Voldman
Paul Léon, le service des Monuments historiques et la reconstruction. Enjeux et cadre institutionnel.
Arlette Auduc
Le service des Monuments historiques. Acteur de la construction en France, 1940-1950. 86
Patrice Gourbin
After the First World War: case studies / Après la Première Guerre mondiale: études de cas
Les ambiguïtés du régionalisme architectural après la Grande Guerre. L’ exemple de la Flandre française.
Benoît Mihail
Avec ou sans l’histoire? L’ exemple de la reconstruction des églises de Meurthe-et-Moselle (Lorraine française) après la Première Guerre mondiale.
Nicolas Padiou
Alignements urbains et reconstructions après-guerre à Louvain et Saint-Malo.
Anne Moignet-Gaultier
After the Second World War: case studies / Après la Seconde Guerre mondiale: études de cas
Le symbole ou la fonction? La reconstruction des églises protégées après la Seconde Guerre mondiale.
Céline Frémaux
Les enjeux de la création contemporaine dans la restauration d’un monument classé. Les premiers vitraux de peintres à la cathédrale de Metz, 1952-1965.
Christine Blanchet-Vaque
A Remarkable Continuity between 1930s Ideas and Reconstruction after the Second World War. New Stained-Glass Windows in War-Damaged Churches in the Diocese of Namur (Belgium).
Zsuzsanna Böröcz
Recreating an Urban Atmosphere. The Rebuilding of Three Dutch Towns: Middelburg, Rhenen and Wageningen.
Arjen Looyenga (†)
Histoires sans abri - abris sans histoires. La valeur historique et sociale des monuments reconstruits.
Gabi Dolff-Bonekämper
2. THE HERITAGE OF RECONSTRUCTION / LE PATRIMOINE DE LA RECONSTRUCTION
After the First World War / Après la Premiere Guerre mondiale
Huib Hoste and the Reconstruction of Zonnebeke, 1919-1924.
Patrik Jaspers
Domi or Dom-Ino? The Role of the Genius Loci in Post-war Reconstruction and Interwar Urbanism.
Leen Meganck
Ferdinand De Ruddere as Town Architect of Dendermonde after the First World War. Stylistic Indifference or Balance?
Evert Vandeweghe
After the Second World War / Après la Seconde Guerre mondiale
Housing for War Victims, 1946-1948. A Problematic Building Project by the Belgian Government.
Fredie Floré
The Reconstruction of the Croatian Coastal City of Zadar.
Ivana Lazanja
La réception de l’architecture brésilienne à Royan.
Gilles Ragot
Regeneration of the Dutch Residence.
Representation of State and Post-war Reconstruction at The Hague.
Marieke Kuipers
3. HERITAGE, RECONSTRUCTION, PAST AND FUTURE / PATRIMOINE, RECONSTRUCTION, LE PASSÉ ET LE FUTUR
The Remains of War and the Heritage of Post-war Reconstruction in Flanders Today.
Jo Braeken
La fortune critique de la reconstruction. Présence de l’histoire, politique du lien, poétique de l’intervalle.
Emmanuel Doutriaux
Valuing the Past, Seizing the Future. Towards an Architecture of Reconstruction.
Nicholas Bullock
Abbreviations / AbréviationsBibliography / BibliographieIndex of Persons / Index des personnesIndex of Places / Index des noms de lieuxAuthors / AuteursColophon / Colophone
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aLiving with History focuses on a particular aspect of heritage preservation in the 20th century: destruction and post-war reconstruction in Belgium, France, Germany, Great Britain, and The Netherlands.
This book establishes a status quaestionis for the historiography of wartime and post-war preservation, and sets these particular developments in preservation history in the context of the general evolution of architecture and urbanism. It studies the specific role of conservationists and heritage institutions and administrations in the overall reconstruction, and examines the specific role of architects and planners in preservation matters.
Living with History se concentre sur un aspect particulier de la conservation du patrimoine au XXe siècle : les destructions et la reconstruction d’ après-guerre en Belgique, en France, en Allemagne, en Grande-Bretagne et aux Pays-Bas.
Cet ouvrage dresse un état de la question sous l’ angle de l’ évolution d’ ensemble de l’ architecture et de l’ urbanisme. Il étudie le rôle des conservateurs et des institutions patrimoniales dans la reconstruction en général et examine le rôle spécifique des architectes et urbanistes dans les domaines liés à la conservation.
Preface: A Transdisciplinary Conjuncture
Introduction: Experimentation versus Interpretation
Part 1. Assemblage Theory for Music
Chapter 1: Virtual Works—Actual Things
Rasch — The limits of music philosophy and the role of artistic
research — Music ontologies: some problems — Beyond
transcendence: approaching a Deleuzian ontology — Virtual
works, actual things: towards a new image of musical work —
Strata — Rasch25: . . . vers la nuit
Chapter 2: Assemblage, Strata, Diagram
Musical works as assemblages — Agencement, logic of assemblage,
assemblage theory — Intermezzo: a note on translation —
From structure to assemblage — Strata — Diagram — Logic of
assemblage
Part 2: Experimental Systems in Music
Chapter 3: Experimental Systems and Artistic Research
An epistemology for artistic research? — A methodology for
artistic research — Hans-Jörg Rheinberger’s experimental systems
— Thought collective and ensembles of experimental systems:
MusicExperiment21 — Series of experiments and modules of
research
Chapter 4: Epistemic Complexity in Music Performance
Complexity and epistemic complexity — Epistemic complexity
in biology — Epistemic complexity in technology — Epistemic
complexity in music — Experimentation in music performance:
how to make the future?
Part 3. Beyond Interpretation: Bodies-in-Action
Chapter 5: Transduction and the Body as a Transducer
Transduction in music performance: relaying f lows of intensities;
— Gilbert Simondon’s various definitions of transduction —
Discharge (potentiality); — Passage (time and temporality);
— Energy (thermodynamics): potential, scales, entropy
— Information theory: structural germs and singularities
(structuration) — Haecceity: from haecceitas (Duns Scotus) to
eccéité (Simondon) to heccéité (Deleuze and Guattari) to microhaecceity
— Topology: in-formation — Corporeality: somatic
transduction — Permanent transduction: being-in-the-world and
fluctuatio animi; 11. Conclusion
Chapter 6: Rasch26: The Somatheme
The somatheme — Roland Barthes at the piano: musica practica —
The impact of Julia Kristeva: phenotext and genotext —
New musical concepts: geno-song, pheno-song, somatheme —
Intermezzo: fourteen somathemes — The impact of Jacques
Lacan: signifier and jouissance — Lacan’s desire — Situating the
somatheme within Lacan’s graphs of desire — Conclusion: artistic
research and transdisciplinarity
Part 4. A New Ethics of Performance
Chapter 7: The Emancipated Performer:
Musical Renderings and Power Relations
Music performance and power relations — The dominant image
of work and the problem of interpretation — The tacit authorities:
Deleuze’s “Postscript on the Societies of Control” — Nietzsche’s
three modes of relation to history: monumental, antiquarian,
critical — A new image of work — The emancipated performer
Chapter 8. . . . at the borders of time that surround our presence . . .
What is the contemporary? — Agamben’s contemporary: Barthes
reading Nietzsche — Nietzsche’s untimely: lost in translation —
. . . at the border of time that surrounds our presence . . . — Artistic
research as the carrier of the contemporary
Appendix 1: Beyond Urtext: A Dynamic Conception of Musical Editing
On notation and time — The urtext era — Urtext editions: an
epistemological obstacle — Critical editing of music and different
types of editions — Music editing and performance practice: a
dynamic conception
Appendix 2: The Conditions of Creation and the Haecceity of Musical Material: Philosophical-Aesthetic Convergences between Helmut Lachenmann and Gilles Deleuze
Helmut Lachenmann and Gilles Deleuze: an unconnected
connection — Helmut Lachenmann: toward an aestheticostructural
methodology — Helmut Lachenmann’s three “theses”
on composing — Gilles Deleuze’s diagnostic function of art, capture
of forces, and body without organs: first convergences with Helmut
Lachenmann — Helmut Lachenmann’s four conditions of the
musical material — Gilles Deleuze’s opinion, corporeity, fold, and
latitude: further convergences with Helmut Lachenmann — The
conditions of creation and the haecceity of musical material: a
philosophical-aesthetic Erewhon
Acknowledgements
Index
=520 \\$aBeyond interpretation: a proposal for experimental performance practices
Logic of Experimentation offers several innovative and ground-breaking perspectives on music performance, music ontology, research methodologies and ethics of performance. It proposes new modes of thinking and exposing past musical works to contemporary audiences, arguing for a new kind of performer, emancipated from authoritative texts and traditions, whose creativity is propelled by intensive research and inventive imagination. Moving beyond the work-concept, Logic of Experimentation presents a new image of musical works, based upon the notions of strata, assemblage and diagram, advancing innovative practice-based methodologies that integrate archival and musicological research into the creative process leading to a performance. Beyond representational modes of performance—be it mainstream or historically informed performance practices—Logic of Experimentation creates an ontological, methodological and ethical space for experimental performance practices, arguing for a new mode of performance. Written in an experimental style, its eight chapters appropriate music performance concepts from post-structural philosophy, psychoanalysis, science and technology studies, epistemology and semiotics, displaying how transdisciplinarity is central to artistic research. An indispensable contribution to artistic research in music, Logic of Experimentation is compelling reading for music performers, composers, musicologists, philosophers and artist researchers alike.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
INTRODUCTION Rethinking the Intersection of Home and Displacement from a Spatial Perspective Luce Beeckmans, Ashika Singh & Alessandra Gola
PART 1 – CAMP
To Shelter in Place for a Time Beyond
Anooradha Iyer Siddiqi & Somayeh Chitchian
Towards Dwelling in Spaces of Inhospitality. A Phenomenological Exploration of Home in Nahr Al-Barid Ashika Singh
Who/What Is Doing What? Dwelling and Homing Practices in Syrian Refugee Camps –The Kurdistan Region of Iraq
Layla Zibar, Nurhan Abujidi & Bruno de Meulder
In the Name of Belonging Developing Sheikh Radwan for the Refugees in Gaza City, 1967-1982
Fatina Abreek-Zubiedat
PART 2 – SHELTER
At Home in the Centre? Spatial Appropriation and Horizons of Homemaking in Reception Facilities for Asylum Seekers Paolo Boccagni
Bare Shelter. The Layered Spatial Politics of Inhabiting Displacement
Irit Katz
Refugee Shelters done Differently. Humanist Architecture of Socialist Yugoslavia Aleksandar Staničić
Years in the Waiting Room. A feminist Ethnography of the Invisible Institutional Living Spaces of Forced Displacement
Maretha Dreyer
PART 3 – CITY
Gendering Displacement. Women Refugees and the Geographies of Dwelling in India Romola Sanyal
Homing Displacements. Socio-Spatial Identities in Contemporary Urban Palestine Alessandra Gola
Mediating between Formality and Informality. Refugee Housing as City-Making Activity in Refugee Crisis Athens Aikaterini Antonopoulou
Making Home in Borgo Mezzanone. Dignity and Mafias in South Italy
Anna Di Giusto
PART 4 – HOUSE
News from the Living Room. Historiography and Immigrant Agency in Urban Housing in Berlin Esra Akcan
The Nubian House. Displacement, Dispossession, and Resilience
Menna Agha
Trans-national Homes. From Nairobi to Cape Town
Huda Tayob
Static Displacement, Adaptive Domesticity. The Three Temporary Geographies of Firing Zone 918, Palestine Wafa Butmeh
CODA About the Displacement of Home
Hilde Heynen
Making Home(s) in Displacement critically rethinks the relationship between home and displacement from a spatial, material, and architectural perspective. Recent scholarship in the social sciences has investigated how migrants and refugees create and reproduce home under new conditions, thereby unpacking the seemingly contradictory positions of making a home and overcoming its loss. Yet, making home(s) in displacement is also a spatial practice, one which intrinsically relates to the fabrication of the built environment worldwide.
Conceptually the book is divided along four spatial sites, referred to as camp, shelter, city, and house, which are approached with a multitude of perspectives ranging from urban planning and architecture to anthropology, geography, philosophy, gender studies, and urban history, all with a common focus on space and spatiality. By articulating everyday homemaking experiences of migrants and refugees as spatial practices in a variety of geopolitical and historical contexts, this edited volume adds a novel perspective to the existing interdisciplinary scholarship at the intersection of home and displacement. It equally intends to broaden the canon of architectural histories and theories by including migrants' and refugees' spatial agencies and place-making practices to its annals. By highlighting the political in the spatial, and vice versa, this volume sets out to decentralise and decolonise current definitions of home and displacement, striving for a more pluralistic outlook on the idea of home.
Contributors: Fatina Abreek-Zubiedat (ETH, Zurich), Nurhan Abujidi (Zuyd University of Applied Sciences), Menna Agha (University of Oregon), Esra Akcan (Cornell University), Aikaterini Antonopoulou (University of Liverpool), Luce Beeckmans (Ghent University), Paolo Boccagni (University of Trento), Wafa Butmeh (independent architect / UN-Habitat), Somayeh Chitchian (Harvard University), Bruno de Meulder (KU Leuven), Anna Di Giusto (independent researcher), Maretha Dreyer (Hasselt University), Alessandra Gola (KU Leuven), Hilde Heynen (KU Leuven), Annorada Iyer Siddiqi (Barnard College-Columbia University), Irit Katz (University of Cambridge), Romola Sanyal (LSE), Ashika Singh (KU Leuven), Aleksander Staničić (TU Delft), Huda Tayob (University of Johannesburg), Layla Zibar (Brandenburg University of Technology / KU Leuven)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
PREFACE
Mapping Landscapes in Transformation: Multidisciplinary Methods for Historical Analysis
Thomas Coomans, Bieke Cattoor & Krista De Jonge
PART ONE: PROJECTION
1. Cartographic Grounds: The Temporal Cases
Jill Desimini
2. Data Friction: Mapping Strategies on a (Peri)urban Frontier, Chennai, India
Karl Beelen
3. Mapping and Design as Interrelated Processes: Constructing Space-Time Narratives
Bieke Cattoor
4. Mapping the Evolution of Designed Landscapes with GIS: Stourhead Landscape Garden as an Example
Steffen Nijhuis
5. Unfolding Wasteland: A Thick Mapping Approach to the Transformation of Charleroi’s Industrial Landscape
Cecilia Furlan
6. Photography, Railways and Landscape in Transylvania , Romania: Case Studies in Digital Humanities
Cristina Purcar
PART TWO: FOCUS
7. Mapping Archaeological Landscapes in Transformation: A Chaîne-Opératoire Approach
Piraye Hacıgüzeller, Jeroen Poblome, Devi Taelman, Ralf Vandam, Frank Vermeulen
8. A High-Resolution Multi-Scalar Approach for Micro-Mapping Historical Landscapes in Transition: A Case Study in Texas, USA
Arlo McKee, May Yuan
9. Pixels or Parcels? Parcel-Based Historical GIS and Digital Thematic Deconstruction as Tools for Studying Urban Development
Bram Vannieuwenhuyze
10. The Secularisation of Urban Space: Mapping the Afterlife of Religious Houses in Brussels, Antwerp and Bruges
Reinout Klaarenbeek
11. Mapping Through Space and Time: The Itinerary of Charles of Croÿ
Sanne Maekelberg
12. Landscape Appreciation in the English Lake District: A GIS Approach
Ian Gregory, Christopher Donaldson, Joanna E. Taylor
13. Digital Humanities and GIS for Chinese Architecture: A Methodological Experiment
Chang-Xue Shu
POSTFACE
Mapping Historical Landscapes in Transformation : An Overview
John Bintliff
About the authors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aThe relational complexity of urban and rural landscapes in space and in time
The development of historical geographical information systems (HGIS) and other methods from the digital humanities have revolutionised historical research on cultural landscapes. Additionally, the opening up of increasingly diverse collections of source material, often incomplete and difficult to interpret, has led to methodologically innovative experiments. One of today’s major challenges, however, concerns the concepts and tools to be deployed for mapping processes of transformation—that is, interpreting and imagining the relational complexity of urban and rural landscapes, both in space and in time, at micro- and macro-scale.
Mapping Landscapes in Transformation gathers experts from different disciplines, active in the fields of historical geography, urban and landscape history, archaeology and heritage conservation. They are specialised in a wide variety of space-time contexts, including regions within Europe, Asia, and the Americas, and periods from antiquity to the 21st century.
Contributors: Karl Beelen (Karlsruhe IT), John Bintliff (Leiden University / Edinburgh University), Bieke Cattoor (TU Delft), Jill Desimini (Harvard University), Cecilia Furlan (TU Delft / KU Leuven), Ian Gregory and Christopher Donaldson (Lancaster University), Joanna Taylor (University of Manchester), Piraye Hacigüzeller, Frank Vermeulen and Devi Taelman (Ghent University), Ralf Vandam and Jeroen Poblome (KU Leuven), Reinout Klaarenbeek (KU Leuven), Sanne Maekelberg (KU Leuven), Steffen Nijhuis (TU Delft), Cristina Purcar (TU Cluj-Napoca), Changxue Shu (KU Leuven, FWO), Bram Vannieuwenhuyze (University of Amsterdam), May Yuan and Arlo McKee (University of Texas, Dallas)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
PREFACE – Between joy and disquiet: Philosophising in dark times
Major publications by Marthinus Versfeld
INTRODUCTIONS 1. “Fertilizer to the last” – Biographical snips(by Ruth Versfeld)
2. What was Versfeld doing when he was doing philosophy? 1. On the warts 2. From autobiography to enigma 3. Genre – Or, how to do things with words 4. Theology: A portrait of the philosopher as an odd fish 5. Polyphony of philosophy: Introductions, liberal translations, historical work 6. Apartheid and other empiresque behaviour 7. A note on celebration 8. On its most intimate lesson 9. Conclusion
STUDIES 3. Self-knowledge and practical reason in a time of political madness 1. Introduction: Self-knowledge in a period of political madness 2. “Gods” and “idols” 3. War, exploitation, racism. Critique of social and political violence 4. Urgency, time and incarnation 5. Unity and decay 6. The concept of unity – Or, a philosophy of incarnation 7. Reception and continuation
4. Versfeld and Nietzsche: Strange bedfellows(by Paul van Tongeren) 1. Introduction 2. Sounding out idols 3. Man, morality and metaphysics 4. Nihilism 5. Conclusion
5. Grasping the truth from where we are 1. Introduction: Flux, stability and where we are 2. Anthropology as first philosophy 3. Traditions and cultural criticism 4. Using a thorn to take out a thorn, and throwing both away 5. Questioning from where we are
6. Versfeld’s dialogue with Eastern thought(By J. S. Krüger) 1. Introduction 2. Groundbreaking early works 3. Midcareer 4. Mature thought 5. Conclusion
7. Poiesis – On the voice of poets, philosophers and other potters 1. On writing 2. Connectedness 3. Creativity, love, generosity 4. Poiesis 5. Silence
8. Reverberations(poems by Marlene van Niekerk and Antjie Krog)
CONCLUSIONS 9. Sanctus Marthinus laudator philosophicus – Or, sitting at the guru’s feet
10. What is living and what is dead of the philosophy of Martin Versfeld? – Or, the philosopher read by a vultur 1. Augustine: Ventriloquism or interpretation as independent thought? 2. Plurality 3. Something or nothing? 4. Close to the earth? 5. Land in Klip en klei – You said, “the obvious”? 6. Ecology: The logos on our common home 7. On subtle critique 8. Ambiguities of anthropology 9. The end
Bibliography
First book-length study of one of the foremost South African philosophers
Martin Versfeld (1909–1995) is one of South Africa’s greatest philosophers, appreciated by academics and activists, poets and the broader public. His masterful prose spans the tension between disquiet and joy. Detractor of the violent trends of modernity, a critic of apartheid from the first hour, he was among the first philosophers of ecology. At the same time he celebrated the generosity of the world and advocated an ethics of simplicity, drawing on mediaeval theology and Eastern wisdom. His philosophy offered food for thought in dark times of the 20th century, as it still does for us in the 21st century.
This first book-length study on Versfeld is an invitation to think with him on justice and exploitation, cultural difference and human nature, religion and the environment, time and connectedness.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Voorwoord
Migratie: de vreemdeling in onszelf
Inleiding
Een rol voor wetenschappers in een debat over immigratie?
1. Wat is het verschil tussen een immigrant, een emigrant, een expat, een vreemdeling, een autochtoon, een allochtoon, een asielzoeker, een vluchteling, een “illegaal” en een “mens zonder papieren”?
2. Is immigratie een nieuw verschijnsel in België?
3. Hoeveel immigranten zijn er in België, waar komen ze vandaan, waar wonen ze?
4. Hoeveel vreemdelingen zijn er in België?
5. Waarom verlaten migranten hun herkomstland?
6. Waarom willen migranten naar België komen?
7. Hoeveel immigranten komen vandaag binnen in België en wie zijn ze?
8. Migreren vrouwen minder dan mannen?
9. Is België soepeler dan andere landen tegenover immigranten en asielzoekers?
10. Is de Belgische bevolking minder verdraagzaam tegenover migranten?
11. Kunnen Europa en België hun grenzen sluiten en de komst van immigranten en asielzoekers stoppen?
12. Nemen immigranten de jobs af van Belgische werknemers?
13. Zijn migranten geïntegreerd?
14. Zijn migranten het slachtoffer van discriminatie op de arbeidsmarkt in België?
15. Kost migratie geld aan de overheid?
16. Vormen immigranten een gevaar voor de veiligheid in België?
17. Vormt migratie een gevaar voor de Belgische identiteit?
18. Worden alle migranten Belgen?
19. Hebben immigranten een invloed op de verkiezingen in België?
20. Zullen de nieuwkomers en asielzoekers “mensen zonder papieren” worden?
21. En de Belgen, zijn dat ook migranten?
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aJean-Michel Lafleur lauréat du prix Wernaers 2019 pour la vulgarisation scientifique >
Hoeveel migranten zijn er in België? Waar komen ze vandaan? Zijn het overwegend mannen? Zijn ze geïntegreerd of bedreigen ze onze identiteit? Nemen ze jobs af van de Belgen of worden ze gediscrimineerd? Wie bedoelt men met “mensen zonder papieren”? Is België gastvrijer dan andere landen? Mogen we onze grenzen sluiten?
De meeste Belgen hebben wel een antwoord op dat soort vragen, maar vaak baseren ze zich op vooroordelen of foutieve informatie. Migratie in België in 21 vragen en antwoorden laat de clichés achterwege en geeft in een toegankelijke stijl een antwoord op 21 pertinente vragen rond migratie. Op basis van wetenschappelijke gegevens en helder cijfermateriaal geven de auteurs een evenwichtig en duidelijk antwoord. Kortom, dit boekje is een absolute aanrader voor wie zich een correcte mening wil vormen over dit brandend maatschappelijk onderwerp.
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
=536 \\$aKoning Boudewijnstichting =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$aMarfouk, Abdeslam,$eauthor. =700 1\$aFadil, Nadia,$epreface by. =700 1\$aPennewaert, Antoine,$etranslator. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461662590$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/262493//_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 06524nam 22006252 4500 =001 d585f0eb-35d2-4467-9914-a0e58b239218 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20202020\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702400$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663450$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663443$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663443$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJFFN$2bicssc =072 7$aLNH$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$aLAW054000$2bisacsh =072 7$aBUS038000$2bisacsh =072 7$aJBFH$2thema =072 7$aLNH$2thema =245 00$aMigration at Work :$bAspirations, Imaginaries & Structures of Mobility /$cedited by Fiona-Katharina Seiger, Christiane Timmerman, Noel B. Salazar, Johan Wets. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2020. =264 \4$c©2020 =300 \\$a1 online resource (194 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aCeMIS Migration and Intercultural Studies ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroductionFiona-Katharina Seiger, Noel B. Salazar and Johan Wets
Part I: Projects, structures and regimes of labour mobility
Temporary Labour Migrants from Latvia Negotiate Return Trips for Care: Distributing Resources Across Borders Aija Lulle
Regulatory Regimes and (Infra-)Structuring Emancipation Dynamics: The Case of Health Workers’ Migration Joana de Sousa Ribeiro
Gendered Labour Migration in South Africa: A Capability Approach Lens Alice Ncube & Faith Mkwananzi
“I am not moving life, but life moves me.” Experiences of Intra-EU Im/Mobility among West African Migrants Mirjam Wajsberg
Part II: Labour migration, imaginaries and aspirations
Balancing Personal Aspirations, Family Expectations and Job Matching: “Migratory Career” Reconstruction Among Highly Educated Women in the Basque Country Maria Luisa Di Martino, Concha Maiztegui and Iratxe Aristegui
“Working there is amazing, but life here is better”: Imaginaries of Onward Migration Destinations Among Albanian Migrant Construction Workers in Italy and Greece Iraklis Dimitriadis
“Welcome to my waiting room! Please, take a seat!”: On Future-Imaginaries being Shattered and Postponed Christine Moderbacher
Found a Nanny and Lived Happily Ever After: The Representations of Filipina Nannies on Human Resources Agency Websites in Turkey Deniz Ayaydin
Afterword: Changing Work, Changing MigrationsRussell King
Migration and Labour Mobility
The willingness to migrate in search of employment is in itself insufficient to compel anyone to move. The dynamics of labour mobility are heavily influenced by the opportunities perceived and the imaginaries held by both employers and regulating authorities in relation to migrant labour. This volume offers a multidisciplinary approach to the study of the structures and imaginaries underlying various forms of mobility. Based on research conducted in different geographical contexts, including the European Union, Turkey, and South Africa, and tackling the experiences and aspirations of migrants from various parts of the globe, the chapters comprised in this volume analyse labour-related mobilities from two distinct yet intertwined vantage points: the role of structures and regimes of mobility on the one hand, and aspirations as well as migrant imaginaries on the other. Migration at Work thus aims to draw cross-contextual parallels by addressing the role played by opportunities in mobilising people, how structures enable, sustain, and change different forms of mobility, and how imaginaries fuel labour migration and vice versa. In doing so, this volume also aims to tackle the interrelationships between imaginaries driving migration and shaping “regimes of mobility”, as well as how the former play out in different contexts, shaping internal and cross-border migration.
Based on empirical research in various fields, this collection provides valuable scholarship and evidence on current processes of migration and mobility.
Contributors: Iratxe Aristegui (University of Deusto), Deniz Berfin Ayaydin (CEMESO), Maria Luisa Di Martino (University of Deusto), Iraklis Dimitriadis (University of Milan), Russell King (University of Sussex / Malmö University), Aija Lulle (University of Louborough), Concepción Maiztegui-Oñate (University of Deusto), Faith Mkwananzi (University of the Free State), Christine Moderbacher (Max Planck Institute for Social Anthropology), Alice Ncube (University of the Free State), Noel B. Salazar (KU Leuven), Fiona-Katharina Seiger (Erasmus University Rotterdam), Joana de Sousa Ribeiro (University of Coimbra), Mirjam Wajsberg (Radboud University), Johan Wets (KU Leuven)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Note on translation and transliteration
Introduction
Johan Leman & Serafettin Pektas
1. Salafism, Jihadism and Radicalisation: Between A Common Doctrinal Heritage and The Logics of Empowerment
Mohamed-Ali Adraoui
2. The Libyan Jihadist Outlook: Origins, Evolutions and Future Scenarios
Arturo Varvelli
3. The “Unreturned”: Dealing with the Foreign Fighters and Their Families who Remain in Syria and Iraq
Nadim Houry
4. Cyber Jihadism: Today and Tomorrow
Laith Alkhouri
5. The Role of Women in Post-IS Jihadist Transformation and in Countering Extremism
Anita Perešin
6. The More Things Change, The More They Stay the Same: The Post-Caliphate Jihadist Modus Operandi in Europe
Teun van Dongen
7. Jihadists in Belgian Prisons
Johan Leman
8. Urban Terrorist Sanctuaries in Europe: The Case of Molenbeek
Adolfo Gatti
9. Migrant Smuggling Networks and Jihadist Terrorism
Johan Leman & Stef Janssens
10. Prospects for Counter-Theology against Militant Jihadism
Serafettin Pektas
Concluding Considerations
Johan Leman & Serafettin Pektas
About the Authors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aScholarly analysis of evolving jihadist organisation, strategies, and operationJihadist militants keep being a global threat. Many observers suggest that a transformation is likely to happen in their organisation, operation, mobilisation, and recruitment strategies, particularly after the territorial decline of the “Caliphate” of the “Islamic State.” This volume explores different aspects of the future trajectories of militant jihadism and the prospective transformation of this movement in and around Europe. The authors analyse the changing jihadist landscape and networks, and the societal challenges posed by both returned foreign terrorist fighters and those who have not returned to their countries of origin. Other topics of discussion are cyber jihadism, jihadist financing, women's position in and relevance for contemporary jihadism, the role of prisons in relation to radicalisation and militancy, and the changing theological dynamics. Based on recent empirical research, Militant Jihadism offers a solid scholarly contribution to various disciplines that study violence, terrorism, security, and extremism.
Contributors: Mohamed-Ali Adraoui (Georgetown University), Laith Alkhouri (Flashpoint), Nadim Houry (Arab Reform Initiative), Adolfo Gatti (Lumina Analytics), Stef Janssens (MYRIA), Johan Leman (KU Leuven), Serafettin Pektas (Researcher), Anita Perešin (Office of the National Security Council of the Republic of Croatia), Teun van Dongen (Independent Security Expert), Arturo Varvelli (ISPI).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Abbreviations
CHAPTER 1 Confluence Samantha L. Martin & Leila Marie Farah
CHAPTER 2 Public Amenity or Public Threat? Epidemiology and Grassroots Activism in the Food Markets of New Orleans, 1900–1940 Ashley Rose Young
CHAPTER 3 The Crawford Market: Sanitary Problems, Engineered Solutions, and Symbolic Gestures in Late Nineteenth-Century Bombay Daniel Williamson
CHAPTER 4 The Central Market in Hong Kong: Urban Amenities in a Speculative Field Zhengfeng Wang
CHAPTER 5 Nairobi City Market: The Versatile Afterlife of a Colonial-Era Building in a Postcolonial World Nkatha Gichuyia
CHAPTER 6 The St. Lawrence Market, Toronto: Changes and Continuity Leila Marie Farah
CHAPTER 7 Between a Government Project and a Commercial Space for Ordinary Citizens: Dongan Market, 1903–1937 Xusheng Huang
CHAPTER 8 Hygiene, Urbanism, and Fascist Politics at Rome’s Wholesale Market Ruth W. Lo
CHAPTER 9 Modernization and Mobilization: Parisian Retail Market Halls, 1961–1982 Emeline Houssard
CHAPTER 10 Finding Food at Torvehallerne: Market Halls in Copenhagen between Gastrosexual Consumerism and the Coronavirus Pandemic Henriette Steiner
CHAPTER 11 Pandemics and Marketplaces: A Coda from Viareggio, Italy Andrea Borghini & Min Kyung Lee
About the Authors Index
Market halls at the intersection of civic order and public health
Markets and market halls have always been more than about trade and nourishment. A detailed look at the histories of marketplaces provides evidence of the public health concerns they faced, as well as the social commotion, mobilization and, at times, unrest they hosted. This edited volume reappraises the market hall, examining both its architectural and its social and political significance.
Focusing on how these buildings embodied transformations in architecture and urbanism from the mid-nineteenth century until the age of COVID-19, Mobs and Microbes situates market halls at the intersection of civic order and public health. Central to this are advances in sanitation and hygiene. These radical interventions also mediated conflicting interests. Through their rational designs, market halls intertwined government policies and regulations, which formalized, controlled and literally imposed order. Additionally, markets served as demonstration grounds for community-led mobilization efforts. With case studies spanning North America, Europe, Asia, India and Africa, this edited volume provides a global perspective on covered market halls across many disciplines, including architecture, history of art and architecture, landscape architecture, food studies and urban history.
Contributors: Samantha L. Martin (University College Dublin), Leila Marie Farah (Toronto Metropolitan University), Ashley Rose Young (Smithsonian’s National Museum of American History), Daniel Williamson (Savannah College of Art and Design), Zhengfeng Wang (University College Dublin), Nkatha Gichuyia (University of Nairobi), Xusheng Huang (Southeast University), Ruth Lo (Hamilton College), Emeline Houssard (Sorbonne Université), Henriette Steiner (University of Copenhagen), Andrea Borghini (Università degli Studi di Milano), Min Kyung Lee (Bryn Mawr College).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
9 Introduction
Chiara Zampieri, Martina Piperno and Bart Van den Bossche
23 Etruscans, Victorians, and After: The Modern Sense of Beauty
Francesca Orestano
43 The ‘Walking Apollo’: From Archaeological Dissemination to Literary Knowledge
Chiara Zampieri
63 Cooking by the Book: Travel Writing and Etruscan Food Culture in the Interwar Period
Bart Van den Bossche
81 Etruscans in Unexpected Places: Space, Temporality and Visual Agency
Lisa C. Pieraccini
97 The Demonisation of the Etruscans: From Alfred Grünwedel to German Schoolbooks
Martin Miller
115 Mr Lawrence and Lady Larthia: D. H. Lawrence as an Apprentice Etruscologist
Marie-Laurence Haack
127 Etruscan Studies and the Infernal Landscape in Vincenzo Cardarelli’s prose d’arte
Gennaro Ambrosino
147 The Problem of Distance: Giorgio Bassani, The Etruscans and the Limits of Compassion
Martina Piperno
163 A Compromised Antiquity: The Post-war Italian Rejection of the Etruscan Past
Andrea Avalli
181 About the Authors
185 Index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aNew insights on the reception of Etruscan antiquity in the modernist period.
“L’Étrurie est à la mode”, French archaeologist Salomon Reinach bluntly stated in 1927. Since the beginning of the nineteenth century, Etruria had not only been attracting the attention of archaeologists and specialists of all sorts, but it had also been a fascinating and, in some cases, captivating destination for poets, novelists, painters and sculptors from all over Europe. This volume deals with the impact of the constantly expanding knowledge on the Etruscans and their mysterious civilisation on Italian, French, English, and German literature, arts and culture, with particular regard to the modernist period (1890–1950). The volume brings a distinctive point of view to the subject by approaching it from an interdisciplinary and comparative perspective, and by looking at a quite diverse range of topics and artefacts, which includes, but is not limited to, the study of drawings, art works, travel essays, novels, cooking recipes, schoolbooks, photographs, and movies.
By exploring a new paradigm to understand ancient cultures, beyond the traditional ideas and models of “reception of the classics”, and by challenging the alleged fracture between the so-called “two cultures” of humanities and natural sciences, Modern Etruscans will be of interest to scholars from various disciplines. Designed as a learning tool for university courses on the interplay between literature and science in the twentieth century, it is suited as recommended reading for students in the humanities.
Contributors: Francesca Orestano (Università degli Studi di Milano), Chiara Zampieri (KU Leuven), Bart Van den Bossche (KU Leuven), Lisa C. Pieraccini (University of California, Berkeley), Martin Miller (Italienisches Kulturinstitut Stuttgart), Marie-Laurence Haack (Université de Picardie Jules Verne), Gennaro Ambrosino (University of Warwick), Martina Piperno (Durham University), Andrea Avalli (Scuola Superiore di Studi Storici di San Marino).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction 1. Contemporary Islamic Activism and Muslims Erkan Toğuşlu and Johan Leman
Part I: Modern Islamic Thinking 2. Fethullah Gülen, Tariq Ramadan and Yusuf al-Qaradawi: The pluralisation of Islamic Knowledge Erkan Toğuşlu 3. Tariq Ramadan and Abdullahi An-Na'im's Islamic gender reform in the Brussels Moroccan community Thierry Limpens 4. The Contribution of Sufism to the Construction of Contemporary Europe's Islam Eric Geoffroy
Part II: Secularism, Islam and Public Sphere: Turkey and Egypt 5. Post Secularism, Post-Islamism and Islam in the Public Sphere Ihsan Yılmaz 6. The Arab Revolutions and Islamic Civil Society Emilio Giuseppe Platti 7. The Muslim Brotherhood and the Democratic Experience in Egypt Roel Meijer
Part III: Contemporary Islamic Social Activism 8. Social Work, Poverty, Inequality and Social Safety Nets: Voluntary Welfare Organizations Jonathan Benthall 9. Tradition and Modernity in Social Islam: The Case of Muslim NGOs in Jordan Egbert Harmsen 10. Fighting Poverty with Kimse Yok Mu Thomas Michel
Conclusion 11. Translocality and Hybridization in Current Modern Islamic Activism Erkan Toğuşlu and Johan Leman
About the authors
Innovative research of ‘Islam at work’ in geographical and social contexts
‘Modern Islamic Thinking and Activism’ presents a series of scholarly papers in relation to Islamic thinking, activism, and politics in both the West and the Middle East. The reader will apprehend that Islam is not the monolithic religion so often depicted in the media or (earlier) in the academic world. The Islamic world is more than a uniform civilization with a set of petrified religious prescriptions and an outdated view on political and social organization. The contributions show the dynamics of ‘Islam at work’ in different geographical and social contexts. By treating the working of Islamic thinking and of Islamic activism on a practical level, ‘Modern Islamic Thinking and Activism’ includes innovative research and fills a significant gap in existing work.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors
Erkan Toğuşlu (KU Leuven), Thierry Limpens (KU Leuven), Eric Geoffroy (University of Strasbourg), Jonathan Benthall ( UCL, London) Thomas Michel (Georgetown University), Egbert Harmsen ( Leiden University), İhsan Yılmaz (Fatih University), Emilio Platti (KU Leuven), Roel Meijer (Radboud University)
Preface PART 1 - LIFE1. Xhosaland: A history of confrontations 1. A snapshot of Xhosa life in the mid eighteenth century 2. Accelerated change: A typology of mounting conflict 3. A changing region in a changing world 3.1 Spread of Boers and British expansion 3.2 British domination and its effects on Xhosaland and beyond 3.3 Changes from the Xhosaland perspective 3.4 Changes from the broader South African perspective
2. (Dis)Union: The world of Mabona’s youth (1910 to the mid 1950s) 1. International and Union politics 2. The economy 3. Separation – reserves – labour 4. Transkei: Culture, religion, education 5. Resistance nationally and in the Transkei
3. Enter Mongameli 1. Birth and first years 2. Early childhood in Qombolo 3. Life in Zigudu – Catholic background (1)
4. Ixopo – Catholic background (2) 5. Pevensey – Catholic background (3) 6. Early priesthood
4. Italy 1. Italian society after World War II 2. Everyday life in Rome 3. Mabona, the student and researcher 4. Further intellectual work 5. Second Congress of Black Writers and Artists: Alioune Diop and Présence Africaine
Excursion: The journal Présence Africaine 6. Preparing for Vatican II
5. Back home? Apartheid, St. Peter’s, SPOBA 1. Apartheid 2. Apartheid education 3. The South African economy in the 1960s 4. Resistance 4.1 The ANC and the PAC 5. Life back in South Africa 5.1 Lumko 5.2 Independent ethnographic studies 5.3 Poetry 5.4 Lecturer at St. Peter’s in Hammanskraal
6. London and Switzerland: Politics or anthropology? 1. SOAS 2. The Azanian People’s Liberation Front and other politics 3. Family life 4. Continued research
PART 2 – WORK 1. Lux: The first impetus 2. Présence Africaine: Writing for a wide public 3. “The depths of African philosophy” and The outlines of African philosophy 3.1 General appraisal: South Africa’s first African philosopher? 1 4. Dissertatio ad lauream in Facultate Juris Canonici apud Pontificiam Universitatem Urbanianam 5. “The nuclear blast of spring”: Poetry 6. Writings of a South African priest 7. Anthropology and religion 8. Interlude: The publication spurt of 1996 9. Diviners and prophets: The last, incomplete, work 9.1 Final appraisal
Timeline Mabona primary bibliography Notes on the sources for interviews and biography References
**The life and work of a remarkably versatile and pioneering South African thinker
**Mongameli Anthony Mabona (1929) is a singular South African scholar with an exceptional life path. Yet, he is a wrongly forgotten figure today. British imperialism and apartheid shaped the world into which he was born and, to a large extent, these powers carved out his destiny for him. Nevertheless, a curious set of coincidences enabled him to obtain a tertiary education as a priest, to pursue his doctoral studies in Italy and to befriend Alioune Diop. He is one of the first published philosophers of Anglophone Africa and holds doctorates in theology and anthropology. His opposition to institutionalized racism – an opposition which included his co-authoring the 1970 “Black Priests’ Manifesto” – eventually led to his exile. This book is the first study of any kind devoted to Mabona. It documents his life and offers a synoptic reading of his scholarly and poetic work.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Muslim Marriage and Non-Marriage: Religion, Politics, and Intimate Life
Annelies Moors and Julie McBrien
Part I—The Politicization of Marriage: Problematization, Agency, and Activism
Troublesome Marriages and the Politics of the Future in Kyrgyzstan
Julie McBrien
Problematizing Early Marriages : Development Narratives and Refugee Experiences in Jordan
Dina Zbeidy
The Politics of Cohesion : Salafi Preachers and the Problematization of Muslim Marriages in the Netherlands
Martijn de Koning
Palestinian Women Prisoners : The Relational Politics of Incarceration, Marriage, and Separation
Samah Saleh and Annelies Moors
Part II—The Micro-politics of (Non-)marriage: Intimacy, Materiality, and Social Transformation
Cohabitation and ‘Urfi Marriages in Tunisia : Public Discourse and Personal Narratives
Iris Kolman
Exceptionally Ordinary: Singling out Single Mothers in Morocco
Annerienke Fioole
Configuring Communities: The Materialities of Dubai’s Migrant Marriages
Joud Alkorani
The Dower among Moroccan Muslims in the Netherlands : Generational and Gendered Shifts
Loubna el Morabet
When Islamic Marriage Travels to the Netherlands : Convert Muslim Women (Re)Signifying the Marriage Guardian and the Dower
Annelies Moors and Vanessa Vroon-Najem
Part III—Interfaith Marriage: Religious Difference and Multiple Positionalities
The Intimate Politics of Publicly Staging “Mixed Couples” : The Gendered Racialization of a Poster Campaign
Shifra Kisch, Rahma Bavelaar, and Annelies Moors
“We are an Example of Ceuta’s Convivencia” : Muslim–Christian Marriages at Europe’s North-African Border
Ibtisam Sadegh
Interfaith Marriages in Indonesia : Between the Law, State Ideology, and Progressive Muslim Voices
Eva F. Nisa
Contracting Coptic-Muslim Marriage in Egypt : Class, Gender, and Clerical Mediation in the Administrative Management of Religious “Crossings”
Rahma Bavelaar
About the authors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aPerspectives and practices of couples in unconventional Muslim marriages.
Unconventional Muslim marriages have been topics of heated public debate. Around the globe, religious scholars, policy makers, political actors, media personalities, and women’s activists discuss, promote, or reject unregistered, transnational, interreligious and other boundary-crossing marriages. Couples entering into such marriages, however, often have different concerns from those publicly discussed. Based on ethnographic research in Europe, the Middle East, North Africa and Asia, the chapters of this volume examine couples’ motivations for, aspirations about, and abilities to enter into these marriages. The contributions show the diverse ways in which such marriages are concluded, and inquire into how they are performed, authorized or contested as Muslim marriages. These marriages may challenge existing ties of belonging and transform boundaries between religious and other communities, but they may also, and sometimes simultaneously, reproduce and solidify them.
Building on insights from different disciplines, both from the social sciences (anthropology, political science, gender and sexuality studies) and from the humanities (history, Islamic legal studies, religious studies), the authors address a wide range of controversial Muslim marriages (unregistered, interreligious, transnational, etc.), and include the views of religious scholars, state authorities, and political actors and activists, as well as the couples themselves, their families, and their wider social circle.
Contributors: Joud Alkorani (Radboud University), Rahma Bavelaar (University of Applied Sciences Leiden), Loubna Elmorabet (University of Amsterdam), Annerienke Fioole (University of Amsterdam), Shifra Kisch (University College Utrecht), Iris Kolman (University of Amsterdam), Martijn de Koning (Radboud University), Eva F. Nisa (Australian National University), Ibtisam Sadegh (University of Malta), Samah Saleh (An-Najah National University), Vanessa Vroon-Najem (Amsterdam Museum), Dina Zbeidy (University of Applied Sciences Leiden).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction
Elsa Mescoli and Jean-Michel Lafleur
Chapter 1. Conceptualising immigrants’ access to social assistance and their interaction with street-level bureaucrats
Roberta Perna and Hanne Vandermeerschen
Chapter 2. Social assistance bureaucracies and new migrants: the Belgian context
Abraham Franssen
Chapter 3. Applying mixed-method design in the study of immigrant social protection
Elsa Mescoli, Angeliki Konstantinidou, Marije Reidsma and Jérémy Mandin
PART I. Social assistance for newly arrived immigrants
Chapter 4. Explaining variations in forms of service delivery for newcomers
Elsa Mescoli, Hanne Vandermeerschen, Adriana Costa Santos and Carla Mascia
Chapter 5. Understanding challenges and pitfalls in the service delivery to newly arrived immigrants
Adriana Costa Santos, Hanne Vandermeerschen and Elsa Mescoli
Chapter 6. Labour market activation and newly arrived immigrants
Hanne Vandermeerschen, Adriana Costa Santos and Elsa Mescoli
Conclusion Part I
Hanne Vandermeerschen
PART II. Policy in practice: the decision-making process
Introduction
Elsa Mescoli
Chapter 7. The allocation of social assistance as a hierarchised decision-making process
Elsa Mescoli and Hanne Vandermeerschen
Chapter 8. The discretion of social workers towards newly arrived migrants
Elsa Mescoli
Conclusion Part II
Elsa Mescoli
PART III. Accessing welfare services in Belgium: the perspective of newly arrived immigrants
Chapter 9. Pathways of access: analysing newly arrived immigrants’ access to welfare services
Marije Reidsma and Michelle Crijns
Chapter 10. The newcomers’ perception of social assistance provision and its organisation
Adriana Costa Santos and Youri Lou Vertongen
Chapter 11. Developing forms of agency: how do newcomers deal with social services
Jérémy Mandin
Conclusion Part III
Jérémy Mandin
Part IV. Conclusion
Hanne Vandermeerschen and Peter De Cuyper
About the authors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aThe needs of newcomers and the provided social assistance.
The topic of social assistance for migrant newcomers often sparks heated public debate and remains a prominent concern on the policy agenda. Society has experienced a growing level of diversity. This reality gives rise to new demands and changing profiles of individuals who benefit from welfare services. Welfare institutions, which are responsible for providing social assistance, play a crucial role in granting access to social benefits for newcomers. Moreover, the provision of social assistance can significantly influence the settlement and integration processes of migrants.
This book provides empirical insights into the alignment between the needs of newcomers and the service provided to them. It examines the accessibility of social assistance for newcomers from a comprehensive perspective, encompassing aspects such as gaining access (including equal access for all) and service availability. By focusing on the Belgian Public Centres for Social Welfare as a case study, the authors explore the policies and practices related to social assistance and labour market activation for newcomers and the factors that influence individuals’ access to their rights.
By incorporating the perspectives of all the relevant stakeholders involved, drawing on the insights of social workers and managers as well as the experiences of newcomers themselves, this book offers a unique understanding of the interactions between immigrants, the welfare state, and street-level bureaucrats. It provides valuable insights for enhancing service provision, striving for a more inclusive approach.
Contributors: Adriana Costa Santos (Université Saint-Louis Bruxelles), Michelle Crijns (Wilde Ganzen Foundation), Peter De Cuyper (KU Leuven), Abraham Franssen (Université Saint-Louis Bruxelles), Angeliki Konstantinidou (University of Liège), Jean-Michel Lafleur (University of Liège), Jérémy Mandin (University of Liège), Carla Mascia (Université Libre de Bruxelles), Elsa Mescoli (University of Liège), Roberta Perna (Complutense University of Madrid), Marije Reidsma (KU Leuven), Hanne Vandermeerschen (KU Leuven), Youri Lou Vertongen (Université Saint-Louis Bruxelles).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction
1. The Manifestation of Identities in a Plural Post-Secular Europe
Johan Leman, Erkan Toğuşlu and İsmail Mesut Sezgin
Part I: Post-Migrant Interactions/Identifications
2. New and Old Identity Patterns of Religious Young Muslims in Germany
Cüneyd Dinç
3. Connecting Home and School: on the Second generation Muslim Children's Agency in Belgian Schools
Goedroen Juchtmans
4. Immigrant Identity, Social Adaptation and Post-Secular Society in Europe
Marcel MeÄiar
5. Manufacturing Self-Respect: Stigma, Pride and Cultural Juggling among Dalit Youth in Spain
Kathryn Lum
6. A Case of Euro-Muslimness in Poland? The Polish Tartars
Katarzyna Warminska
Part II. Non-Migrant, Anti-Islam Interactions/Identifications
7. 'Anti-Islamisation of Europe' Activism or the Phenomenon of an Allegedly 'Non-Racist' Islamophobia
Vincent Legrand
8. Discourses on Religion and Identity in Norway. Right-Wing Radicalism and Anti-Immigration Parties
Frédérique Harry
9. Competing Forms of Identity and the Concept of Sovereignty in Europe
Murat Sevencan
10. Democratic Theory and the Autonomy of Non-Christian Religious Courts in the UK
Ephraim Nimni
11. Islamophobia and the Rise of Europe's Multiculturalism
Chris Allen
Conclusion
12. Ethnic-Religious Intersections and New Multiculturalism
Johan Leman, Erkan Toğuşlu and İsmail Mesut Sezgin
About the authors
Multiculturalism in present-day Europe
How to understand Europe’s post-migrant Islam on the one hand and indigenous, anti-Islamic movements on the other? What impact will religion have on the European secular world and its regulation? How do social and economic transitions on a transnational scale challenge ethnic and religious identifications? These questions are at the very heart of the debate on multiculturalism in present-day Europe and are addressed by the authors in this book. Through the lens of post-migrant societies, manifestations of identity appear in pluralized, fragmented, and deterritorialized forms. This new European multiculturalism calls into question the nature of boundaries between various ethnic-religious groups, as well as the demarcation lines within ethnic-religious communities. Although the contributions in this volume focus on Islam, ample attention is also paid to Christianity, Judaism, and Hinduism. The authors present empirical data from cases in Turkey, Germany, France, Spain, the United Kingdom, Poland, Norway, Sweden, and Belgium, and sharpen the perspectives on the religious-ethnic manifestations of identity in the transnational context of 21st-century Europe.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contributors
Chris Allen (University of Birmingham), Cüneyt Dinç (Süleyman Şah University, Istanbul), Frédérique Harry (University of Paris-Sorbonne), Goedroen Juchtmans (KU Leuven and IKKS, Antwerp), Vincent Legrand (Université catholique de Louvain), Johan Leman (KU Leuven), Kathryn Lum (European University Institute, Florence), Marcel Meciar (Yeditepe University, Istanbul), Ephraim Nimni (Queen's University Belfast), Murat Sevencan (Suleyman Sah University, Istanbul), İsmail Mesut Sezgin (Leeds Metropolitan University), Erkan Toğuşlu (KU Leuven), Katarzyna Warmińska (Cracow University)
List of Figures List of Tables Foreword Preface
1. Oil Wealth and Development in Uganda and Beyond: Prospects, Opportunities and Challenges Arnim Langer, Ukoha Ukiwo and Pamela Mbabazi
Part I — Institutional and Regulatory Framework, Policies and Challenges
2. Uganda’s Oil Governance Institutions: Fit for Purpose? Pamela Mbabazi and Martin Muhangi
3. Courting the Oil Curse or Playing by the Rules? An Analysis of the Legal and Regulatory Framework Governing Oil in Uganda J. Oloka-Onyango
4. Keeping Corruption in Check in Uganda’s Oil Sector? Uganda’s Challenge to Let Everybody Eat, and Not Just the Lucky Few Kathleen Brophy and Peter Wandera
5. Closed but Ordered : How the Political Settlement Shapes Uganda’s Deals with International Oil Companies Badru Bukenya and Jaqueline Nakaiza
Part II — Macroeconomic and Fiscal Framework, Policies and Challenges
6. Oil Wealth in Uganda: Analysis of the Macroeconomic Policy Framework Corti Paul Lakuma
7. Oil Revenues and Social Development in Uganda Joseph Mawejje
8. Getting a Good Deal? An Analysis of Uganda’s Oil Fiscal Regime Wilson Bahati Kazi
9. Human Resources and Oil in Uganda : An Analysis of Uganda’s Human Resource Development for the Oil Sector Jackson A. Mwakali and Jackson N.M. Byaruhanga
Part III — Other Major Governance Polices and Challenges
10. Environmental Sustainability : An Afterthought or a Key Objective for Uganda’s Oil Sector? Moses Isabirye
11. Land Grabbing in the Albertine Graben : Implications for Women’s Land Rights and the Oil Industry in Uganda Roberts K. Muriisa and Specioza Twinamasiko
12. Expecting Eldorado? An Analysis of Ugandans’ Expectations of Their Country’s Oil Wealth Byaruhanga Musiime Chris
13. The Management of Social Tensions and Community Grievances in the Albertine Region of Uganda Tom Ogwang
Part IV — International Comparison
14. Nigeria’s Oil Governance Regime: Challenges and Policies Ukoha Ukiwo
15. Ghana’s Oil Governance Regime: Challenges and Policies Peter Quartey and Emmanuel Abbey
16. Kenya’s Oil Governance Regime: Challenges and Policies Germano Mwabu
Part V — A Way Forward
17. Oil Wealth and Development in Uganda and Beyond: Conclusions and Policy Recommendations Ukoha Ukiwo, Pamela Mbabazi, and Arnim Langer
Illustration Credits About the authors
Multidisciplinary perspectives to governance of oil in African countries
Large quantities of oil were discovered in the Albertine Rift Valley in Western Uganda in 2006. The sound management of these oil resources and revenues is undoubtedly one of the key public policy challenges for Uganda as it is for other African countries with large oil and/or gas endowments. With oil expected to start flowing in 2021, the current book analyses how this East African country is preparing for the challenge of effectively, efficiently, and transparently managing its oil sector and resources. Adopting a multidisciplinary, comprehensive, and comparative approach, the book identifies a broad scope of issues that need to be addressed in order for Uganda to realise the full potential of its oil wealth for national economic transformation. Predominantly grounded in local scholarship and including chapters drawing on the experiences of Nigeria, Ghana, and Kenya, the book blazes a trail on governance of African oil in an era of emerging producers. Oil Wealth and Development in Uganda and Beyond will be of great interest to social scientists and economic and social policy makers in oil-producing countries. It is suitable for course adoption across such disciplines as International/Global Affairs, Political Economy, Geography, Environmental Studies, Economics, Energy Studies, Development, Politics, Peace, Security and African Studies.
Contributors: Badru Bukenya (Makerere University), Moses Isabirye (Busitema University), Wilson Bahati Kazi (Uganda Revenue Authority), Corti Paul Lakuma (Economic Policy Research Centre), Joseph Mawejje (Economic Policy Research Centre), Pamela Mbabazi (Uganda National Planning Authority), Martin Muhangi (independent researcher), Roberts Muriisa (Mbarara University of Science and Technology), Chris Byaruhanga Musiime (independent researcher), Germano Mwabu (University of Nairobi), Jackson A. Mwakali (Makerere University), Tom Owang (Mbarara University of Science and Technology), Joseph Oloka-Onyango (Makerere University), Peter Quartey (University of Ghana), Peter Wandera (Transparency International Uganda), Kathleen Brophy (Transparency International Uganda), Jaqueline Nakaiza (independent researcher), Babra Beyeza (independent researcher), Jackson Byaruhanga (Bank of Uganda), Emmanuel Abbey (University of Ghana).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Lijst van afkortingen
Voorwoord
Inleiding
Annette Kuhk, Hilde Heynen, Liesbeth Huybrechts, Jan Schreurs en Frank Moulaert
Deel 1
Beweging in participatie in Vlaanderen en Brussel, van 1968 tot nu
1.1 Geschiedenis en concepten van participatie bij ruimtelijke vraagstukken
Annette Kuhk, Jan Schreurs, Seppe De Blust
1.2 Wellicht heeft participatie ertoe bijgedragen – wellicht zal participatie ertoe bijdragen
Hanne Van Reusel in gesprek met Dag Boutsen
1.3 Mythes over participatie in wijkontwikkeling: Het Antwerpse Schipperskwartier als case
Pieter Van den Broeck
1.4 Wisselende participatietrajecten bij wijzigende planningsoriëntaties : een terugblik op de Brusselse praktijk
Annette Kuhk
1.5 Het einde van sociale innovatie in stedelijke ontwikkelingsstrategieën? Antwerpen en buurtontwikkelingsmaatschappij ‘BOM’
Frank Moulaert, Etienne Christiaens, Bie Bosmans
Deel 2Ruimte voor participatie en rollen van actoren
2.1 Transdisciplinaire praktijken: participatieve onderzoekstrajecten als collectieve leerprocessen
Barbara Van Dyck, Frank Moulaert, Annette Kuhk
2.2 Ruimtelijke capaciteitsopbouw doorheen democratische dialoog : een inzicht in een participatief ontwerpproces van een alternatieve toekomst voor het Genkse Kolenspoor
Liesbeth Huybrechts, Barbara Roosen, Ward Verbakel, Jan Schreurs
2.3 Ambiguïteit als strategie: kritische praktijken in de neoliberale stad
Seppe De Blust, Tim Devos, Michael Kaethler, Hilde Heynen
2.4 ‘Becoming (a) swallow’: over kunst en emancipatie
Michael Kaethler en Wouter Bervoets in gesprek met Els Dietvorst
Deel 3
Participatie in/door/met ontwerp
3.1 Participatie en ontwerp: architecten voor het volk
Hilde Heynen
3.2 Observeren, reproduceren, ageren: activatie vanuit ontwerp
Annette Kuhk en Ruth Segers in gesprek met Petra Pferdmenges
3.3 Participatie tussen ontwerpend onderhandelen en ontworpen protest
Erik Van Daele, Jan Schreurs
3.4 Van uitgebreide masterplanning naar tijdelijke stedenbouw in Luchtbal
Veerle Cox, Bruno De Meulder
3.5 De ‘tijd van de participant’ stemt niet overeen met deze van het project
Hilde Heynen in gesprek met André Loeckx
Epiloog: Participatie in ruimtelijk beleid: navigeren tussen ‘het politieke’ en ‘de politiek’?
Annette Kuhk, Jan Schreurs, Hilde Heynen, Liesbeth Huybrechts en Frank Moulaert
Over de auteurs, respondenten en interviewers
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aKritische studie van participatieprocessen in architectuur, stedenbouw en ruimtelijke ordening
‘Participatie’ werd, in de nasleep van 1968, een sleutelwoord in architectuur, stedenbouw en ruimtelijke ordening in Vlaanderen en Brussel. Sindsdien zijn processen van medezeggenschap, inspraak en coproductie min of meer ingeburgerd in ontwerp- en planningspraktijken. Het enthousiasme voor deze processen is aan wisselende invloeden onderhevig en participatie staat dus lang niet altijd centraal in de feitelijke beslissingsstromen. Dit boek documenteert deze golfbewegingen aan de hand van historische overzichten, gevalstudies, interviews en kritische reflecties. Daarbij wordt nagedacht over de rol van actoren, de kracht van het ontwerp en het belang van (de) politiek. De wetenschappelijke inzichten en praktijkgebaseerde beschouwingen rond de drie grote participatiegolven van 1968 tot nu ronden af met een prospectieve kijk op participatieve benaderingen en een kritische reflectie op toekomstige sociaal-politieke uitdagingen. Deze veelheid aan complementaire invalshoeken maakt Participatiegolven tot een onmisbaar referentiewerk voor een breed lezerspubliek, van architecten, planologen en ontwerpers tot sociale geografen en stadssociologen, en van studenten tot academische en praktijkgerichte professionals.
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
Deze publicatie is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Bijdragende auteurs
Wouter Bervoets (IDEA Consult / KU Leuven), Bie Bosmans (vroegere coordinator BOM, Antwerpen), Dag Boutsen (KU Leuven), Etienne Christiaens (betrokken geweest bij het Federaal Grootstedenbeleid), Veerle Cox (Intercommunale Leiedal), Seppe De Blust (Endeavour), Bruno De Meulder (KU Leuven), Tim Devos (Endeavour), Els Dietvorst (kunstenaar), Hilde Heynen (KU Leuven), Liesbeth Huybrechts (Universiteit Hasselt), Michael Kaethler (KU Leuven), Annette Kuhk (KU Leuven), André Loeckx (KU Leuven), Frank Moulaert (KU Leuven), Petra Pferdmenges (Alive Architecture), Jan Schreurs (KU Leuven), Ruth Segers (KU Leuven), Erik Vandaele (KU Leuven), Pieter Van den Broeck (KU Leuven), Barbara Van Dyck (University of Sussex), Hanne Vanreusel (KU Leuven), Ward Verbakel (plusofficearchitects)
The challenges and limits for musicians dealing with texts.
To perform a musical score implies the transformation of a symbolically coded text into vibrant sound. In Performing by the Book? a carefully selected cadre of artist-researchers dissects this delicate act in critical ways. Offering first-hand insights into the notational, structural and interpretative challenges faced by musicians in dealing with texts of all kinds, the chapters traverse the spectrum between the Middle Ages and the age of Stockhausen. In a harmonious blend of scholarly allure and individual artistry, free from academic obfuscation, the contributors keep a keen eye on the limits of interpretation, both in terms of the interpretative process itself and of the balance between textual faithfulness and artistic autonomy. This comprehensive volume is an indispensable guide for everyone interested in the relationship between musical performance and texts.
Contributing authors: Niels Berentsen (Haute école de musique de Genève-Neuchâtel (HES-SO) / conductor of Diskantores), Björn Schmelzer (artistic director of Graindelavoix / independent researcher), Jonathan Ayerst (freelance organist and improviser), Elizabeth Dobbin (Le Jardin Secret / Haute école de musique de Genève (HES-SO)), Camilla Köhnken (freelance pianist-researcher / Bern Academy of the Arts), George Kennaway (cellist, conductor, teacher, publisher and musicologist / University of Leeds), Kate Bennett Wadsworth (cellist / Guildhall School of Music and Drama), Nir Cohen-Shalit (conductor and independent researcher), Xiangning Lin (pianist / Yong Siew Toh Conservatory of Music, National University of Singapore), Clare Lesser (independent performer, musicologist and composer).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$amusic =653 \\$atexts =653 \\$aartistic research =653 \\$aperformance studies =653 \\$amusical interpretation =653 \\$ahistorically informed performance =700 1\$aForment, Bruno,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000201575485$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-0157-5485 =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aOrpheus Institute Series ;$vvol. 2. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665591$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/339860/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05422nam 22006252 4500 =001 82ef0c27-38f2-4fe0-af41-3c18914fc126 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20202020\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702110$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663139$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663146$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663139$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJFSJ$2bicssc =072 7$aAN$2bicssc =072 7$aJFC$2bicssc =072 7$aJFD$2bicssc =072 7$aJMQ$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC032000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPER011000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC052000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPSY013000$2bisacsh =072 7$aJBSF$2thema =072 7$aATD$2thema =072 7$aJBC$2thema =072 7$aJMQ$2thema =245 00$aPerforming Hysteria :$bImages and Imaginations of Hysteria /$cedited by Johanna Braun. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2020. =264 \4$c©2020 =300 \\$a1 online resource (264 pages): $b15 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroduction Johanna Braun
HYSTORIES REVISITED. Hysterical Epidemics and Social Media Elaine Showalter
WANDERING IMAGINATIONS OF RACE AND HYSTERIA. The Origins of the Hysterical Body in Psychoanalysis Sander L. Gilman
TRAUMATIC DANCES OF “THE NON-SELF”. Bodily Incoherence and the Hysterical Archive Jonathan W. Marshall
THE PHANTOM ERECTION. Freud’s Dora and Hysteria’s Unreadabilities Dominik Zechner
“A SLIGHT HYSTERICAL TENDENCY”. Performing Diagnosis in Charlotte Perkins Gilman’s The Yellow Wallpaper Vivian Delchamps
HYSTERIA ACTIVISM. Feminist Collectives for the Twenty-First Century Elke Krasny
DELILLO AND MASS HYSTERIA Sean Metzger
HYSTERIA IN THE AGE OF MECHANICAL REPRODUCTION. Back to the “Image Factory” in WestWorld Cecily Devereux
#METOO’S FIRST HORROR FILM. Male Hysteria and the New Final Girl in 2018’s Revenge Tim Posada
HYSTERICAL CURE. Performing Disability in the Possession Film Johanna Braun
Cross-disciplinary analysis of contemporary images and representations of hysteria
We seem to be living in hysterical times. A simple Google search reveals the sheer bottomless well of “hysterical” discussions on diverse topics such as the #metoo movement, Trumpianism, border wars, Brexit, transgender liberation, Black Lives Matter, COVID-19, and climate change, to name only a few. Against the backdrop of such recent deployments of hysteria in popular discourse––particularly as they emerge in times of material and hermeneutic crisis––Performing Hysteria re-engages the notion of “hysteria”.
Performing Hysteria rigorously mines late 20th- and early 21st-century (primarily visual) culture for signs of hysteria. The various essays in this volume contribute to the multilayered and complex discussions that surround and foster this resurgent interest in hysteria––covering such areas as art, literature, theatre, film, television, dance; crossing such disciplines as cultural studies, political science, philosophy, history, media, disability, race and ethnicity, and gender studies; and analysing stereotypical images and representations of the hysteric in relation to cultural sciences and media studies. Of particular importance is the volume's insistence on taking the intersection of hysteria and performance seriously.
Contributors: Johanna Braun (University of Vienna), Vivian Delchamps (University of California), Cecily Devereux (University of Alberta), Sander L. Gilman (Emory University), Elke Krasny (Academy of Fine Arts Vienna), Jonathan W. Marshall (Edith Cowan University, Western Australian Academy of Performing Arts), Sean Metzger (University of California), Tim Posada (Saddleback College), Elaine Showalter (Princeton University), Dominik Zechner (Brown University / Rutgers University)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Preface
Acknowledgments
List of Abbreviations
Part One – Essay
I Historical background
1. The elements from antiquity to the Middle Ages
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Aristotle on elements and mixtures
1.3 Towards the medieval debate: intellectuals and methods
2. Four main theories of the elements in the Middle Ages
2.1 Alexander of Aphrodisias
2.2 Avicenna
2.3 Averroes
2.4 The Common Opinion
3. The status quaestionis on the elements at the turn of fifteenth and sixteenth century
II Pietro Pomponazzi on the elements
1. Stages of Pomponazzi’s teaching on the elements
2. Pomponazzi’s reconstruction of the medieval debate
3. The interpretation of Avicenna
3.1 Exposition and sources
3.2 Pomponazzi vs Avicenna
4. The interpretation of Averroes and the Averroists
4.1 Exposition and sources
4.2 Pomponazzi vs Averroes
4.3 The comparison with Averroes in the single quaestio (T.6)
4.4 Concluding remarks
5. The Common Opinion
5.1 Exposition and sources
5.2 Pomponazzi vs the Common Opinion
5.3 Final remarks on the Common Opinion
6. Pomponazzi on the elements
6.1 The mixing process and the genesis of mixtures
6.2 Pomponazzi’s sources
6.3 Solution of the aporias of the Common Opinion
6.4 Classification of mixtures
6.5 Final conjectures on mixtures
6.6 An overall judgement
III Philological and stylistic aspects of the Edition
1. The present edition: texts and copyists
2. Recensio codicum
3. Descriptio codicum
3.1 Text 1 (Winter 1520/21)
3.2 Texts 2–3 (Winter 1521/22)
3.3 Text 4 (November 1523)
3.4 Text 5 (April 1525)
3.5 Text 6 (uncertain date)
4. Stylistic aspects of Pomponazzi’s lectures
4.1 In between a commentary and a treatise
4.2 Structure of the quaestiones
4.3 Teaching devices
5. The Critical Editions
Part two – Texts
I. Text 1 – Excerpts from the lecture on De coelo III
II. Text 2 – Excerpts from the lecture on De generatione et corruptione I
III. Text 3 – Excerpts from the lecture on De generatione et corruptione II
IV. Text 4 – Excerpts from the lecture on Meteora IV
V. Text 5 – Excerpts from the lecture on De sensu et sensato
VI Text 6 – Quaestio de remanentia elementorum in mixto
Major dates in the life of Pietro Pomponazzi
Bibliography
Indexes
First ever editions of texts on the elements from Pomponazzi’s lectures on De coelo, De sensu, Meteorologica and De generatione et corruptione.
In medieval and early modern natural philosophy, very few issues were as controversial as the nature of the elements. From the thirteenth up until the sixteenth century, European thinkers discussed this problem with growing interest. Defining the nature of the elements was key to deciphering the very structure of the universe and the essence of things. Along with five primary texts, here edited for the first time, this book discusses one of the most original contributions to this debate, that of Renaissance philosopher Pietro Pomponazzi (d. 1525). Pomponazzi’s account, developed in university lectures, holds significance for two reasons. First, it provides a thorough description of the most influential doctrines on the elements presented by medieval scholars, opening a window onto three hundred years of prior discussions on the topic. Second, Pomponazzi also develops his own views on the issue, explicitly defining them as ‘heretical’ to emphasise his departure from all opinions expressed before him.
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =536 \\$aUniversity of Siegen =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aElements =653 \\$aHylomorphism =653 \\$aAristotelianism =653 \\$aMatter =653 \\$aPrimary qualities =653 \\$aSubstantial forms =653 \\$aPietro Pomponazzi =653 \\$aRenaissance Universities =653 \\$aLatin Averroism =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aAncient and Medieval Philosophy - Series 1 ;$vvol. 3. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665607$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/340524/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04526nam 22005772 4500 =001 4f369a73-49de-468b-bbea-407137615905 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20242024\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462704190$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461665706$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461665799$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665706$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHPCA$2bicssc =072 7$aLIT004190$2bisacsh =072 7$aPHI002000$2bisacsh =072 7$aDBSG$2thema =072 7$aQDHA$2thema =100 1\$aTsiampokalos, Theofanis,$eauthor.$0(orcid)0000000273129759$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-7312-9759 =245 10$aPlutarch and Rhetoric :$bThe Relationship of Rhetoric to Ethics, Politics and Education in the First and Second Centuries AD /$cTheofanis Tsiampokalos. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2024. =264 \4$c©2024 =300 \\$a1 online resource. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aPlutarchea Hypomnemata ;$vvol. 2. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgements
Note to the Reader
Introduction
1. Plutarch and Rhetoric
2. A ‘conversion’ from rhetoric to philosophy?
3. The texts at issue and related problems
4. The analytical scope of the present study
Teaching and Persuasion
1. Introduction
2. Philosophical teaching: its content and political dimension
3. Persuasion in the service of teaching
4. Examples of individuals who persuade and teach
5. Parrhesia and trust
6. Conclusion
Character and Speech
1. Introduction
2. Character as a means of persuasion
3. The subsidiary role of rhetoric
4. Conclusion
Rhetoric and Beneficence
1. Introduction
2. Other means of exercising power
3. Rhetoric in place of beneficence
4. Why rhetoric?
5. Conclusion
The Philosopher and the Sophists
1. Introduction
2. The critique of the sophists
3. The direct confrontation in the lecture hall
4. The indirect confrontation in the political arena
5. The reception of the confrontation in subsequent generations
6. Conclusion
Conclusion
Bibliography
Index Locorum
Index Nominum et Rerum
A fundamental reappraisal of Plutarch’s attitude towards rhetoric.
Plutarch was not only a skilled writer, but also lived during the Second Sophistic, a period of cultural renaissance. This book offers new insights into Plutarch’s seemingly moderate attitude towards rhetoric. The hypothesis explored in this study introduces, for the first time, the broader literary and cultural contexts that influenced and restricted the scope of Plutarch’s message. When these contexts are considered, a new perspective emerges that differs from that found in earlier studies. It paints a picture of a philosopher who may not regard rhetoric as a lesser means of persuasion, but who faces challenges in openly articulating this stance in his public discourse.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Acknowledgements
Abbreviations, titles, editions
Introduction
Chapter 1 Reading Plato
1. In search of irrational soul
2. Chaos and providence: flexible consistency and the Timaeus 2.1. Macro level: selection, arrangement, and function
2.2. Micro level: Plutarch’s interpretation of Timaeus 53b
3. Moralising the cosmic soul: Plato’s ‘development’ and Laws 10
3.1. Invisible soul and soul as self-moved motion
3.2. Priority of soul
3.3. Maleficent soul
3.4. Consistency and ‘development’
4. Cosmic cycles: literalness and the Statesman myth
4.1. Proclus on combining Timaeus and Statesman: introducing the problem
4.2. On the Generation of the Soul: facing the problem
4.3. Who or what is the cause for cosmic reversal?
4.4. In what period are we now?
4.5. What is Plutarch doing?
5. Concluding remarks
Chapter 2 Music
1. The demiurge and the musician
2. Music in heaven? The song of the Muses
3. Divine harmony on earth? The limits of inspiration
4. Concluding remarks
Chapter 3 Symposium
1. God and the symposiarch: Sympotic Questions 1.2 and 7.6
2. The cosmos and the symposium: Sympotic Questions 7.4 and 2.10
3. The χώρα and the venue: Sympotic Questions 5.5
4. Concluding remarks
Chapter 4 Politics
1. The Timaeus in the Phocion 2. The ruler and the demiurge in the historical works
3. The ruler and the sun: To an Uneducated Ruler 4. Concluding remarks
Chapter 5 On Tranquillity of Mind 1. Κρίσις (§ 1–5): how to deal with τύχη?
1.1. What is the problem?
1.2. How is the problem presented?
2. A shift in the ἄσκησις (§ 14–15): from internal to external synthesis
2.1. Beginning the ἄσκησις (§ 6–13): internal synthesis
2.2. Time and the self: memory (§ 14)
2.3. Becoming and the self: dualism (§ 15)
2.4. Looking back (§ 8) and continuing the ἄσκησις (§ 16–18): external synthesis
2.5. Interlude: time and becoming in Consolation to My Wife 3. ‘The cosmos is a temple’ (§ 19–20)
3.1. Intertextuality
3.2. Imagery
3.3. Contrasting images and intertexts? On Exile and Plutarch’s ‘cosmopolitanism’
3.4. Similar images and intertexts? Θεωρία and Second Sophistic cosmic festivals
4. Concluding remarks
Chapter 6 Dialogue on Love 1. The Platonist and the body
2. Eros and Aphrodite as cosmic gods (755e–757a)
2.1. A doxography of cosmic love
2.2. Euripides’ Hippolytus: a threat to the erotic cosmos
3. Eros, the sun, and the cave: rewriting Plato’s Republic (764a–766b)
4. Interlude: reflecting the intelligible
5. Cosmic and human love (770a–b)
6. Concluding remarks
Concluding remarks
Bibliography
Index locorum
General index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aA groundbreaking and wide-ranging presentation of Plutarch’s ethics based on the cosmological foundation of his ethical thought
Plutarch of Chaeronea (c. 45-120 CE) is the most prolific and influential moral philosopher in the Platonic tradition. This book is a fundamental reappraisal of Plutarch’s ethical thought. It shows how Plutarch based his ethics on his particular interpretation of Plato’s cosmology. Our quest for the good life should start by considering the good cosmos in which we live. The practical consequences of this cosmological foundation permeate various domains of Greco-Roman life: the musician, the organiser of a drinking party, and the politician should all be guided by cosmology. After exploring these domains, this book offers in-depth interpretations of two works that can only be fully understood by paying attention to cosmological aspects: Dialogue on Love and On Tranquillity of Mind.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Contents
Acknowledgements
Prologue
Plutarch and the history of science: the case of Quaestiones naturales
1. Plato, Plutarch and scientific infancy
2. Date and chronology of Quaestiones naturales: a ‘life’s work’?
3. The value of Plutarch’s natural problems
4. Classical philology and the petrification of science
5. Status quaestionis
6. Note on translations and abbreviations
Introduction
1. Problems, problems, problems (and Aristotelian precedents)
1.1. Quaestiones naturales and the Aristotelian genre and tradition of natural problems
1. Preliminary remarks on Plutarch’s Naturwissenschaft
2. Quaestiones naturales: the work of a Plutarchus Aristotelicus?
3. The genre of problems and the Aristotelian tradition of natural problems
4. Internal organisation of Plutarch’s natural problems (microstructure)
5. Coherent reading in Quaestiones naturales and convivales (macrostructure)
6. The title and its programmatic value 1
1.2. Problems related to Plutarch’s scientific discourse
1. Trifles unworthy of Plutarch? Some remarks on authenticity
2. The rhetoric of scientific discourse according to Plutarch
3. The problem of style
4. The problem of morality
5. A ‘generic’ solution
6. Conclusion and new questions
2. The position of Quaestiones naturales in the corpus Plutarcheum
2.1. Scientific traits in the corpus Plutarcheum
1. Intellectual and literary interest of natural phenomena
2. Cluster analysis in Quaestiones naturales
3. Scientific digressions in the Vitae
4. Indirect references to Quaestiones naturales
2.2. A comparative study of Quaestiones naturales and Quaestiones convivales
1. The level of elocutio
2. The level of dispositio
3. The level of inventio
2.3. Hypomnematic text genetics of Quaestiones naturales and Quaestiones convivales
1. Historicity and fiction in Quaestiones convivales
2. Problems and personal notes
3. Zetetic autonomy in Quaestiones naturales
2.4. Opening up Plutarch’s zetetic archive
1. The issue of publication: problems as functional literature
2. Classification and overlap
3. Conclusion and new questions
3. Quaestiones naturales and zetetic παιδεία
3.1. Sitz im Leben: readership and educational context
1. Natural problems and philosophical σχολή
2. Plutarch’s academy
3. Digestive discussions and problematic promenades
4. Quaestiones naturales as school text: technicality and complexity
5. The dialogue between author and reader: vivacity and historicity
3.2. Quaestiones naturales as a preamble to metaphysics
1. Natural problems as a means of exercising the mind
2. Natural problems as a means of easing the mind
3. Conclusion and new questions
4. Plutarch’s Platonic world view: the aetiological design of Quaestiones naturales and its scientific context
4.1. Science and its foes? The ancient scientific value of Quaestiones naturales
4.1.1. Saving popular beliefs: the wonders and paradoxes of nature
1. Natural problems and the fabric of strangeness
2. Democritus and the cucumber
3. Plutarch’s popular beliefs: anti-Aristotelian and anti-Stoic dynamics
4.1.2. Plutarch’s dualistic causality: rationalising the divine and the use of myth and poetry
1. Plato’s scientific revolution
2. Science, religion and mythology
3. Science and poetry
4.2. Constructing scientific authority: between continuity, ingenuity and innovation
4.2.1. Character and use of the scientific tradition
1. Quotations from scientific prose authors
2. Problematisation of scientific knowledge
4.2.2. Scientific innovation and performance
1. A note on the sociology of knowledge and παιδεία
2. The pragmatics of Plutarch’s scientific ingenuity and creativity
4.3. Plutarch’s scientific methodology: a rough guide to explaining natural phenomena
4.3.1. Material principles and natural processes
1. Material principles
2. Natural processes
4.3.2. Towards the limits of natural science
1. A ‘sceptical’ Plutarch: ἐμπειρία, ἐποχή and εὐλάβεια
2. Truth and probability in Quaestiones naturales
3. Sense perception and the issue of autopsy in Quaestiones naturales
4.3.3. Logical-rhetorical dynamics
1. Contradiction, non-contradiction and aetiological freedom
2. Aetiological comprehensiveness and pluricausality
3. Aetiological subtlety and sophistication
4.3.4. Uniformity and technicality of the scientific terminology
1. Let’s talk science: the birth and use of technical vocabulary
2. Big words? High-tech vs. low-tech vocabulary
3. Conclusion: Plutarch, Plato and Aristotle (again)
Commentary
0. Approach and structure
1. Salt and water (Q.N. 1–13)
2. Wheat and barley (Q.N. 14–16)
3. Sea animals and fishing (Q.N. 17–19)
4. Land animals and hunting (Q.N. 20–28)
5. Viniculture (Q.N. 30–31)
6. Longolius (Q.N. 32–39)
7. Psellus (Q.N. 40–41)
Synopsis
Bibliography
Index Locorum
The role of natural science in the Roman Imperial Era In his Quaestiones naturales, Plutarch unmistakeably demonstrates a huge interest in the world of natural phenomena. The work of this famous intellectual and philosopher from Chaeronea consists of forty-one natural problems that address a wide variety of questions, sometimes rather peculiar ones, and answers pertaining to ancient Greek physics, including problems related to the fields of zoology, botany, meteorology and their respective subdisciplines. By providing a thorough study of and commentary on this generally neglected text, written by one of the most influential and prolific writers from Antiquity, this book contributes to our better understanding of Plutarch’s natural scientific programme and, the condition and role of ancient natural science in the Roman Imperial Era in general.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Portraying Female Intellectual Authority
An IntroductionBeatrijs Vanacker and Lieke van Deinsen
Part I: Individual and Collective Portraits of Female Intellectual Authority
Chapter 1 ‘A woman of supreme goodness, and a singular talent’: Anna Morandi Manzolini, Artist and Anatomist of Enlightenment Bologna Caroline Paganussi
Chapter 2 Epistolary Relationship and Intellectual Identity in Maria Antonia of Saxony’s Correspondence with Frederick the Great, 1763–1779 Kelsey Rubin-Detlev
Chapter 3 Between Defence and Affirmation: The Discursive Self- Representation of Eighteenth-Century Women Authors in France and Italy Rotraud von Kulessa (translated by Kristen Gehrman)
Chapter 4 The Visual and Textual Portraits of Mme de Genlis: The Gouverneur, Educator, and Author of the Mémoires Marie-Emmanuelle Plagnol-Diéval (translated by Kristen Gehrman)
Chapter 5 (Self-)Portrait of the Woman as (a Reluctant?) Authority Catriona Seth
Part II: Types and Models of Female Intellectual Authority
Chapter 6 Penning the Midwife’s Experience: Professional Skills, Publication, and Female Agency in Early Modern Europe Valerie Worth-Stylianou
Chapter 7 Women’s Strength Made Perfect in Weakness: Paratextual Authority Constructions in Printed Vernacular Religious Literature by Early Modern Dutch Women Writers Nina Geerdink and Feike Dietz
Chapter 8 ‘Instructing herself by fad or fancy’: Depictions and Fictions of Connoisseuses and Femmes Savantes in Eighteenth-Century Paris Belinda Scerri
Chapter 9 Portraits of Female Mentors in Aemilia Lanyer’s Salve Deus Rex Judaeorum (1611) Aurélie Griffin
Chapter 10 Matrona Docta: Elizabeth Carter and Catherine Macaulay in the Guise of the Roman Matrona Seren Nolan
Part III: The Diachronic Dynamics of Female Intellectual Authority
Chapter 11 Portraits of Mary, Queen of Scots, as an Intellectual in Seventeenth- Century Collective Biographies Armel Dubois-Nayt
Chapter 12 Women Jurists? Representations of Female Intellectual Authority in Eighteenth-Century Jurisprudence Laura Beck Varela
Chapter 13 ‘Diotime’ and ‘La Muse Belgique’: The Intellectual Mobility and Divergent Legacies of Amalia Gallitzin and Marie-Caroline Murray Lien Verpoest
Chapter 14 ‘It Wasn’t Enough for Me Just to Be a Singer’: (Self-)Representations of the ‘German Prima Donna’ Gertrud Elisabeth Mara Vera Viehöver
About the Authors Plates
Interdisciplinary and cross-cultural view on authority construction among early modern female intellectuals
The complex relation between gender and the representation of intellectual authority has deep roots in European history. Portraits and Poses adopts a historical approach to shed new light on this topical subject. It addresses various modes and strategies by which learned women (authors, scientists, jurists, midwifes, painters, and others) sought to negotiate and legitimise their authority at the dawn of modern science in Early Modern and Enlightenment Europe (1600–1800). This volume explores the transnational dimensions of intellectual networks in France, Italy, Britain, the German states and the Low Countries, among others. Drawing on a wide range of case studies from different spheres of professionalisation, it examines both individual and collective constructions of female intellectual authority through word and image. In its innovative combination of an interdisciplinary and transnational approach, this volume contributes to the growing literature on women and intellectual authority in the Early Modern Era and outlines contours for future research.
Contributors: Laura Beck Varela (Universidad Autónoma de Madrid), Feike Dietz (Utrecht University), Armel Dubois-Nayt (University of Versailles-Saint-Quentin/Paris-Saclay), Nina Geerdink (Utrecht University), Aurélie Griffin (Université Sorbonne Nouvelle), Seren Nolan (Durham University), Caroline Paganussi (Museo e Real Bosco di Capodimonte Naples), Marie-Emmanuelle Plagnol-Diéval (Univesity Paris-Est Créteil), Kelsey Rubin-Detlev (University of Southern California), Belinda Scerri (University of Melbourne), Catriona Seth (University of Oxford), Lien Verpoest (KU Leuven), Vera Viehöver (Université de Liège), Rotraud von Kulessa (Universität Augsburg), Valerie Worth-Stylianou (University of Oxford).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Erratum: Table of contents
In the table of contents of the printed books the description of Book I, Book II and Book III is incorrect. This information is correct in the table of contents below and in the PDF version of the book.
Preface
Acknowledgments Specific Terminology Introduction
BOOK I Description of the Practice The Problem of Resemblance Beyond Improvisation A Series of Anamorphic Glances On Methodology Phonographic Writing The Phantasmic Image of the Musical Work The Vectors of the Body The Musical Work as a “Manifold” A Peripheral Instrument Modes of Exposition BOOK II Derivatives Derivative I: On Three Different (Musical) Eyes Derivative II: The Phonocentric Vision of Music Derivative III: An Eye That Sees Itself Derivative IV: The Joyous Power of Simulacra Derivative V: How to Defy Perspective through Perspective Derivative VI: Automaton Derivative VII: How to Produce a Phantasm? Part I: Gian Lorenzo Bernini Derivative VIII: How to Produce a Phantasm? Part II: Francis Bacon Derivative IX: How to Produce a Phantasm? Part III: Salvatore Sciarrino Derivative X: How to Produce a Phantasm? Part IV: Carmelo Bene BOOK III Five Glances upon the Unspeakable Body Appendix 1: Techniques of Minoration Appendix 2: List of Musical Examples Closing Remarks References Biographical Note
Beyond resemblance: creative divergence in music performance
What does it mean to produce resemblance in the performance of written music? Starting from how this question is commonly answered by the practice of interpretation in Western notated art music, this book proposes a move beyond commonly accepted codes, conventions and territories of music performance. Appropriating reflections from post-structural philosophy, visual arts and semiotics, and crucially based upon an artistic research project with a strong creative and practical component, it proposes a new approach to music performance. The approach is based on divergence, on the difference produced by intensifying the chasm between the symbolic aspect of music notation and the irreducible materiality of performance. Instead of regarding performance as reiteration, reconstruction and reproduction of past musical works, Powers of Divergence emphasises its potential for the emergence of the new and for the problematisation of the limits of musical semiotics.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction
• A Forensic Approach to American Literary History
• Revisiting the “End” of American Literature
• Outline of the Chapters
The “Pre-History” of American Literat ure: Early Prospects (1850-1910)
• The Future of an Illusion
• Nationalizing the Past
• The Rhetoric of Race
• Teaching and Preaching
• Why Textbooks (Never) Lie
• The Taboo on Provincialism
Live and Let Live: Debati ng Contemporary Literat ure (1890-1930)
• Explaining Antiquarianism
• The Temptations of the Flesh
• Culture and Scholarship
• Explaining Anti-Antiquarianism
• Historians of the Present
• Facts and Factors
The Uses of Language: Literary Polyvocality and Ethnic Continuity (1880-1950)
• Legends about Language in the U.S.
• Dequarantining “American” Languages
• The Continuation of “Anglocentrism continued”
• The Languages of P(l)ur(al)ism
• The Limits of Cosmopolitanism
• America as a “Unipolar” Culture?
Precursors and Exemplars: Genealogies in American Literary History
• The Priority of Jonathan Edwards
• Multiple Awakenings
• The Dickinson Myth
• How Dickinson Became an Intolerable Woman Author
• The (Not So) Personal Voice: The Confessional Poets
• The Matthew Effect
Conclusion: Nothing Realy Ends
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aDrawing from the social theories of Niklas Luhmann and Mary Douglas, Predicting the Past advocates a reflexive understanding of the paradoxical institutional dynamic of American literary history as a professional discipline and field of study. Contrary to most disciplinary accounts, Michael Boyden resists the utopian impulse to offer supposedly definitive solutions for the legitimation crises besetting American literature studies by “going beyond” its inherited racist, classist, and sexist underpinnings. Approaching the existence of the American literary tradition as a typically modern problem generating diverse but functionally equivalent solutions, Boyden argues how its peculiarity does not, as is often supposed, reside in its restrictive exclusivity but rather in its massive inclusivity which drives it to constantly revert to a self-negating “beyond” perspective. Predicting the Past covers a broad range of both well-known and lesser known literary histories and reference works, from Rufus Griswold’s 1847 Prose Writers of America to Sacvan Bercovitch’s monumental Cambridge History of American Literature. Throughout, Boyden focuses on particular themes and topics illustrating the selfinduced complexity of American literary history such as the early “Anglocentric” roots theories of American literature; the debate on contemporary authors in the age of naturalism; the plurilingual ethnocentrism of the pioneer Americanists of the mid-twentieth century; and the genealogical misrepresentation of founding figures such as Jonathan Edwards, Emily Dickinson, and Robert Lowell.
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664310$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/255441/65766/65766_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04034nam 22006132 4500 =001 f0025a03-4caf-4c13-b596-79fa6a756330 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702875$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664037$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664044$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664037$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBW$2bicssc =072 7$aHBJD$2bicssc =072 7$a3JB$2bicssc =072 7$aHIS010020$2bisacsh =072 7$aHIS037090$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHW$2thema =072 7$aNHD$2thema =072 7$a3MD$2thema =100 1\$aFagel, Raymond,$eauthor. =245 10$aProtagonists of War :$bSpanish Army Commanders and the Revolt in the Low Countries /$cRaymond Fagel. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (388 pages): $b20 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aAvisos de Flandes ;$vvol. 2. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAbbreviations
Introduction
Words of gratitude
Chapter I: Captain Julián: the hero of the battlefield
Chapter II: Sancho Dávila: the champion of Catholic Spain
Chapter III: Cristóbal de Mondragón: the good Spaniard
Chapter IV: Francisco de Valdés: the exemplary soldier
General conclusion: episodic war narratives in comparison
Bibliography Index
A new vision on the Revolt of the Low Countries through the eyes of Spanish commanders
Julián Romero, Sancho Dávila, Cristóbal de Mondragón, and Francisco de Valdés were prominent Spanish military commanders during the first decade of the Revolt in the Low Countries (1567–1577). Occupying key positions in this conflict, they featured as central characters in various war narratives and episodical descriptions of the events they were involved in, ranging from chronicles, poems, theatre plays, engravings, and songs to news pamphlets. To this day, they still figure as protagonists of historical novels: brave heroes in some, cruel oppressors in others. Yet personal, first-hand accounts also exist. Archival research into the letters written by these commanders now makes it possible to include their perspectives and the way they describe their own experiences. Looking through the eyes of four Spanish commanders, Protagonists of War provides the reader with an alternative reading of the Revolt, contrasting the subjective experiences of these protagonists with fictionalised perceptions.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Preface to the Handbook Acknowledgments About the Authors
I Introduction 1 Public Administration in Ethiopia : Case Studies and Lessons for Sustainable Development Bacha Kebede Debela, Geert Bouckaert, Meheret Ayenew Warota, and Dereje Terefe Gemechu
II Governance Introduction
II.1 Democratic Governance 2 Electoral Democracy and Citizen Life Satisfaction : The Mediating Role of Public Trust Deribe Assefa Aga 3 Status, Challenges, and Prospects of the Ethiopian Developmental State (Emphasis on Democratic Governance) Belayneh Bogale Zewdie 4 Assessment of Parliamentary Oversight Tools and Mechanisms Used by the Ethiopian House of Peoples’ Representatives (HoPRs) Aklilu Wubet Lema, Challa Amdissa Jiru, Defferew Kebebe Tessema, and Frehiwot Gebrehiwot Araya 5 Public Engagement for Improving the Relationship between the People and the Parliament Challa Amdissa JIru, Defferew Kebebe Tessema, and Aklilu Wubet Lema
II.2 Partnerships and Participation 6 Multi-Stakeholder Partnership for Health Service Delivery in the Context of Developmental State: The Ethiopian Experience Hiwot Amare Tadesse and Trui Steen 7 The Role of Participation in Development in Enhancing Local People Empowerment: The case of Bishoftu City Administration (BCA), Oromia Bahiru Detti Heyi 8 Glass Ceiling and Glass Wall, and Women in Local Governments : Evidence from West Shoa Zone, Oromia National Regional State, Ethiopia Bacha Kebede Debela II.3 Managing Institutions 9 Institutional Change and Reform in Oromia’s Public Sector : Challenges and Prospects Hirko Wakgari Amanta 10 New Public Management and Path Dependence in Public Organizations in Ethiopia: A Multiple Case Study Tewelde Mezgobo Ghrmay 11 The Analysis of the Gadaa System in Comparison to Western Democracy Moti Mosisa Gutema
III People as Human Resources Introduction 12 Meritocracy, Career Development, and Promotion in Ethiopian Civil Service Henok Seyoum Assefa 13 Continuities and Changes in Human Resource Management in Oromia National Regional State: The Post 1991 Bacha Kebede Debela, Geert Bouckaert, and Steve Troupin 14 Strategic Contribution of Middle Managers in the Ethiopian Civil Service Organization Alebachew Asfaw Yimer 15 The Ethiopian Civil Service System in Perspective : Implications for Leadership Roles Adare Assefa Mitiku and Annie Hondeghem
IV Performance and Quality Introduction 16 Managing Performance in Ethiopian Municipalities : Analysis of Technical Efficiency of Urban Water Services in Oromia National Regional State Bacha Kebede Debela, Geert Bouckaert, and Steve Troupin 17 Performance Evaluation of Governance and Political System of Ethiopia : Post 1991 Gutata Goshu Amante 18 Key Factors Contributing to Time and Cost Overrun in Mega Sugar Construction Projects in Ethiopia Temesgen Genie Chekol and Denamo Addissie Nuramo 19 Determinants of Public Servants’ Performance in Federal Public Service Sectors in Ethiopia Kassa Teshager and Zekarias Minota
V.1 Education 20 Institutional Autonomy of Ethiopian Public Universities : An Application of the European University Autonomy Scorecard Methodology Solomon Gebreyohans Gebru, Annie Hondeghem, and Bruno Broucker 21 Outcomes and Challenges of the 1994 Ethiopian Education and Training Policy Reform Challa Amdissa Jiru 22 Catch-up Trails : Public Administration Education and Professionalization Trajectories in Ethiopia Kiflie Worku Angaw
V.2 Policing 23 The Implementation of Community Policing in Addis Ababa City, Ethiopia Wondem Meuriaw Ayalew
V.3 Data Analysis 24 The Practices and Challenges of Community Policing in Reducing Crime : The Case of Adama City Administration. Dessalegn Kebede Kedida
VI Conclusions and Implications 25 Conclusions and Implications Bacha Kebede Debela, Geert Bouckaert, Meheret Ayenew Warota, and Dereje Terefe Gemechu
First handbook on Ethiopian Public Administration
Building an effective, inclusive, and accountable public administration has become a major point of attention for policymakers and academics in Ethiopia who want to realise sustainable development. This first handbook on Ethiopian Public Administration is written by Ethiopian academics and practitioner-academics and builds on PhD studies and conference papers, including studies presented at the meetings of the Ethiopian Public Administration Association (EPAA), established in 2016.
Public Administration in Ethiopia presents a wide range of timely issues in four thematic parts: Governance, Human Resources, Performance and Quality, and Governance of Policies. Each of the individual chapters in this volume contributes in a different way to the overarching research questions: How can we describe and explain the contexts, the processes and the results of the post-1990 politico-administrative reforms in Ethiopia? And what are the implications for sustainable development?
This book is essential for students, practitioners, and theorists interested in public administration, public policy, and sustainable development. Moreover, the volume is a valuable stepping stone for PA teaching and PA research in Ethiopia.
Contributors: Adare Assefa Mitiku (Defense Construction Enterprise), Aklilu Wubet Lema (Addis Ababa University), Alebachew Asfaw Yimer (Bahir Dar University), Annie Hondeghem (KU Leuven), Bacha Kebede Debela (Ambo University), Bahiru Deti Heyi (Dilla University), Belayneh Bogale Zewdie (Kotebe Metropolitan University), Geert Bouckaert (KU Leuven), Gutata Goshu Amante (Addis Ababa University), Bruno Broucker (KU Leuven), Challa Amdissa Jiru (Addis Ababa University), Defferew Kebebe Tessema (Addis Ababa University), Denamo Addissie Nuramo (Addis Ababa University), Deribe Assefa Aga (Ethiopian Civil Service University), Dessalegn Kebede Kedida (Oromia Police College), Frehiwot Gebrehiwot Araya (Addis Ababa City Public Service and Human Resource Development Bureau), Henok Seyoum Assefa (Ethiopian Public Administration Association, EPAA), Hirko Wakgari Amanta (Oromia State University), Hiwot Amare Tadesse (Ambo University), Kassa Teshager Alemu (Ethiopian Civil Service University), Kiflie Worku Angaw (Dilla University),Moti Mosisa Gutema (Dilla University), Solomon Gebreyohans Gebru (KU Leuven), Steve Troupin (KU Leuven), Temesgen Genie Chekol (Dire Dawa Institute of Technology), Tewelde Mezgobo Ghrmay (Mekelle University), Trui Steen (KU Leuven), Meuriaw Ayalew (Assosa University / Addis Ababa University), Zekarias Minota Seiko (Ethiopian Civil Service University / Addis Ababa University)
Ebook available in Open Access.
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aPublic Administration =653 \\$aEthiopia =653 \\$aPublic management =653 \\$aPublic Policy =653 \\$aPublic Governance =653 \\$aDevelopment Studies =700 1\$aKebede Debela, Bacha,$eeditor. =700 1\$aBouckaert, Geert,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000202828106$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-0282-8106 =700 1\$aAyenew Warota, Meheret,$eeditor. =700 1\$aTerefe Gemechu, Dereje,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663634$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/287682/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 06604nam 22006012 4500 =001 0024e791-5514-479f-a701-50b929ea3485 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20242024\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462704022$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461665690$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665690$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJFC$2bicssc =072 7$aDSB$2bicssc =072 7$aAP$2bicssc =072 7$aAN$2bicssc =072 7$aLIT000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPER000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aDSB$2thema =072 7$aATF$2thema =072 7$aATD$2thema =072 7$aJBCC$2thema =245 00$aRe-Imagining Class :$bIntersectional Perspectives on Class Identity and Precarity in Contemporary Culture /$cedited by Michiel Rys, Liesbeth François. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2024. =264 \4$c©2024 =300 \\$a1 online resource. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgments
Re-Imagining Class: Intersectional Perspectives on Class Identity and Precarity in Contemporary Culture
Michiel Rys and Liesbeth François
PART 1 REDISCOVERING CLASS: CONTINUITIES AND RUPTURES
1.1 Writing (for) the Precariat: Mats Teglund’s Cykelbudet (2021) and Pelle Sunvisson’s Svenska palmen (2021)
Magnus Nilsson
1.2 Making Visible the Invisible: Spanish Post-Crisis Fiction
Christian Claesson
PART 2 PERSONALISING CLASS: INDIVIDUALS AND COLLECTIVES
2.1 The Poetics of Personal Authenticity: Diversity, Intersectionality and the Working Class in Contemporary German Literature
Christoph Schaub
2.2 Narrating the Precariat: Social Wounds in Terézia Mora’s and Wilhelm Genazino’s Novels
Olaf Berwald
2.3 “Know Where to Fish”: Class and Gender Precarity and Project-based Networks in Creative and Cultural Industries
Valeria Pulignano, Deborah Dean, Markieta Domecka and Lander Vermeerbergen
PART 3 NARRATING CLASS: VOICE AND BELONGING
3.1 Double(ing) Voices: Narrating Precarious Class Status and Class Identities
Sula Textor
3.2 Obstacles to Leaving, Problems of Arriving: Gender and Genealogy in Contemporary German Narratives of the Social Climber (Christian Baron, Bov Bjerg, Deniz Ohde, Anke Stelling)
Irene Husser
3.3 Narrating Class and Classlessness in Contemporary British Novels of Black Women’s Social Climbing
Katrin Becker
PART 4 PERFORMING CLASS: MATERIALITY AND AFFECT
4.1 Affected by Discomfort: Class and Precarity in Twenty- First Century Theatre
Marissia Fragkou
4.2 The Redundancy: Playing Production in Academic Capitalism
Sarah Pogoda
4.3 “The View Is Nice, but You Can’t Eat It”: A Poetics of Precarity in Bait (2019, Dir: Mark Jenkin)
Daniel Brookes
PART 5 CLASS BEYOND THE HUMAN: WORK EXPERIENCES AND THE ANTHROPOCENE
5.1 Bare Land: Alienation as Deracination in Anna Tsing and John Steinbeck
Tim Christiaens
5.2 Interspecies Storytelling for Prudent Predation
Joeri Verbesselt and Syaman Rapongan
List of Contributors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aUnique cross-cultural and multimedial approach to class identity and precarity in literature, theatre, and film
Contemporary culture not merely reflects ongoing societal transformations, it shapes our understanding of rapidly evolving class realities. Literature, theatre, and film urge us to put the question of class back on the agenda, and reconceptualize it through the lens of precarity and intersectionality. Relying on examples from British, French, Spanish, German, American, Swedish and Taiwanese culture, the contributors to this book document a variety of aesthetic strategies in an interdisciplinary dialogue with sociology and political theory. Doing so, this volume demonstrates the myriad ways in which culture opens up new pathways to imagine and re-imagine class as an economic relation, an identity category, and a subjective experience. Situated firmly within current debates about the impact of social mobility, precarious work, intersectional structures of exploitation, and interspecies vulnerability, this volume offers a wide-ranging panorama of contemporary class imaginaries.
Contributors: Magnus Nilsson (Malmö University), Christian Claesson (Lund University), Christoph Schaub (University of Vechta), Olaf Berwald (Middle Tennessee State University), Valeria Pulignano (KU Leuven), Lander Vermeerbergen (Radboud University), Markieta Domecka (KU Leuven) Deborah Dean (Warwick University), Sula Textor (Potsdam University), Irene Husser (University of Tübingen), Katrin Becker (University of Siegen), Marissia Fragkou (Aristotle University of Thessaloniki) Sarah Pogoda (Bangor University), Daniel Brookes (University of Worcester), Tim Christiaens (Tilburg University), Joeri Verbesselt (KU Leuven), Syaman Rapongan (writer).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aClass =653 \\$aIdentity =653 \\$aPrecarity =653 \\$aIntersectionality =653 \\$aCulture =653 \\$aClass Mobility =653 \\$aLiterature =653 \\$aFilm =653 \\$aTheatre =700 1\$aRys, Michiel,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000268076920$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-6807-6920 =700 1\$aFrançois, Liesbeth,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665690$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/349836/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 07570nam 22007332 4500 =001 8dad618f-12d0-47c2-b4d8-7d2ffa338bf7 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20202020\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702509$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663542$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663559$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663542$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBWN$2bicssc =072 7$aABC$2bicssc =072 7$aAMX$2bicssc =072 7$aHBTB$2bicssc =072 7$aMBX$2bicssc =072 7$aJNB$2bicssc =072 7$a3JJG$2bicssc =072 7$aARC005070$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHWR5$2thema =072 7$aABC$2thema =072 7$aAMX$2thema =072 7$aMBX$2thema =072 7$aNHTB$2thema =072 7$aJNB$2thema =072 7$a3MPBGH$2thema =245 00$aRevival After the Great War :$bRebuild, Remember, Repair, Reform /$cedited by Luc Verpoest, Leen Engelen, Rajesh Heynickx, Jan Schmidt, Pieter Uyttenhove, Pieter Verstraete. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2020. =264 \4$c©2020 =300 \\$a1 online resource (354 pages): $b60 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aAcknowledgementsIntroductionRevival After The First World War: Rebuild, Remember, Repair, Reform Luc Verpoest, Leen Engelen, Rajesh Heynickx, Jan Schmidt, Pieter Uyttenhove & Pieter Verstraete
PART ONE — REBUILD
Catastrophe and Reconstruction in Western Europe: The Urban Aftermath of the First World War Pierre Purseigle
Reflections on Leuven as Martyred City and the Realignment of Propinquity Richard Plunz
Making Good Farmers by Making Better Farms: Farmstead Architecture and Social Engineering in Belgium After the Great War Dries Claeys & Yves Segers
“C’est la beauté de l’ensemble qu’il faut viser.” Notes on Changing Heritage Values of Belgian Post-World War I Reconstruction Townscapes Maarten Liefooghe
Rebuilding, Recovery, Reconceptualization: Modern architecture and the First World War Volker M. Welter
PART TWO — REMEMBER
Reclaiming the Ordinary: Civilians Face the Post-war World Tammy M. Proctor
Expressing Grief and Gratitude in an Unsettled Time Temporary First World War Memorials in Belgium Leen Engelen & Marjan Sterckx
Remembering the War on the British Stage: From Resistance to Reconstruction Helen E. M. Brooks
A War to Learn From: Commemorative Practices in Belgian Schools After World War l Kaat Wils PART THREE — REPAIR
High Expectations and Silenced Realities: The Re-education of Belgian Disabled Soldiers of the Great War, 1914–1921 Pieter Verstraete and Marisa De Picker
Back to work: Riccardo Galeazzi’s Work for the Mutilated Veterans of the Great War, Between German Model and Italian Approach Simonetta Polenghi
Competition over Care: The Campaign for a New Medical Campus at the University of Leuven in the 1920s Joris Vandendriessche
PART FOUR — REFORM
An Argentine Witness of the Occupation and Reconstruction of Belgium: The Writings of Roberto J. Payró (1918-1922) María Inés Tato
The New Post-war Order from the Perspective of the Spanish Struggle for Regeneration (1918-1923) Carolina García Sanz
The Act of Giving: Political Instability and the Reform(ation) of Humanitarian Responses to Violence in Portugal in the Aftermath of the First World War Ana Paula Pires
Reconstruction, Reform and Peace in Europe after the First World War John Horne
Bibliography List of Contributors
The
challenges of post-war recovery from social and political reform to architectural design
In the months and years immediately following the First World War, the many (European) countries that had formed its battleground were confronted with daunting challenges. These challenges varied according to the countries' earlier role and degree of involvement in the war but were without exception enormous. The contributors to this book analyse how this was not only a matter of rebuilding ravaged cities and destroyed infrastructure, but also of repairing people’s damaged bodies and upended daily lives, and rethinking and reforming societal, economic and political structures. These processes took place against the backdrop of mass mourning and remembrance, political violence and economic crisis. At the same time, the post-war tabula rasa offered many opportunities for innovation in various areas of society, from social and political reform to architectural design. The wide scope of post-war recovery and revival is reflected in the different sections of this book: rebuild, remember, repair, and reform. It offers insights into post-war revival in Western European countries such as Belgium, France, the United Kingdom, Germany, Portugal, Spain, and Italy, as well as into how their efforts were perceived outside of Europe, for instance in Argentina and the United States.
Contributors: Helen Brooks (University of Kent), Dries Claeys (KU Leuven), Marisa De Picker (KU Leuven), Leen Engelen (LUCA/KU Leuven), Rajesh Heynickx (KU Leuven), John Horne (Trinity College Dublin), Maarten Liefooghe (Ghent University), Ana Paula Pires (Universidade Nova de Lisboa), Richard Plunz (Columbia University), Tammy Proctor (Utah State University), Pierre Purseigle (University of Warwick), Carolina Garcia Sanz (Universidad de Sevilla), Jan Schmidt (KU Leuven), Yves Segers (KU Leuven), Marjan Sterckx (Ghent University), Maria Inés Tato (Universidad de Buenos Aires), Pieter Uyttenhove (Ghent University), Joris Vandendriessche (KU Leuven), Luc Verpoest (KU Leuven), Pieter Verstraete (KU Leuven), Volker Welter (University of California), Kaat Wils (KU Leuven)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Preface
An introduction to Silver Empowerment Jasper De Witte & Tine Van Regenmortel
Chapter 1. An empowerment perspective on older persons: The power of resilience Tine Van Regenmortel & Jasper De Witte
Chapter 2. The economic cost of the loneliness of older persons Jozef Pacolet, Gregorio Rodríguez Cabrero, Simón Sosvilla-Rivero
Chapter 3. An empowerment perspective on loneliness among older persons Jasper De Witte & Tine Van Regenmortel
Chapter 4. The importance of neighbourhood-oriented care for the quality of life and empowerment of older persons Leen Heylen
Chapter 5. An interplay of formal and informal care : Strengths and challenges from an empowerment perspective Benedicte De Koker, Leen Heylen, Dimitri Mortelmans & Anja Declercq
Chapter 6. Merits of critical moments of disempowerment : Iterative practices of empowerment and disempowerment during participatory action research with older persons as co-researchers Elena Bendien, Susan Woelders, Tineke Abma
Chapter 7. Enhancing person-centred care to enable older persons to be involved in long-term care M.M. Janssen, K.G. Luijkx, A. Scheffelaar, A. Stoop
Chapter 8. Silver Empowerment: Towards empowering policy, practice and research Katrien Steenssens, Tine Van Regenmortel & Jasper De Witte
Afterword Tine Van Regenmortel & Jasper De Witte
About the authors
The strengths and opportunities of ageing and the ageing population.
Silver empowerment is a valuable paradigm to improve care and support systems for older persons. It aims to counteract the dominant image of ageing, which is all too often one of decline, dependency and vulnerability, and rather sees ageing and the ageing population as a challenge that opens up new opportunities. By focusing on the strengths and connections of older persons, silver empowerment strives for an inclusive, age-friendly society that will allow everyone to grow old with dignity and meaning. In this book, leading academics from a variety of disciplines discuss ways to enhance the empowerment of older persons in practice. Covering a wide range of topics such as resilience, loneliness, community-based care, the interplay between formal and informal care, the inclusion of older persons’ perspectives in research and care, and empowering policy, Silver Empowerment is of interest to academics, policy makers and practitioners interested in empowerment and care and support systems for older persons.
Contributors: Jasper De Witte (KU Leuven), Tine Van Regenmortel (KU Leuven / Tilburg University), Leen Heylen (Thomas More), Benedicte De Koker (HOGENT), Dimitri Mortelmans (University of Antwerp), Anja Declercq (KU Leuven), Elena Bendien (Leyden Academy on Vitality and Ageing), Susan Woelders (Leyden Academy on Vitality and Ageing), Tineke Abma (Leiden University Medical Center / Leyden Academy on Vitality and Ageing), Meriam Janssen (Tilburg University), Katrien Luijkx (Tilburg University), Aukelien Scheffelaar (Tilburg University), Annerieke Stoop (Tilburg University), Jozef Pacolet (KU Leuven), Gregorio Rodríguez Cabrero (University of Alcalá), Simón Sosvilla-Rivero (Complutense University of Madrid), Katrien Steenssens (KU Leuven).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Chapter 1: Introduction: Charting Course
Anchoring Space - Doing Space - Geographies of Literature - Postmodern Spaces – Material - Histories
Chapter 2: Around the World in Eighty (One) Days
Section 1. Understanding Verne: Laying the Groundwork
Verne and the World - Verne’s Geography - Geography on Verne - Reading Verne’s Geographies - Rounding up the World - Capital Repetitions: Monghir
Section 2. Opium Silence and Nineteenth-Century French Literature
Colonizing Hong Kong - Illegal Opium and Colonial Wealth - Opium Cities - Opium Race
Chapter 3: Dislocating the Indian Nation: Ananda Devi’s Homelands
Global Pathways - Along a Local Road - Dislocating Location - Grounding Identity - Patriarchal Homelands - Tango with India - Delhi’s Underbelly - Antipodal Itineraries - Desert Safari - Producing Dissent - Rediscovering India
Chapter 4: Martinique: Space, Language, Gender
Section 1. Contextualizing Texaco
Texaco and its Significations - A Spatial Metaphor - Literary Margins: City and Language - Marie-Sophie as Texaco - Chamoiseau and Feminism - Reinventing the City
Section 2. Martinique’s Literary Identity and French Borders
Martinique: Colonial History, Postcolonial Literature - French Borders, Martinican Text
Section 3. Text, Texaco and Landscape
Texaco: Space and Language - Rewriting l’En-ville
Section 4. France, Martinique and Marie-Sophie’s Body
Marie-Sophie and Texaco - Marie-Sophie’s body and Martinique
Chapter 5: Out of Place: French Family at (Algerian) War 205
Immaterial Differences - Locating Caché - White Lies - Hidden Agenda - Colonial Family; National Lies - Colonial Past; Cinematic Present - Escaping Images - Deadly Images
Epilogue: Interjecting Passages
Notes
Bibliography
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aColonial expansion and spatial grammar in French-language works from different historical and national contexts
Colonialism advanced its project of territorial expansion by changing the very meaning of borders and space. The colonial project scripted a unipolar spatial discourse that saw the colonies as an extension of European borders. In his monograph, Mohit Chandna engages with narrations of spatial conflicts in French and Francophone literature and film from the nineteenth to the early twenty-first century. In literary works by Jules Verne, Ananda Devi, and Patrick Chamoiseau, and film by Michael Haneke, Chandna analyzes the depiction of ever-changing borders and spatial grammar within the colonial project. In so doing, he also examines the ongoing resistance to the spatial legacies of colonial practices that act as omnipresent enforcers of colonial borders. Literature and film become sites that register colonial spatial paradigms and advance competing narratives that fracture the dominance of these borders.
Through its analyses Spatial Boundaries, Abounding Spaces shows that colonialism is not a finished project relegated to our past. Colonialism is present in the here and now, and exercises its power through the borders that define us.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Voorwoord
Inleiding: Luisteren naar stilte in de geschiedenis van opvoeding en onderwijs 1. Stiltepraktijken in opvoeding en onderwijs 2. Onderzoek naar stilte in hedendaagse pedagogische praktijken 3. Een kritische kijk op bestaande geschiedenissen van stilte 4. Naar een geschiedenis van stilte op school en in de klas 5. Het stille zelf, voorbeeldige Bobby en de geschiedenis als megafoon
Hoofdstuk 1: De opkomst van klassikale stilte 1. “Hij schreeuwt gelijck een mager swijn, dat terstond gekeelt moet zijn” 2. Geluiden en stilte in het werk van Jean-Baptiste de la Salle 3. Slaafse stilte en menslievende vrijheid 4. Over betamelijke, gepaste, goede, werktuiglijke, liefelijke of heilzame stilte 5. Een les in stilte voor de allerkleinsten
Hoofdstuk 2: De herontdekking van stilte door Maria Montessori 1. Een schreeuw om leven van het pasgeboren kind 2. Stilte, discipline en het lawaai van vallende stoelen 3. Stilteoefeningen, fluisterstemmen en gecontroleerde beweeglijkheid 4. Het belang van stilte voor (de opleiding van) leerkrachten
5. “Als we de stilte willen bereiken, dan moeten we ze onderwijzen” 6. Door de stilte naar een nieuwe wereld
Hoofdstuk 3: Het stille kind en het luide zelf 1. Stilte en verlegenheid 2. Dictees, examenvragen en observatielessen: de alomtegenwoordigheid van verlegen kinderen in de klas 3. De stem van een achttiende-eeuwse Timidus: “Ik ben niet gek!” 4. Van goede en kwade naar normale en abnormale verlegenheid 5. Het sociaal-darwinisme en de luidruchtige strijd om het bestaan 6. Het succesvolle zelf, de persoonlijkheidscultuur en de oorlog tegen verlegenheid 7. Maria Montessori, zelfopvoeding en verlegenheid als monstruositeit
Hoofdstuk 4: Stillezen en het kind als open boek 1. De kunst van het hardop lezen 2. Stille efficiëntie en de economisering van het onderwijs 3. De opkomst van het stillezen in de Lage Landen 4. Stilleestesten en de roep om verantwoorde selectie 5. Kritische geluiden en de triomf van het stillezen
Epiloog: Stilte, het oplaadbare zelf en de richting van onze toekomst
Noten Referentielijst
Het meerstemmige geluid van stilte in
opvoeding en onderwijs.
Stilte loopt als een rode draad door de geschiedenis van de school. In de voorbije eeuwen hebben talloze leerkrachten kinderen aangespoord om stil te zijn. Er verschenen ook vele publicaties waarin pedagogische auteurs reflecteerden over de waarde van stilte voor het onderwijs. In dit boek verkent Pieter Verstraete aan de hand van niet eerder ontgonnen archiefmateriaal de geschiedenis van de pedagogische betekenis van stilte. Heb je altijd al willen weten waar de voorliefde voor klassikale stilte vandaan komt? Vraag je je af waarom we vandaag in stilte leren lezen en of dat altijd zo was? Wil je weten hoe stille en verlegen leerlingen vroeger werden behandeld? Of ben je benieuwd waarom Maria Montessori stiltelesjes zo belangrijk vond? In dit boek maak je op een boeiende manier kennis met het meerstemmige geluid van stilte in de geschiedenis van opvoeding en onderwijs.
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
Deze publicatie is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Beluister de podcast Buiten de krijtlijnen #124 | Pieter Verstraete over stilte in het onderwijs
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aStilte =653 \\$aGeschiedenis =653 \\$aSchool =653 \\$aKlas =653 \\$aPedagogiek =653 \\$aOnderwijs =653 \\$aMontessori =653 \\$aLezen =653 \\$aVerlegenheid =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664792$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/320942/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 06938nam 22007332 4500 =001 bcce4a69-7e83-42f1-9557-3253ce14fb45 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20202020\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702479$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663504$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663511$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663504$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJFSJ1$2bicssc =072 7$aHBJD$2bicssc =072 7$aHBTB$2bicssc =072 7$aJP$2bicssc =072 7$aD$2bicssc =072 7$aDS$2bicssc =072 7$aDSBD$2bicssc =072 7$aDSBF$2bicssc =072 7$aDSBH$2bicssc =072 7$a1D$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC032000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015100$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015030$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015070$2bisacsh =072 7$aART015080$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT004130$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT025050$2bisacsh =072 7$aLIT025030$2bisacsh =072 7$aFIC027450$2bisacsh =072 7$a1.0.0.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aJBSF1$2thema =072 7$aNHD$2thema =072 7$aLNDH$2thema =072 7$a1D$2thema =245 00$aStrategic Imaginations :$bWomen and the Gender of Sovereignty in European Culture /$cedited by Anke Gilleir, Aude Defurne. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2020. =264 \4$c©2020 =300 \\$a1 online resource (313 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aON GENDER, SOVEREIGNTY AND IMAGINATION
An Introduction
Anke Gilleir
PART 1: REPRESENTATIONS OF FEMALE SOVEREIGNTY
CAMILLA AND CANDACIS
Literary Imaginations of Female Sovereignty in German Romances of the Late Twelfth Century
Ann-Kathrin Deininger and Jasmin Leuchtenberg
ROYAL HOUSEWIVES AND FEMALE TYRANTS
Gender and Sovereignty in Works by Benedikte Naubert and Luise Mühlbach Elisabeth Krimmer
OF MAIDENS AND VIRGINS, OR, SPARKING MILITARY ALLIANCE
The Affective Politics of the Pristine Female Body
Maha El Hissy
RELATIONAL AUTHORITY AND FEMALE SOVEREIGNTY
Fanny Burney’s Early Court Journals and Letters
Beatrijs Vanacker
THE SOUND OF SOVEREIGNTY
Royal Vocal Strategies in the Victorian House of Lords Josephine Hoegaerts
PART 2: PLACES AND SPACES OF POWER
THE QUEEN FROM THE SOUTH
Eleanor of Aquitaine as a Political Strategist and Lawmaker Ayaal Herdam and David J. Smallwood
THE SPACES OF FEMALE SOVEREIGNTY IN EARLY MODERN SPAIN
Maria Cristina Quintero
FRENCH ARISTOCRAT AND POLISH QUEEN
Maria Kazimiera d’Arquien Sobieska’s Strategies of Power (1674–1698)
Jarosław Pietrzak
BECOMING BRITISH
The Role of the Hanoverian Queen Consort
Joanna Marschner
TAMING THE SOVEREIGN
Princess Charlotte of Wales and the Rhetoric of Gender Virginia McKendry
DISCOURSES OF SOVEREIGNTY AS AN OBSTACLE TO WOMEN’S SUFFRAGE?
An Essay in Comparative History
Marnix Beyen
Imaginations of female rule and the imaginative strategies of women rulers
What is the gender of political power ? What happens to the history of sovereignty when we reconsider it from a gender perspective ?
Political sovereignty has been a major theme in European thought from the very beginning of intellectual reflection on community. Philosophy and political theory, historiography, theology, and literature and the arts have, often in dialogue with one another, sought to represent or recalibrate notions of rule. Yet whatever covenant was imagined, sovereign rule has consistently been figured as a male prerogative
While in-depth studies of historical women rulers have proliferated in the past decades, these have not systematically explored how all women rulers throughout the entirety of European culture have had to operate in a context that could not think power as female – except in grotesque terms.
Strategic Imaginations demonstrates that this constitutive tension can only be brought out by studying women’s political rule in a comparative and longue durée manner. The book offers a collection of essays that brings together studies of female sovereignty from the Polish-Lithuanian to the British Commonwealth, and from the Middle Ages to the genesis of modern democracy. It addresses historical figures and takes stock of the rich yet unsettling imagination of female rule in philosophy, literature and art history. For all the variety of geographical, social, and historical contexts it engages, the book reveals surprising resonances between the strategies women rulers used and the images and practices they adopted in the context of an all-pervasive skepticism toward female rule.
Contributors: Marnix Beyen (Universiteit Antwerpen), Aude Defurne (KU Leuven), Ann-Kathrin Deininger (Universität Bonn), Maha El Hissy (Queen Mary, University of London), Anke Gilleir (KU Leuven), Ayaal Herdam (Université de Bordeaux), Josephine Hoegaerts (University of Helsinki), Elisabeth Krimmer (University of California, Davis), Jasmin Leuchtenberg (Universität Bonn), Joanna Marschner (Historic Royal Palaces London), Virginia McKendry (Royal Roads University), Jaroslaw Pietrzak (Pedagogical University Krakow), Maria Cristina Quintero (Bryn Mawr College), David J. Smallwood (Sciences Po Bordeaux), Beatrijs Vanacker (KU Leuven)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Listen to an interview with Anke Gilleir at New Books Network : https://newbooksnetwork.com/strategic-imaginations
Preface
Introduction Dona Pursall and Eva Van de Wiele
Chapter 1. ‘It’s the girl!’ : Comics, Professional Identity, Affection, Nostalgia and Embarrassment Mel Gibson
Chapter 2. Looking for Queerness Martha Newbigging
Chapter 3. Harrowing Rites of Passage : Refugee Girlhood in the Wake of Syrian Migrant Crisis María Porras Sánchez
Chapter 4. Comics, Caregiving and Crip Time JoAnn Purcell
Chapter 5. Discussing Gender in a Communist Comics Magazine : Corinne et Jeannot, 1970 Sylvain Lesage
Chapter 6. The Ambivalence of Girlhood and Motherhood in A Girl-and-Her-Dog Comics Series : Margot & Oscar Pluche / Sac à Puces Benoît Glaude
Chapter 7. Modernity, Aesthetics and the Active Female Body in Mirabelle (1960–1967) Joan Ormrod
Chapter 8. The Demon Girl of Malayali Comic Strips : The (Im)possibilities of Comic Imagination Aswathy Senan
Chapter 9. Reading Girl- and Womanhood in the Classic Flemish Family Comics Series Jommeke : A Conversation with Katrien De Graeve and Sara De Vuyst Michel De Dobbeleer
Chapter 10. Death and the Maiden : Some Notes Concerning Charlotte Salomon’s Leben? oder Theater? Sébastien Conard
Chapter 11. Developing a Style of Her Own: Mophead by Selina Tusitala Marsh (2019) Marine Berthiot
Conclusion Eva Van de Wiele
Afterword: Picturing Girlhood Julia Round
About the Authors Index
Girls, gender and identity in comics.
Sugar, Spice, and the Not So Nice offers an innovative, wide-ranging and geographically diverse book-length treatment of girlhood in comics. The various contributing authors and artists provide novel insights into established themes within comics studies, children’s comics, graphic medicine and comics by and about refugees and marginalised ethnic or cultural groups. The book enriches traditional historical, narratological and aesthetic approaches to studying girlhood in comics with practice-based research, discussion and conversation. This re-examination of girls, gender and identity in comics connects with contemporary discourse on gender identity politics. Through examples from both within Europe, the anglophone world and beyond, and including visual essays alongside critical theory, the volume furthermore engages with new developments in contemporary comics scholarship. It will therefore appeal to students and scholars of childhood studies, comics scholars and creators, and those interested in addressing gender identity through the prism of comics.
Contributors: Mel Gibson (Northumbria University), Martha Newbigging (Seneca College), María Porras Sánchez (Complutense University of Madrid), JoAnn Purcell (York University and Seneca College), Benoît Glaude (Ghent University/University of Louvain), Sylvain Lesage (University of Lille), Joan Ormrod (Manchester Metropolitan University), Aswathy Senan (The Research Collective Delhi), Michel De Dobbeleer (Ghent University), Sébastien Conard (KASK Ghent School of Arts and LUCA Brussels), Marine Berthiot (University of Edinburgh), Julia Round (Bournemouth University)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Foreword: Time-traveling in a lost world
Introduction
Chapter 1. A brief history of the photonovel
1.1 A working definition
1.2 Origins, evolution and decline
1.3 Fame versus shame
1.4 Photonovels: between tradition and emancipation
Chapter 2. Belgian editorial context: a language divide
Chapter 3. Popular Belgian women’s magazines with photonovels
3.1 Lectures d’Aujourd’hui / Lectuur voor Allen
3.2 Mon Copain
3.3 Chez Nous / Ons Volk
3.4 Femmes d’Aujourd’hui / Het Rijk der Vrouw
3.5 Bonnes Soirées / Mimosa
3.6 Piccolo and Tiptop
3.7 Vrouw en Huis
3.8 Panorama
3.9 Rosita
3.10 Ons Land met Iris
3.11 Madame
3.12 Joepie
3.13 Other magazines
3.13.1 Roman Film complet, Sandra / Katia and Sérenade
3.13.2 HUMO and Sportif ’68 / Sport ’68
Chapter 4. Making photonovels
4.1 Creating a photonovel
4.1.1 Subject
4.1.2 Script and plot
4.1.3 Director
4.1.4 Photographer
4.1.5 Actors
4.1.6 Layout
4.1.7 Translations
4.2 Print process
4.2.1 Photomechanical processes
4.2.2 The evolution of rotogravure
4.2.3 Color printing
4.2.4 Press printed photographs
Chapter 5. Photonovels inside the magazines
5.1 Photonovels and advertisement
Conclusion
Appendix: Complete list of all the photonovels published in Belgian magazines
Bibliography
Acknowledgments
The importance of the Belgian contribution to the history of the photonovel.
The Belgian photonovel is the missing link in the amazing history of the photonovel, a comics-inspired form of visual narrative that combines elements from very different genres and media, ranging from literary melodrama, cinema, and of course comics. This monograph discloses the specific Belgian contribution to the genre, in close connection with the singularities of the Belgian women’s and general magazines where these photonovels appeared. If the photonovel is generally considered a typically French or Italian genre, this study demonstrates the importance of a different tradition, which appropriated the foreign models in a very original way. Belgian photonovels are distinct, not only because they tell other kinds of stories, but also because they interact with other types of magazines in ways that are very different from the mainstream forms of the genre in Italy and France. Finally, this lavishly illustrated study is also the first in scrutinizing the technical aspects of magazine printing techniques in the development of the photonovel.
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aPhotonovel =653 \\$aMagazine culture =653 \\$aPhotography =653 \\$aPrinting techniques =653 \\$aGender studies =653 \\$aVisual narrative =653 \\$aGenre hybridization =653 \\$aAuthorship =653 \\$aReadership =653 \\$aNational culture =653 \\$aBilingualism =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aStudies in European Comics and Graphic Novels ;$vvol. 2. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665119$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/328883/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 08640nam 22006132 4500 =001 f08359f7-c21e-49be-b3e3-e36278445da6 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20222022\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462703384$q(Hardback) =020 \\$a9789461664655$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461664662$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664655$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHD$2bicssc =072 7$aAFP$2bicssc =072 7$aTDCQ$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC003000$2bisacsh =072 7$aART061000$2bisacsh =072 7$aNK$2thema =072 7$aAFP$2thema =072 7$aTDCQ$2thema =245 04$aThe Elemental Analysis of Glass Beads :$bTechnology, Chronology and Exchange /$cedited by Laure Dussubieux, Heather Walder. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2022. =264 \4$c©2022 =300 \\$a1 online resource (392 pages): $b116 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aStudies in Archaeological Sciences ;$vvol. 4. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aList of Illustrations List of Tables Foreword
Chapter 1 Contextualizing this volume in the field of glass bead studies Laure Dussubieux and Heather Walder
Chapter 2 Glass beads and human pasts Alison Carter, Elliot H. Blair, Carla Klehm and Lee M. Panich
Part I: European Trade BeadsChapter 3 Characterizing glass recipes for distinctive polychrome glass bead types in Ontario, Canada Alicia Hawkins and Heather Walder
Chapter 4 Simple blue (IIa40) beads from 17th century Mission Santa Catalina de Guale: Dating, origins, and elemental composition Elliot H. Blair and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 5 Glass trade bead analysis at Upper Hampton Farm (40RH41): A case study for 17th and 18th century Non-Cherokee habitation in East Tennessee Valley Jessica Dalton-Carriger and Elliot H. Blair
Chapter 6 Compositional analysis of compound drawn white glass beads from colonial California: Implications for chronology and dispersal Lee M. Panich, Laure Dussubieux, Tsim D. Schneider, Christopher Canzonieri, Irenne Zwierlein, Christopher Zimmer and Michelle Zimmer
Chapter 7 Glass beads and evidence for early “pre-contact” trade in Northwestern Alaska 137 Thomas R. Fenn, Laure Dussubieux, Heather Walder and Douglas D. Anderson
Part II: Glass Beads in South and Southeast Asia
Chapter 8 The exchange of beads in Central Thailand in the protohistoric period: Glass objects from Phromthin Tai Alison Carter, Laure Dussubieux, Thomas R. Fenn, Thanik Lertcharnrit and T.O. Pryce
Chapter 9 Shifting patterns of glass bead cargo of 15th – 17th century Philippines shipwrecks Jennifer Craig and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 10 Sources of glass beads from the High Himalayas: 1200 BCE-CE 650 Mark Aldenderfer and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 11 Inland from the sea: Rethinking the value of mineral soda alumina drawn glass beads from medieval North India Mudit Trivedi and Laure Dussubieux
Part III: Glass Beads in Africa and Western Indian Ocean
Chapter 12 Beads from the lowlands of Northwestern Ethiopia Lindsey Trombetta, Laure Dussubieux, Agazi Negash, Daniel Dalmas, Metasebia Endalamaw, Mulugeta Feseha, Lawrence Todd and John Kappelman
Chapter 13 Inland glass beads in Northeast Tanzania, 8th-17th centuries CE Jonathan R. Walz and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 14 Glass beads at Unguja Ukuu in the late 1st millennium CE: Results of the 2018 excavation in Zanzibar Akshay Sarathi, Jonathan R. Walz and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 15 Chemical analysis of precolonial Indian Ocean glass beads found in the southern African interior: linking global objects to local and regional change Carla Klehm and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 16 Morphology and elemental composition: provenancing glass beads from 12th – 13th century Mayotte 323 Marilee Wood, Laure Dussubieux, Mudit Trivedi and Martial Pauly
Part IV: Glass Beads in the Middle-East
Chapter 17 Elemental composition of glass beads from the eastern Mediterranean region: Chronology and provenance of material from Tel Anafa, Israel Katherine A. Larson and Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 18 South Asian beads at the site of Kish, Iraq Laure Dussubieux
Chapter 19 Technology, chronology, and exchange examined through glass beads Heather Walder and Laure Dussubieux
AppendixSupplementary Materials >
Ancient glass beads as a window to the ancient world
Glass beads, both beautiful and portable, have been produced and traded globally for thousands of years. Modern archaeologists study these artifacts through sophisticated methods that analyze the glass composition, a process which can be utilized to trace bead usage through time and across regions. This book publishes open-access compositional data obtained from laser ablation – inductively coupled plasma – mass spectrometry, from a single analytical laboratory, providing a uniquely comparative data set. The geographic range includes studies of beads produced in Europe and traded widely across North America and beads from South and Southeast Asia traded around the Indian Ocean and beyond. The contributors provide new insight on the timing of interregional interactions, technologies of bead production and patterns of trade and exchange, using glass beads as a window to the past.
This volume will be a key reference for glass researchers, archaeologists, and any scholars interested in material culture and exchange; it provides a wide range of case studies in the investigation and interpretation of glass bead composition, production and exchange since ancient times.
Contributors: Bernard Gratuze (Institut de Recherche sur les ArchéoMATériaux, Centre Ernest-Babelon, UMR 5060 CNRS/Université d'Orléans), Alicia L. Hawkins (University of Toronto Mississauga), Elliot H. Blair (University of Alabama), Jessica Dalton-Carriger (Roane State Community College), Lee M. Panich (Santa Clara University), Thomas R. Fenn (The University of Oklahoma), Alison K. Carter (University of Oregon), Jennifer Craig (McGill University), Mark Aldenderfer (University of California, Merced), Mudit Trivedi (Stanford University), Lindsey Trombetta (The University of Texas at Austin), Jonathan R. Walz (The Field Museum / SIT-Graduate Institute), Akshay Sarathi (Florida Atlantic University), Carla Klehm (University of Arkansas), Marilee Wood (University of the Witwatersrand), Katherine A. Larson (Corning Museum of Glass), Heather Walder (The Field Museum / University of Wisconsin – La Crosse), Laure Dussubieux (The Field Museum)
Supplementary Material 'The Elemental Analysis of Glass Beads' >
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
INTRODUCTION
The Shifting Contours of Postwar Architectural Theory
Sebastiaan Loosen, Rajesh Heynickx, and Hilde Heynen
SECTION 1: Modernism and its Discontents
Meaning and Effect: Revisiting Semiotics in Architecture
André Loeckx and Hilde Heynen
A Voice from the Margins: Robin Boyd and 1960s Architecture Culture
Philip Goad
Contaminations: Art, Architecture, and the Critical Vision of Lara-Vinca Masini
Peter Lang
Architecture Becomes Programming: Invisible Technicians, Printouts, and Situated Theories in the 1960s
Matthew Allen
Troubled Dialogues: Intellectuality at a Crossroads at the Carrefour de l’Europe in Brussels
Sebastiaan Loosen
SECTION 2: Projects of Theory
Institutionalized Critique? On the Re(birth) of Architectural Theory after Modernism: ETH and MIT Compared
Ole W. Fischer
Thinking Architecture, its Theory and History: A Case Study about Melvin Charney
Louis Martin
Dirtying the Real: Liane Lefaivre and the Architectural Stalemate with Emerging Realities
Andrew Toland
Between Making and Acting: The Inherent Ambivalence of Arendtian Architectural Theory
Paul Holmquist
Critical Regionalism: A not so Critical Theory
Carmen Popescu
SECTION 3: The Misuses of History
The Historiographical Invention of the Soviet Avant-Garde: Cultural Politics and the Return of the Lost Project
Ricardo Ruivo
Effete, Effeminate, Feminist: Feminizing Architecture Theory
Sandra Kaji-O’Grady
Anthologizing Post-Structuralism: Architecture Ecriture, Gender, and Subjectivity
Karen Burns
Consequences of Pragmatism: A Retrospect on “The Pragmatist Imagination”
Joan Ockman
CODA
A Discipline in the Making
Hilde Heynen
Critical historiography of architectural theory
It is a major challenge to write the history of post-WWII architectural theory without boiling it down to a few defining paradigms. An impressive anthologising effort during the 1990s charted architectural theory mostly via the various theoretical frameworks employed, such as critical theory, critical regionalism, deconstructivism, and pragmatism.
Yet the intellectual contours of what constitutes architectural theory have been constantly in flux. It is therefore paramount to ask what kind of knowledge has become important in the recent history of architectural theory and how the resulting figure of knowledge sets the conditions for the actual arguments made.
The contributions in this volume focus on institutional, geographical, rhetorical, and other conditioning factors. They thus screen the unspoken rules of engagement that postwar architectural theory ascribed to.
Contributors: Matthew Allen (University of Toronto), Karen Burns (University of Melbourne), Ole W. Fischer (University of Utah), Philip Goad (University of Melbourne), Hilde Heynen (KU Leuven), Rajesh Heynickx (KU Leuven), Paul Holmquist (Louisiana State University), Sandra Kaji-O’Grady (University of Queensland), Peter Lang (Royal Institute of Art, Stockholm), André Loeckx (KU Leuven), Sebastiaan Loosen (KU Leuven), Louis Martin (Université du Québec à Montréal), Joan Ockman (University of Pennsylvania), Carmen Popescu (ENSAB, Rennes), Ricardo Ruivo (Architectural Association, London), Andrew Toland (University of Technology Sydney).
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Listen to an interview with Sebastiaan Loosen, Rajesh Heynickx, and Hilde Heynen at New Books Network: https://newbooksnetwork.com/the-figure-of-knowledge
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aarchitectural theory =653 \\$acritical historiography =653 \\$aintellectual history =653 \\$asemiotics =653 \\$arealism =653 \\$aphilosophy =653 \\$afeminism =653 \\$apragmatism =653 \\$apost-structuralism =653 \\$acritical regionalism =700 1\$aLoosen, Sebastiaan,$eeditor. =700 1\$aHeynickx, Rajesh,$eeditor. =700 1\$aHeynen, Hilde,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461663221$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/291920/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04301nam 22004332 4500 =001 d3a37f0c-484b-4313-ad32-f9cdd4e0c477 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789058679062$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663993$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663993$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJF$2bicssc =072 7$aJFFN$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC000000$2bisacsh =072 7$aSOC007000$2bisacsh =072 7$aJB$2thema =072 7$aJBFH$2thema =245 04$aThe Global Horizon :$bExpectations of Migration in Africa and the Middle East /$cedited by Knut Graw, Samuli Schielke. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (200 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroduction: Reflections on migratory expectations in Africa and beyond
Knut Graw and Samuli Schielke
Why migrate?
On the cause of migration:Being and nothingness in the African-European border zone
Knut Graw
Bushfalling: The making of migratory expectations in Anglophone Cameroon
Maybritt Jill Alpes
Departures and non-departures
City on the move: How urban dwellers in Central Africa manage the siren's call of migration
Filip De Boeck
Spaces in movement: Town-village interconnections in West Africa Denise Dias Barros
Migration, identity and immobility in a Malian Soninke village Gunvor Jonsson
"God's time is the best": Religious imagination and the wait for emigration in The Gambia
Paolo Gaibazzi
Horizons in the making
The Eiffel Tower and the eye: Actualizing modernity between Paris and Ghana
Ann Cassiman
Literacy, locality, and mobility: Writing practices and 'cultural extraversion' in rural Mali
Aissatou Mbodj-Pouye
Engaging the world on the Alexandria waterfront
Samuli Schielke
Afterword
Michael Jackson
Contributors
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aImaginations, expectations, and motivations that propel the pursuit of migration
Although contemporary migration in and from Africa can be understood as a continuation of earlier forms of interregional and international migration, current processes of migration seem to have taken on a new quality. This volume argues that one of the main reasons for this is the fact that local worlds are increasingly measured against a set of possibilities whose referents are global, not local. Due to this globalization of the personal and societal horizons of possibilities in Africa and elsewhere, in many contexts migration gains an almost inevitable attraction while, at the same time, actual migration becomes increasingly restricted.
Based on detailed ethnographic accounts, the contributors to this volume focus on the imaginations, expectations, and motivations that propel the pursuit of migration. Decentring the focus of much of migration studies on the ‘receiving societies', the volume foregrounds the subjective aspect of migration and explores the impact which the imagination and practice of migration have on the sociocultural conditions of the various local settings concerned.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Introduction Helen Thomas, Caroline Voet, Eireen Schreurs
Roles and Challenges of the Hybrid Practitioner Eireen Schreurs, Eva Storgaard, Marjan Michels
PART 1: The Practice Perspective and Its Framework
Chapter 1 Hybrid Practices: A Few Thoughts on Organic Intellectuals in Architecture Christoph Grafe
Chapter 2 The Discipline of Concept and the Judgement of the Eye: Pedigrees of Form in Architectural Practice Irina Davidovici
Chapter 3 Values in the Making: Observing Architects Crafting Their Discourse Pauline Lefebvre
Chapter 4 Notes on Interpretation: Analysing Architecture from the Perspective of a Reflective Practitioner Birgitte Louise Hansen
Chapter 5 The Building within the City: Contingency and Autonomy in Architectural Design and Research Sophia Psarra
Chapter 6 Architects Who Read, ILAUD, and Reading as Direct Experience Elke Couchez
PART 2: Reciprocal Negotiations: Teaching Architecture
Chapter 7 Lost and Found: Intuition and Precision into Architectural Design, Studio Structural Contingencies KU Leuven, 2016–2021 Caroline Voet, Steven Schenk
Chapter 8 Architecture from Drawing: A Brief Inquiry into Three Types Rosamund Diamond
Chapter 9 Time in Unit 9: A Comparison between the Projected Life of the Drawing, the Residues of Living, and Lived Experience Tom Coward
Chapter 10 A Dialectical Sketch: The ARU Studio by Florian Beigel and Philip Christou, London, 2000–2018 Louis Mayes, Philip Christou
Chapter 11 The Building Is Present: The 1:5 Model as a Way of Seeing, TU Delft, Chair Buildings, Interiors, Cities, 2018–2019 Sereh Mandias
PART 3: Different Worlds and Other Places
Chapter 12 The Mysteries Encountered When Finding Reality Helen Thomas
Chapter 13 Starting from the Mess: The “Environment-Worlds” of Architectural Research and Design Sepideh Karami
Chapter 14 Examining Utopias: Comparative Scales as a Transdisciplinary Research Method Jana Culek
Chapter 15 Growing Up Modern: Lessons from Childhoods in Iconic Homes Julia Jamrozik
PART 4: Stepping Back from the Object
Chapter 16 Rem Koolhaas’s House with No Style: The 1992 Shinkenchiku Residential Design Competition Cathelijne Nuijsink
Chapter 17 Instagram, Indifference, and Postcritique in US Architectural Discourse Joseph Bedford
Chapter 18 Being-With/A Tacit Alliance: Architecture, Publishing, and the Poetic Reciprocity of Civic Culture Patrick Lynch
Chapter 19 Agency and Critical Editorial Devices in Recent Little Architecture Magazines Carlo Menon
PART 5: The Values of the Object
Chapter 20 Understanding Architecture Wilfried Wang
Chapter 21 Tracing Álvaro Siza’s Traces: To Fabricate A Construction of Time Paulo Providência
Chapter 22 Drawing as a Research Tool: The Case Of Villa Dall’Ava Luis Burriel-Bielza
Chapter 23 Facade Studies Simon Henley
About the Authors
Exploring different, interrelated roles for the architect and researcher
The practice of architecture manifests in myriad forms and engagements. Overcoming false divides, this volume frames the fertile relationship between the cultural and scholarly production of academia and the process of designing and building in the material world. It proposes the concept of the hybrid practitioner, who bridges the gap between academia and practice by considering how different aspects of architectural practice, theory, and history intersect, opening up a fascinating array of possibilities for an active engagement with the present. The book explores different, interrelated roles for practicing architects and researchers, from the reproductive activities of teaching, consulting and publishing, through the reflective activities of drawing and writing, to the practice of building.
The notion of the hybrid practitioner will appeal strongly to students, teachers and architectural practitioners as part of a multifaceted professional environment. By connecting academic interests with those of the professional realm, The Hybrid Practitioner addresses a wider readership embracing landscape design, art theory and aesthetics, European history, and the history and sociology of professions.
Contributors: Joseph Bedford, Luis Burriel Bielza, Philip Christou, Elke Couchez, Thomas Coward, Jana Culek, Irina Davidovici, Rosamund Diamond, Christoph Grafe, Simon Henley, Julia Jamrozik, Sepideh Karami, Pauline Lefebvre, Birgitte Louise Hansen, Patrick Lynch, Sereh Mandias, Louis Mayes, Carlo Menon, Marjan Michels, Cathelijne Nuijsink, Paulo Providência, Sophia Psarra, Helen Thomas, Steven Schenk, Eireen Schreurs, Eva Storgaard, Caroline Voet, Wilfried Wang.
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
9 List of Figures, Music Examples, and Tables
11 Acknowledgments
Introduction
15 Rethinking Elise Hall’s Legacy
Kurt Bertels & Adrianne Honnold
PART I. Histories
29 “Incomparable Virtuoso”: A Reevaluation of the Performance Abilities of Elise Boyer Hall
Andrew J. Allen
57 Paying and Playing? Elise Hall and Patronage in the Early Twentieth Century
Kurt Bertels
PART II. Critical Organology & Social Identity
81 Exhuming Elise: Rehabilitating Reputations
Adrianne Honnold
105 Instruments Telling History: Engaging Elise Hall through the Saxophone
Sarah McDonie
PART III. Beyond Elise Hall: Gender, Media & Culture in the 1920s
127 “He puts the pep in the party”: Gender and Iconography in 1920s Buescher Saxophone Advertisements
Sarah V. Hetrick
153 Intersections of Gender, Genre, and Access: The Enterprising Career of Kathryne E. Thompson
Holly J. Hubbs
Epilogue
177 Elise Hall and the Saxophone: Updated Narratives and Future Considerations
Kurt Bertels & Adrianne Honnold
185 About the Authors
187 Index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aOn the occasion of the 100th anniversary of the death of Elise Hall, a pioneering musician in the history of the saxophone.
The saxophone is a globally popular instrument, often closely associated with renowned players such as Charlie Parker, John Coltrane, or more recently, Kenny G. Less well known, however, is the historical presence of women saxophonists in the nineteenth century, shortly after the instrument’s invention. Elise Hall (1853–1924), a prominent wealthy socialite in Boston at the turn of the twentieth century, defied social norms by mastering the saxophone, an unconventional instrument for a woman of her time. Despite her career’s profound impact, Elise Hall remains relatively obscure in broader music communities. Her untiring work as an impresario, patron, and performer made a significant mark on the history of the instrument. Yet these contributions have been historically undervalued, largely due to gender bias.
This collection of essays, written by mainly women saxophonists/scholars, re-evaluates Elise Hall’s legacy beyond a discrete history, updating the narrative by highlighting the ways in which her identity and the saxophone itself have influenced historical accounts. By analyzing the sociocultural factors surrounding this innovative musician through a contemporary lens, the contributors challenge previously held narratives shaped by patriarchal structures and collectively affirm her place as one of the pioneers in the history of the saxophone.
Contributors: Andrew J. Allen (Georgia College & State University), Kurt Bertels (LUCA School of Arts - KU Leuven), Adrianne Honnold (Lewis University), Sarah McDonie (Indiana University Bloomington), Sarah V. Hetrick (University of Arkansas), Holly J. Hubbs (Ursinus College).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$amusic history =653 \\$awomen in music =653 \\$asaxophone history =653 \\$aElise Hall =653 \\$agender studies =653 \\$apatronage =653 \\$acritical organology =653 \\$acultural studies =653 \\$amaterial culture =653 \\$amedia studies =700 1\$aBertels, Kurt,$eeditor.$0(orcid)000000029513409X$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-9513-409X =700 1\$aHonnold, Adrianne,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665478$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/338888/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04423nam 22005532 4500 =001 c22aeb8c-142c-477e-b8de-82f23d29bbe8 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20232023\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462701793$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461665218$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665218$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aHBTQ$2bicssc =072 7$aHBTB$2bicssc =072 7$aHIS037070$2bisacsh =072 7$aPOL045000$2bisacsh =072 7$aNHTQ$2thema =072 7$aNHTB$2thema =100 1\$aStanard, Matthew,$eauthor. =245 14$aThe Leopard, the Lion, and the Cock :$bColonial Memories and Monuments in Belgium /$cMatthew Stanard. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2023. =264 \4$c©2023 =300 \\$a1 online resource (338 pages): $b70 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aList of Illustrations Acknowledgements Acronyms and Abbreviations Introduction Chapter 1: Belgians and the Colonial Experience before 1960 Chapter 2: Reminders and Remainders of Empire, 1960-1967 Chapter 3: Quiescence, 1967-1985 Chapter 4: Commemoration and Nostalgia, 1985-1994 Chapter 5: A New Generation, 1994-2010 Chapter 6: 2010 and Beyond Epilogue Appendix Notes References Index
=506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aThought-provoking reflection on culture, colonialism, and the remainders of empire in Belgium after 1960
The degree to which the late colonial era affected Europe has been long underappreciated, and only recently have European countries started to acknowledge not having come to terms with decolonisation. In Belgium, the past two decades have witnessed a growing awareness of the controversial episodes in the country’s colonial past. This volume examines the long-term effects and legacies of the colonial era on Belgium after 1960, the year the Congo gained its independence, and calls into question memories of the colonial past by focusing on the meaning and place of colonial monuments in public space.
The book foregrounds the enduring presence of “empire” in everyday Belgian life in the form of permanent colonial markers in bronze and stone, lieux de mémoire of the country’s history of overseas expansion. By means of photographs and explanations of major pro-colonial memorials, as well as several obscure ones, the book reveals the surprising degree to which Belgium became infused with a colonialist spirit during the colonial era.
Another key component of the analysis is an account of the varied ways in which both Dutch- and French-speaking Belgians approached the colonial past after 1960, treating memorials variously as objects of veneration, with indifference, or as symbols to be attacked or torn down. The book provides a thought-provoking reflection on culture, colonialism, and the remainders of empire in Belgium after 1960.
Free digital appendix: detailed list of monuments in Belgium linked to the country’s colonial past
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKnowledge Unlatched =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aBelgium =653 \\$athe Belgian Congo =653 \\$acolonialism =653 \\$aBelgian history and culture =653 \\$amonuments =653 \\$aculture and empire =653 \\$apostcolonialism =653 \\$aFlemish identity =653 \\$aWalloon identity =653 \\$amemory =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665218$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/267634//_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 03602nam 22004332 4500 =001 087de33d-ac9f-4ef5-ac72-323ee097ab0c =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789061869948$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461664327$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461664327$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aAVA$2bicssc =072 7$aMUS041000$2bisacsh =072 7$aAVA$2thema =100 1\$aCook, Nicholas,$eauthor. =245 10$aTheory into practice :$bComposition, Performance and the Listening Experience /$cNicholas Cook, Peter Johnson, Hans Zender. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =490 1\$aGeschriften van het Orpheus Instituut/Collected Writings of the Orpheus Institute ;$vvol. 1. =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aPreface
Texts
Nicholas Cook
Words about Music, or Analysis Versus Performance
Peter Johnson
Performance and the Listening Experience: Bach's "Erbarme Dich"
Hans Zender
A Roadmap for Orpheus? About non-Linear Codes of Music for the Descent into its Underworld
Personaliae
Colofon
'Theory into Practice. Composition, Performance and the Listening Experience' is the second publication in the series 'Collected Writings of the Orpheus Institute'. The series comprises articles concerning the activities of the Orpheus Institute.
The centrale theme of this book is the relationship between the reflections about and the relization of a musical composition. In his paper Words about Music, or Analysis versus Performance, Nicholas Cook states that words and music can never be aligned exactly with one another. He embarks on a quest for models of the relationship between analytical conception and performance that are more challenging than those in general currency.
Peter Johnson's article Performance and the Listening Experience: Bach's 'Erbarme dich' shows that a performance is an element within the intentionality of the work itself. He looks for scientific methods capable of proving the artisticity of a performance.
The composer Hans Zender, in his A Road Map for Orpheus?, states that a composer must be capable of questioning obvious basic principles (such as equal temperament) and finding creative solutions.
A dutch edition is also available.
=538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$aJohnson, Peter,$eauthor. =700 1\$aZender, Hans,$eauthor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =830 \0$aGeschriften van het Orpheus Instituut/Collected Writings of the Orpheus Institute ;$vvol. 1. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664327$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/257349//_jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04742nam 22006132 4500 =001 03dce908-d590-4b79-bb03-7ad4250682f1 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20242024\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462704176$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461665621$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461665621$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aJPW$2bicssc =072 7$aBGX$2bicssc =072 7$aJPVH$2bicssc =072 7$aSOC072000$2bisacsh =072 7$aPOL035010$2bisacsh =072 7$aBIO018000$2bisacsh =072 7$a4.2.3.0.0.0.0$2bisacsh =072 7$aJBFA$2thema =072 7$aJPVH$2thema =072 7$aDNBX$2thema =072 7$a1KLCS$2thema =245 04$aThe Romero Memory :$bExploring Heritages of International Solidarity /$cedited by Judith Gruber, Jonas Van Mulder, Kim Christiaens, Veerle Draulans, Jacques Haers, Joren Janssens, Stephan Parmentier. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2024. =264 \4$c©2024 =300 \\$a1 online resource (450 pages): $b150 illustrations. =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =506 0\$aOpen Access$fUnrestricted online access$2star =520 \\$aÓscar Romero’s continuing legacy in various societies worldwide.
On 24 March 1980, Salvadoran archbishop Óscar Romero was assassinated while celebrating mass in San Salvador. During the last years of his life, Romero had become an outspoken opponent of the oppression by El Salvador’s dictatorial regime and a beacon of peace and hope in a country torn by injustice, inequality and violence. His assassination sparked global outrage and converged with a growing international awareness of the plight of Latin America. To this day, Romero continues to inspire resistance and liberation movements in Latin America and beyond, both inside and outside the Church. Bringing together perspectives from the fields of history, theology, sociology, law, and cultural studies, The Romero Memory aims to accomplish a polyphonic understanding of the archbishop’s significance. His legacy transcends Western approaches to these disciplines and encompasses religious thought and practice, human rights activism, El Salvadoran mural iconography, Hollywood film, local social institutions and international aid, as well as transitional justice.
Contributing authors: Jonas Van Mulder (KADOC-KU Leuven), Joren Janssens (RoSa/KU Leuven), Kim Christiaens (KU Leuven), Caroline Sappia (UCLouvain), Miguel Villela (University of El Salvador), Bradley Hilgert (Universidad de las Artes), Martin Maier (Jesuit European Social Centre), Sharon Erickson Nepstad (University of New Mexico), Kevin Coleman (University of Toronto), Zachary Dehm (Duquesne University), Rafaela Eulberg (University of Bonn), Valeria Vegh Weis (Buenos Aires University / Quilmes National University), Miryam Rivera Holguín (KU Leuven), Adriana Hildenbrand (Universidad de Lima / Pontificia Universidad Católica del Perú), Jozef Corveleyn (KU Leuven), Lucia De Haene (KU Leuven), Rudina Jasini (University of Oxford), Jacques Haers (KU Leuven).
Ebook available in Open Access. This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =653 \\$aEl Salvador =653 \\$aRomero =653 \\$ainternational solidarity =653 \\$aresistance =653 \\$aheritage =700 1\$aGruber, Judith,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000242770586$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-4277-0586 =700 1\$aVan Mulder, Jonas,$eeditor.$0(orcid)000000016307059X$1https://orcid.org/0000-0001-6307-059X =700 1\$aChristiaens, Kim,$eeditor.$0(orcid)0000000280704176$1https://orcid.org/0000-0002-8070-4176 =700 1\$aDraulans, Veerle,$eeditor. =700 1\$aHaers, Jacques,$eeditor. =700 1\$aJanssens, Joren,$eeditor. =700 1\$aParmentier, Stephan,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461665621$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/340696/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 04253nam 22004572 4500 =001 2c19fbbe-b80d-4e60-bf2c-f1f1377b3de0 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20212021\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$z9789462702714$q(Paperback) =020 \\$a9789461663801$q(PDF) =020 \\$a9789461663818$q(Epub) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461663801$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aAMA$2bicssc =072 7$aARC001000$2bisacsh =072 7$aAMA$2thema =245 04$aThe Tacit Dimension :$bArchitecture Knowledge and Scientific Research /$cedited by Lara Schrijver. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2021. =264 \4$c©2021 =300 \\$a1 online resource (130 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aIntroduction: Tacit Knowledge, Architecture and its Underpinnings
Lara Schrijver
Performative Design Research: En-acting Knowledge in Teaching
Angelika Schnell
Teaching Architecture Full Scale
Mari Lending
Transformative Dialogues: On Material Knowing in Architecture
Eireen Schreurs
A Black Box? Architecture and its Epistemes
Tom Avermaete
Design Knowledges on the Move
Margitta Buchert
A Silent Master: Artistry and Craft in the Work of Peter Celsing
Christoph Grafe
Material Knowledge and Cultural Values
Lara Schrijver
Understanding the multitude of knowledges that constitute architectural thinking, designing and making
In architecture, tacit knowledge plays a substantial role in both the design process and its reception. The essays in this book explore the tacit dimension of architecture in its aesthetic, material, cultural, design-based, and reflexive understanding of what we build. Tacit knowledge, described in 1966 by Michael Polanyi as what we ‘can know but cannot tell’, often denotes knowledge that escapes quantifiable dimensions of research. Much of architecture’s knowledge resides beneath the surface, in nonverbal instruments such as drawings and models that articulate the spatial imagination of the design process.
Awareness of the tacit dimension helps to understand the many facets of the spaces we inhabit, from the ideas of the architect to the more hidden assumptions of our cultures. Beginning in the studio, where students are guided into becoming architects, the book follows a path through the tacit knowledge present in materials, conceptual structures, and the design process, revealing how the tacit dimension leads to craftsmanship and the situated knowledge of architecture-in-the-world.
Contributors: Tom Avermaete (ETH Zürich), Margitta
Buchert (Leibniz-Universität Hannover), Christoph Grafe (Bergische Universität
Wuppertal), Mari Lending (The Oslo School of Architecture and Design), Angelika
Schnell (Academy of Fine Arts Vienna), Eireen Schreurs (Delft University of
Technology), Lara Schrijver (University of Antwerp)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
INLEIDING Maïka De Keyzer (KU Leuven/Denktank Minerva)
HOOFDSTUK 1 Een geschiedenis van het landbouwbeleid sinds 1830 Yves Segers (KU Leuven, Centrum Agrarische Geschiedenis) en Joris Relaes (Centrum Agrarische Geschiedenis)
HOOFDSTUK 2 Een landbouwbeleid voor boer, mens en planeet Kurt Sannen (Biologisch veehouder, freelance onderzoeker en actief bij de Vlaamse en Europese agro-ecologische en biobeweging)
HOOFDSTUK 3 Nieuwe kansen voor biodiversiteit Frederik Gerits (UGent/ILVO), Lies Messely (ILVO), Bert Reubens (ILVO), Stephanie Schelfhout (UGent/HOGENT) en Kris Verheyen (UGent)
HOOFDSTUK 4 Minder water naar de zee dragen: kansen voor de landbouw? Sarah Garré (ILVO), Jeroen De Waegemaeker (ILVO) en Dominique Huits (INAGRO)
HOOFDSTUK 5 De agro-ecologische transitie Myriam Dumortier (INBO), Hanne Flachet (FIAN), Ingrid Pauwels (Voedsel Anders), Suzy Serneels (Broederlijk Delen) en Esmeralda Borgo (Bioforum en freelance journalist)
HOOFDSTUK 6 Groter en efficiënter: toekomst of teloorgang van de Vlaamse landbouw? Tessa Avermaete (KU Leuven)
HOOFDSTUK 7 Veehouders gekneld tussen hamer en aambeeld Luc Vankrunkelsven (Wervel) en Karolien Burvenich (Wervel)
HOOFDSTUK 8 Landbouwers met inspraak in beleid: lessen uit de New Deal Maarten Crivits (ILVO/UGent) en Charlotte Prové (UGent)
HOOFDSTUK 9 Een geïntegreerd voedselbeleid voor een duurzame toekomst Laurens De Meyer (KU Leuven)
HOOFDSTUK 10 De Vlaamse kost, op de kap van boeren in het Globale Zuiden Fairouz Gazdallah (Oxfam België), Suzy Serneels (Broederlijk Delen) en Tom Ysewijn (Broederlijk Delen)
HOOFDSTUK 11 Voedsel verkopen: een vak apart? Bavo Verwimp (Bioboer en landbouweconoom)
HOOFDSTUK 12 Seizoensarbeid: sociaal verantwoord? Johan Nelissen (ACV Voeding en Diensten)
CONCLUSIE Maïka De Keyzer (KU Leuven/Denktank Minerva)
Een progressief voorstel voor het landbouwbeleid van morgen
De vurige debatten rond de stikstofproblematiek, de droogte, het biodiversiteitsverlies, de seizoensarbeid en de overmatige vleesproductie en -consumptie hebben landbouw weer helemaal op de maatschappelijke en politieke agenda gezet. De vraag dringt zich stilaan op of we in Vlaanderen en Europa effectief nog op een duurzame en economisch rendabele manier aan landbouw kunnen doen en hoe die landbouw dan vorm moet krijgen. Het huidige debat is echter sterk polariserend: landbouw versus ecologie, vermarkting versus subsistentie, schaalvergroting versus familiebedrijven, comparatieve voordelen en specialisatie versus diversiteit, enzovoort. Polariserende discussies brengen helaas zelden antwoorden. Dit boek wil daarom de klassieke tegenstellingen doorbreken. Verschillende experts laten de breuklijn tussen ecologie en landbouw achter zich en formuleren aanbevelingen voor een progressief landbouwbeleid. Hoewel elk individueel hoofdstuk oplossingen biedt voor een deelaspect van landbouw, ligt de kracht van dit boek net in de oproep om ad-hocmaatregelen achterwege te laten en te werken aan een coherent landbouwplan. De complexiteit van ons huidig landbouwbeleid heeft nood aan een coherent landbouwplan. Dit boek neemt het initiatief om hiertoe een progressief voorstel te lanceren.
Bijdragende auteurs: Yves Segers (KU Leuven / CAG vzw), Joris Relaes (ILVO), Kurt Sannen (KU Leuven), Charlotte Prové (Ugent), Maarten Crivits (ILVO/UGent), Luc Vankrunkelsven (Wervel), Karolien Burvenich (Wervel), Bavo Verwimp (de Kijfelaar), Sarah Garré (ILVO), Dominique Huits (INAGRO), Tessa Avermaete (KU Leuven), Johan Nelissen (ACV pulse), Laurens De Meyer (KU Leuven), Fairouz Gazdallah (Solidagro), Suzy Serneels (Broederlijk Delen), Tom Ysewijn ( OWW), Myriam Dumortier (INBO / UGent), Hanne Flachet (FIAN), Ingrid Pauwels (Voedsel Anders), Esmeralda Borgo (Bioforum en freelance journalist), Frederik Gerits (UGent / ILVO), Lies Messely (ILVO), Bert Reubens (ILVO), Stephanie Schelfhout (UGent), Kris Verheyen (UGent)
E-boek verkrijgbaar in Open Access.
Deze publicatie is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).
Herbekijk het debat 'Tot de bodem'. Tijdens dit debat onder leiding van Dirk Draulans gingen Maïka De Keyzer (KU Leuven), Heleen Desmet (Bond Beter Leefmilieu), Zuhal Demir (Vlaams minister van Justitie en Handhaving, Omgeving, Energie en Toerisme) en Hendrik Van Damme (Algemeen Boeren Syndicaat) met elkaar in gesprek over de toekomst van landbouw in Vlaanderen.
=536 \\$aKU Leuven$eFund for Fair Open Access =538 \\$aMode of access: World Wide Web. =540 \\$aThe text of this book is licensed under a custom license. For more detailed information consult the publisher's website.$uhttps://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/legalcode =588 0\$aMetadata licensed under CC0 Public Domain Dedication. =700 1\$aDe Keyzer, Maïka,$eeditor. =710 2\$aLeuven University Press,$epublisher. =856 40$uhttps://doi.org/10.11116/9789461664990$zConnect to e-book =856 42$uhttps://bibliocloudimages.s3-eu-west-1.amazonaws.com/412/supportingresources/320169/jpg_rgb_original.jpg$zConnect to cover image =856 42$uhttps://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/$zCC0 Metadata License =LDR 05271nam 22003732 4500 =001 b62e6069-f27d-4167-baa4-ad1b94903517 =006 m\\\\\o\\d\\\\\\\\ =007 cr\\n\\\\\\\\\ =008 241121t20192019\\\\\\\\ob\\\\000\0\eng\d =020 \\$a9789461662965$q(PDF) =024 7\$a10.11116/9789461662965$2doi =040 \\$aUkCbTOM$beng$elocal =072 7$aMNQ$2bicssc =072 7$aMED085070$2bisacsh =072 7$aMNQ$2thema =100 1\$aDelaere, Pierre,$eauthor. =245 10$aTracheal Transplantation :$bCurrent Possibilities /$cPierre Delaere. =264 \1$aLeuven, BE :$bLeuven University Press,$c2019. =264 \4$c©2019 =300 \\$a1 online resource (107 pages). =336 \\$atext$btxt$2rdacontent =337 \\$acomputer$bc$2rdamedia =338 \\$aonline resource$bcr$2rdacarrier =500 \\$aAvailable through Leuven University Press. =505 0\$aPreface
1. Anatomy and wound healing of the cricotracheal airway 1.1. Anatomy of the cricotracheal airway 1.2. Wound healing of the cricotracheal airway
2. Tracheal reconstruction and its limitations 2.1. Tracheal resection 2.2. Cricotracheal resection 2.3. Slide tracheoplasty 2.4. Limitations
3. Obstacles for circumferential tracheal replacement 3.1. Prosthetic replacement 3.2. Autologous tissues 3.3. Tracheal regeneration 3.3.1. Whole organ regeneration 3.3.2. Tracheal regeneration with a biological scaffold 3.3.3. Tracheal regeneration with a synthetic scaffold 3.4. Tracheal allotransplantation 3.4.1. Direct revascularization 3.4.2. Indirect revascularization 3.4.2.1. History of tracheal allotransplantation 3.4.2.2. Experimental tracheal allotransplantation 3.4.3. Clinical tracheal allotransplantation 3.5. Conclusion
4. Optimal reconstructive tissue for patch laryngotracheal repair
5. Orthotopic revascularization and tracheal autotransplantation 5.1. Introduction 5.2. Tumor resection and restoration of sphincteric function 5.3. Tracheal revascularization and temporary laryngeal reconstruction 5.4. Tracheal autotransplantation 5.5. Closure of tracheostomy 5.6. Our initial tracheal autotransplantation approach 5.7. Conclusion
6. Heterotopic revascularization and allotransplantation of the cartilaginous trachea 6.1. Revascularization and rejection of the cartilaginous trachea 6.2. Intercartilaginous incision 6.3. Buccal mucosal grafting 6.4. A more rapid revascularization process and reduced secondary healing 6.5. Conclusion 6.6. Future direction: Circumferential tracheal allotransplantation
Defining the requirements for a successful transplantation of tracheal segments The trachea is one of the most fascinating organs in the human body. At first sight, it may appear to be a simple tube for air transport to and from the lungs. However, the cartilaginous framework of this airway, combined with its ultrathin mucosal lining and rich, but difficult to handle, blood supply, makes it to one of the most challenging tuberous organs to repair and transplant.
In 2011, the trachea was heralded as the first organ that could be engineered with stem cells. In the last years however, it became clear that this achievement was based on scientific deception.
Richly illustrated and in full colour, this ebook is intended to highlight both the intricacies of the laryngotracheal airway and the reconstructive approaches that can potentially restore airway function, particularly in relation to laryngotracheal stenoses and defects. Although, allotransplantation to restore segmental defects is still an unmet need, Tracheal Transplantation. Current possibilities attempts to define the requirements needed for a successful transplantation of tracheal segments.
Includes video clips
* Due to the nature of the video clips, a YouTube account might be required in order to enable access.
Contributors (all KU Leuven): Herbert Decaluwé (Thoracic Surgery), Paul De Leyn (Thoracic Surgery), Margot Den Hondt (Plastic & Reconstructive Surgery), Christophe Dooms (Pulmonology), Jeroen Meulemans (ORL Head & Neck Surgery), Thomas Nevens (Plastic & Reconstructive Surgery), Katarina Segers (Plastic & Reconstructive Surgery), Vincent Vander Poorten (ORL Head & Neck Surgery), Dirk Van Raemdonck (Thoracic Surgery), Geert Verleden (Pulmonology), Robin Vos (Pulmonology), Jan Vranckx (Plastic & Reconstructive Surgery), Jonas Yserbyt (Pulmonology)
Introduction Marie Bourguignon, Bieke Nouws & Heleen van Gerwen
Government ideologies in translation: An enquiry into past Canadian budget speeches Chantal Gagnon
The complexity of a translation policy: Interpreting for ethnic linguistic minorities in a local courtroom in China Shuang Li
Translation guidelines versus practice: A corpus-based study of the impact of the Polish style guide on translations of EU legislation and reports drafted by the European Commission Katarzyna Wasilewska
Institutional translation practices in South Tyrol: An exploratory study on civil servants working as ‘occasional translators’ Flavia De Camillis
Judicial review of translation policy: The case of bilingual Catalonia in monolingual Spain Albert Branchadell
Investigating the status of Italian as an ‘official minority language’ within the Swiss multilingual institutional system Paolo Canavese
Translation, interpreting and institutional routines: The case of Slovakia Marketa Štefková & Helena Tužinská
Flawless in translation? Legal translations in the Flemish legal professional press (1889–1935) Sebastiaan Vandenbogaerde
Translating the Belgian Civil Code: Developments after 1961 Willem Possemiers
Translation in administrative interactions: Policies and practices at the local level in the Dutch language area of Belgium Jonathan Bernaerts
About the editors About the authors Index
Translating ‘grey literature’ and the role of institutional and legal translators
This edited volume documents the state of the art in research on translation policies in legal and institutional settings. Offering case studies of past and present translation policies from several parts of the world, it allows for a compelling comparison of attitudes towards translation in varying contexts.
The book highlights the virtues of integrating different types of expertise in the study of translation policy: theoretical and applied; historical and modern; legal, institutional and political. It effectively illustrates how a multidisciplinary perspective furthers our understanding of translation policies and unveils their intrinsic link with topics such as multilingualism, linguistic justice, minority rights, and citizenship. In this way, each contribution sheds new light on the role of translation in the everyday interaction between governments and multilingual populations.
Contributors: Jonathan Bernaerts (KU Leuven), Albert Branchadell (Autonomous University of Barcelona), Paolo Canavese (University of Geneva), Flavia De Camillis (University of Bologna), Chantal Gagnon (University of Montreal), Shuang Li (KU Leuven), Willem Possemiers (KU Leuven), Marketa Štefková (Comenius University Bratislava), Helena Tužinská (Comenius University Bratislava), Sebastiaan Vandenbogaerde (Ghent University), Katarzyna Wasilewska (University of Warsaw)
Ebook available in Open Access.
This publication is GPRC-labeled (Guaranteed Peer-Reviewed Content).